UC-NRLF
$B bDS T7b
^
^
id
(^
IvlBRARY
OF THB
University of California^
OTKX OK
Received
. I&9 '/900,
Accession No. ^'^ 3^6 ♦ Claris No. ^^^jf
— ^.^ — . ^Ll
/^7
Rk. .7-/7(?
IV-C
/^^ey'tc^^ ^ ^^ <5, ^-
^laMniron ^ress Series
LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE
CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING WORKS :—
THIRD EDITION, with the German spellins: revised to meet the requirements of
the German Government Regulations of 1880.
THE GERMANS AT HOME; A Practical Introduction to German
Conversation, with an Appendix^ containing the Essentials of German
Grammar, and a Synopsis of the changes the German s[)elUng has
undergone through the Government Regulations of 1880.
=>^<^— [Price 2S. 6d.
SECOND EDITION, carefully revised.
THE GERMAN MANUAL ; A German Grammar, A Reading-book,
and A Handbook of Convej-sation in German, [Price 'js. 6d.
* The German Manual ' is intended to follow ' The Germans At Home.' It con-
tains, besides a complete Grammar, a series of interesting anecdotes, stories, fables,
letters, and conversations arranged in progressive order, and finishes with a German
Play, and P'ranz Hoffman's well written and highly interesting story of ' BEETHOVEN,'
especially adapted for this work. It offers great advantages for self-instruction, and
will be very useful to persons who, having a certain knowledge of German, desire to
obtain fluency in speaking and writing the language.
A GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, in two Parts.
Part I, Accidence; Part H, Syntax. With an Appendix, compre-
hending: —
I. The Declension of German Nouns.
II. Essentials of Construction.
III. Essentials of Word-building.
IV. The Use and Signification of tlie
Auxiliary Verbs of Mood.
V. On Punctuation. [Price 3^. C>d.
The 'Grammar' forms the first part of the 'German Manual' and, in this separate
form, is intended for the use of students who wish to make themselves acquainted with
German Grammar chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books. It is
divided into paragraphs, and will commend itself as a text-book to the notice of
teachers who, in pursuing the study of German Literature with their pupils, require a
Granmiar in a concise form for reference and study.
SECOND EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of the
German Government Regulations of 1880.
GERMAN COMPOSITION ; A Theoretical and Practical Guide to
the art of Translating English Prose into German; with an Appendix
containing, among other matters, a Synopsis of the changes the
German spelling has undergone through the Government Regula-
tions of 1880. [Price 4^. Gd.
[A Key in Preparation.']
The book has been arranged so that it may be used with advantage by students
who do not possess the author's other works.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES THE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDER-
GONE THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 1880; a
concise and easy Guide for English students of German desirous of adopting the
new official German spelling. Reprinted from 'German Composition.'
[Price 6d.
[Any one of the preceding books, being complete in itself, may be used
independently of any other book in the Series, according to the require-
ments of the student.!
€hxtn'isan l«ss 5mn
LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE
COMPOSITION
I
HENRY FROWDE
Oxford University Press Warehouse
Amen Corner, E.C.
€hxm)ion ||riss Series
GERMAN COMPOSITION
A THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL GUIDE
TO THE ART OF TRANSLATING ENGLISH PROSE
INTO GERMAN
BY
HERMANN LANGE
LECTURER ON FRENCH AND GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER TECHNICAL SCHOOL
AND LECTURER ON GERMAN AT THE MANCHESTER ATHEN^UM
SECOND EDITION
With the German Spelling revised to meet the requirements of the
Government Regulations of 1880
n\
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
MDCCCLXXXVII
\^All rights reserved'^
7 93 J/ J'
PREFACE. ^^lA-f^
'German Composition' is intended to be a Theoretical and Practical
Guide to the Art of Translating English Prose into good and idiomatic '
German. It is arranged in such a manner that students who have
reached the fiftieth Lesson of the ' German Manual ' may commence and
advantageously use it conjointly with that book. Being complete in
itself, it is likewise adapted for the use of any other students who,
possessing a knowledge of German Accidence and having had some
practice in reading German Prose, wish to acquire the Art of Translating
English Prose into German.
The book is calculated to serve the requirements of the B.A. Ex-
aminations of the London and* Victoria Universities, the Competitive
Examinations for the Civil and Military Service, the Oxford and Cam-
bridge Local Examinations for Senior Students, the Examination of the
College of Preceptors for First Class Candidates, and of similar Public
Examinations — all of which require the candidates to translate English
Prose into German.
I may conscientiously say that I have done all I could to make the
book attractive and useful. The selection of the Extracts has been made
with the greatest care directly from the works of the various authors, and
is the result of many years' attentive reading and research. The pieces
have been almost exclusively chosen from the works of the best modern
English and American writers, and, it is hoped, will be found as inter-
esting and instructive as they are well adapted for translation into
German. They represent all the various styles of English Prose Com-
position, and contain a great variety of subjects, as a glance at the
various pages will show; whilst the fact that the specimens, with only one
or two exceptions, are no mere fragments, but complete pieces in them-
selves, must necessarily add to their value.
The Biographical Sketches of famous men and women, which at
intervals appear in the Notes and are always given in German, form a
special feature of the book. (Comp. S. 127, N. i; S. 138, N. 12 ; and
vi PREFACE,
S. 156, N. I.) They are of various lengths, according to their import-
ance, and have been written to add to the interest of the work and at the
same time to offer the student some useful material for reading German.
With respect to the help given in the Notes, I may state that I have
proceeded with the utmost consideration and care. The great object
I placed before me was to show, by precept and example, that a good
translation cannot be produced by the mere mechanical process of join-
ing together a number of words, as the dictionary may offer them at
first sight: but that it requires great thought and analytic power; that
every sentence, nay, almost every word, has to be weighed and con-
sidered with respect to its true bearing upon the text ; and that a good
rendering is only possible when the translator has grasped the true
meaning of the passage before him.
I have endeavoured to give neither too little nor too much help, but
whenever I found a difficulty which a student of average ability could
not fairly be expected to overcome, I have stepped in to solve it. For
this purpose I have made use of English equivalents and periphrases and
of Rules and Examples, and in cases where neither of these helps was
considered practicable I have not hesitated to give the German rendering
of the word or passage to be translated. The last mode of procedure,
however, I have adopted only when I found that the dictionaries in
ordinary use were insufficient, as is so frequently the case, and more
especially with respect to idiomatic passages, which it is impossible to
render successfully unless the translator is well versed in both languages,
and at the same time has undergone a thorough training in the Art of
Translating English into German, which the present volume professes to
teach. The plan of indicating the rendering of words and phrases by
means of English equivalents and periphrases must be of evident ad-
vantage to the learner, for it teaches him how to think and analyse, whilst
it leads him to render the word or phrase correctly without giving him
the translation itself.
The Notes of Sections i to 1 50 and the Appendix contain in a con-
cise and lucid form almost all the rules relating to the German Syntax,
and in most instances these rules have been illustrated by practical
examples and models. The Appendix gives in thirty-seven paragraphs
the Rules referring to the Construction, the use of the Indicative, Sub-
junctive (or Conjunctive), and Conditional Moods, which for convenient
reference have been reprinted from my * German Grammar,' and to fa-
cilitate the student's work I have added an Index to the Grammatical
Rules and Idiomatic Renderings.
PREFA CE,
Vll
> London,
In a work containing such a great number of Extracts as the present,
there are, of course, many idioms and passages which may be correctly
translated in various ways, and I can therefore scarcely hope that all
my renderings will meet with the approval of every German scholar.
I may, however, confidently affirm here that I have devoted much thought
and labour to this publication, and that I have tried with all my heart to
make it acceptable to teachers and students alike.
In conclusion I respectfully tender my best thanks to the publishers —
Messrs. W. and R. Chambers, Edinburgh,
„ Chapman and Hall,
„ Longmans and Co.,
„ Sampson Low and Co.,
„ Macmillan and Co.,
Mr. Murray,
Messrs. T. Nelson and Sons,
„ Smith, Elder, and Co., and
„ Stanford and Co.,
and to the Editors of —
The Daily News,
„ Daily Telegraph,
„ Globe, ^London,
„ Standard, and
„ Times,
for their very kind permission to make use of the Copyright Extracts
in this publication, and for the cordial manner in which they granted
my request.
Page ix contains a few Hints and Directions for using the Book which
I consider of great importance, and to which I beg to draw attention.
HERMANN LANGE.
Heathfield House, Lloyd Street,
Greenheys, Manchester,
September i 1883.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
A second edition of this volume having been called for, I wish to
express my cordial thanks to the numerous colleagues and friends who
adopted it as a text-book for their classes.
As I am engaged in preparing, besides this book, a third edition
of two other volumes of my * German Course,' and, at the request
of the Delegates of the University Press, also a Key to this volume,
' German Composition,' I think the present moment opportune
for introducing the reformed German spelling which, by Government
regulations, has been taught in German schools for the last five or
six years, and is becoming more generally used from year to year
in friendly intercourse, papers, periodicals, literature, and commercial
correspondence. It is but fair that the students of German in this
country should be taught to spell in the simplified way now
universally practised by their German contemporaries. They will at
least have nothing to unlearn then ; and, although the present spelling-
reform may be considered but a compromise between the older and the
younger schools, there being a tendency in the younger men to go even
further than their older colleagues in the simplification of our orthography
and to make it still more phonetic and uniform in principle, it will take
a long time before the Government will be moved to make modifications
of any importance in their regulations. I confidently trust that the
great trouble I have bestowed upon the revision of the present edition
will be appreciated by teachers and students alike. It will easily be seen
that the alterations of the orthography in the various books forming this
' German Course ' must have necessarily entailed a very considerable
additional expense; but the publication having met with much approval
on the part of the public, I was anxious to leave nothing undone in
order to adapt it in every respect to the requirements of the times and to
make it still more useful.
On examination it will be seen that the changes made are not so many
as may be supposed, and that the principles underlying the German
spelling-reform are simple and easy to understand.
At the end of the Appendix will be found a Synopsis of the
principal changes the German spelling has undergone, accom-
panied by Examples and a few Exceptions to the general rules.
HERMANN LANGE.
Heathfield House, Lloyd Street, Greenhevs, Manchester,
December, 1886.
DIRECTIONS FOR USING THE BOOK,
Each Section should first be prepared for viva voce translation, ivitlj the
assistance of the Notes in class ; then translated in writing ; carefully cor-
rected ; and finally practised, by comparing the English text with the corrected
German version, FOR A second viva voce translation until the student
is able to translate the English text, twit bout the assistance of the
Notes in class, just as readily into correct German as if he were
reading from a German book.
The Grammatical Rules given in the Notes should always be carefully
studied, and the reading of previously given Rules and the various paragraphs
of the Appendix referred to in the text should never be omitted.
The strict and conscientious observance of these directions is
earnestly requested.
The SECOND viva voce TRANSLATION 7- ^l^^f^O^-^f"-^ ^^^*
^^
c^-^
^^.
^^^^z-^^^^-^V-^^^ '
^^^^Ti^-^T-^^
A-
^^
TF
^
' ^ '^*-^^--*-r:^^-'i^-<-o;^^5;^^-«/'?^
GERMAN COMPOSITION.
1. Words which, in the English text and in the periphrases of the English text, are
printed in Italics, must not be translated.
2. When two words are separated by a dash ( — ) in the Notes, they represent the first
and last word of a whole clause in the English text, and the rendering refers to
the clause thus indicated.
3. When two or more words are separated by dots (...) in the Notes, the rendering
refers to those words only.
4. The sign = is used in the meaning of: 'is equivalent to'.
5. As a rule, the periphrases are given in correct English construction.
Section 1.
A GOOD MAXIMA
My maxim is : never to begin ^ a book without finishing ^ it, never to
consider * it finished without ° knowing it, and to study ^ it with^ a whole
mind. — Sir Thomas Buxton.
1, ©runbfa^, m. 2, to begin, an'fangcn. When the Infinitive is used
either subjectively or objectively, it is generally preceded by the preposition \\\,
and is called Supine. Gomp. S. 78, N. 14, i. To form the Supine Present
of compound separable verbs, like an'fiutgen, we must place the preposition ju
between the separable prefix and the verb. The Supine must be used here.
See App. § I. 3, to finish, beenbigen. The Supine is generally used for
rendering the English G-orund (i.e. the verbal in -ing) when the latter is
governed by a preposition, though, sometimes, this form may be rendered by
the help of the subordinative conjunction bap and a finite verb (i.e. one with
a personal termination) ; as —
He judges nvltbout understanMng any (Er uttettt, o'^ne etluaS »on ber 'Bad)^
thing about the matter. ju yer|let)cti, or ot)ne bap cr
ttwae ijon ber @a^c » e r fl e ^ t.
Use the Supine, which is always to be placed at the end of the clause. 4, To
consider a thing finished, einc ©adjc a I e beetibigt Betra^ten. The pronoun * it'
should begin the clause. See App. § 2. .5, without — it, o^ne ntit bcm
Sn^alt be^felben »erh-aut ju fein. 6, to study, jiubie'reu. 7, with— mind
= with undivided attention.
Section 2.
WHAT IS ETERNITY?
The following question was^ put in writing^ to a boy' in the deaf-
and-dumb school* at Paris: "What is eternity.?" "It is the Ufe-time
of the Almighty," was the answer. — Rev. R. K. Arvine.
VOL. IV. B
2 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2.
1, Here the verb is in the Passive Voice. Remember that the German
Passive Voice is formed by the auxiliary tDcrbrit. The verb is in the
Passive Voice whenever the subject is suffering the action expressed
by the verb ; as —
The castle luas built in the year 2)ag %&j{o^ tour be im 3a{|rc 1609
1609. crbaut.
To put a question to a person, cinem cine ^x^^t »or'(egcn. 2, in writing,
fcl)vift(i(^, which place before the p. p. (App. §1). 3, boy = pupil. 4, S^aub;
flummeiianjlalt, f. ; render *in the' by the gen. of the def. art.; at = in.
Section 3.
THE ACTION^ OP^ WATER.
The action of water on ^ our food * is very important. There ' would
be no carrying of food into the system but for the agency of water. It
dissolves everything ^ that ^ we take ^ and nothing ^ that we take as food
can ^^ become nutriment that '^ is not dissolved in water, — Dr. Lankester.
1, * action ', here = operation, SBivfung, f. 2, Use the gen. of the def. art.
The definite article is always required before nouns representing the whole of
a given class, and before abstract nouns taken in a general sense. 3, on =
upon. 4, food = victuals, ©vcifen, pi. 5, This sentence must be construed
in a somewhat different way ; say : * Without the agency (35evmittehinc^, f.) of
water, no food (Sfiatjnmg, f.) would be conveyed into the body,* iimvbe bem
^pv^er feine SfJafjiunq ju'c^efiitjrt irerben. 6, everything = all. 7, ' that ',
here lt)ag. The indefinite relative pronoun tt)a4 is the pronoun generally
required after the indefinite numerals alles?, cttva^, manrf)e^, nicf)tg, viet, and ivenig,
after the indefinite demonstrative pronoun ba3, and also after a superlative
used substantively; as 3)ag ©d^onfle, ivag id) f)abe. 8, ' To take', wh^n used
of food, may be rendered by efTen, trinfen, or genie^en, which latter verb should
be used here. 9, 'nothing — food', may be briefly rendered by 'feine
genojfenc ©veife*. 10, can — nutriment = can serve as nutriment ((Srna^j
rung, f.). The verb bicnen requires the prep, gu, which governs the dat. and
must here be contracted with the def. art. into jjnr; see N. 2. 11, that —
water = before (ef;e, see App. § 17) the same (f.) is dissolved in water.
Section 4.
OP^ WHAT USE IS ITP
When* Franklin made his discovery of the identity' of lightning* and.
electricity*, it* was sneered at", and people asked: "Of what use is it?"
To ^ which his apt reply was : " What is the use of a child ? — It may ^
become a man !" — S. Smiles.
1, Of— it, ffio^u nii^t e«? 2, 'When', referring to definite time of the
Past, must always be rendered by *fll<^'. 3, of the identity, von ber
Sbcntitcit, f. ; see S. 3, N. 2. 4, When the agent from which the action
proceeds is not mentioned, the English Passive Voice is often rendered
by a reflective verb, or by the indefinite pronoun iiiait and a verb in the
Active Voice ; as —
At last the book ^ as found. ©nbUc^ { [^ jj ^ j^J^j^ } bag «8u(]^.
Say * people (man) sneered at it.' 5, A. To sneer at something, ubcr eht>a«
fVotteuj B. 'at it' = there at, tariibcr. The English pronouns *it', •them',
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 4. 3
'that', and 'those', dependent on a preposition governing in German the
dative or accusative, are generally to be rendered by the pronominal adverb
*da' in combination with a corresponding preposition. This is always the
case when 'it' and 'that', in connection with a preposition are used in-
definitely, and frequently when either of these pronouns refers to a noun
representing an inanimate object or an abstract idea. The letter r is inserted
between the adverb ba and the preposition, whenever the latter begins with
a vowel. 6, To — was = Upon this (^ierauf ) he (inverted constr., see
App. § 14) gave f^Qii ©ic \x\\i
you told us. crjd^Uen.
2, See S. 2, N. i ; 'to count', here fc^ci^eu. 8, by = na(^. 4, 3Bciti
papicie. 5, 9ltticn. 6, gdnbcveicu. 7, 'Capital— is'. The literal
translation of this sentence would read very awkwardly in German, say ' Our
capital does not consist in that which we possess, but (S. 6, N. 10) in that
which we are.' 8, Character = A good reputation. 8, 'is', here ijl.
10, ®^«ii(jaftiflfeit, f.
Sec It 071 9.
A GOOD BUIiE*.
A French minister, who was alike ' remarkable * for his * despatch of
business and his constant" attendance at places of pubhc amusement,
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 9. 5
being • asked how he contrived to combine both ohjecis, replied : " Simply^
by never postponing till to-morrow what should be done* to-day/' —
S. Smiles.
1, SeBen^regct, f. 2, 'alike . . . and', folwo'^t . . . Iwie aud^. 3, to be
remarkable for something, ftd^ burd^ ctiwag (x\\^ yi\^mx\.. 4, his— business,
fd)ne((e (Srlebic^mig feiner Slmt^gefrfidftc. 5, constant — amusement, tegcttnafiger
JBefurf) cffentlid)er 93crgnitgunggortc. The prep, burc^, which requires the ace,
must be repeated at the beginning of this clause. 6, 'being — replied';
this sentence requires an entirely different construction in German, say * an-
swered upon the question, how (App. § 16) he made it possible to combine
both (neuter sing.)'. To combine, »ercinigen. The verb 'to make' must be
placed in the Present Subjunctive, since the clause contains an indirect ques-
tion. Read carefully App. §§28 and 30. 7, Simply — to-morrow, Sinfac^
bvibitrd^, bap i^ nie auf tnorgcn ocvfc^iebc. 8, 'to do', here eviebigen. See
S. 2, N. I, and place the verbs in the order pointed out in S. 7, N. 7.
Section 10.
ENGLAND UNDER THE RULEi OP^ QUEEN VICTOIMA.
The peace, the freedom, the happiness ', and the order which Victoria's
rule guarantees*, are** part of my birthright as an EngHshman, and I
bless ^ God for my share "^ ! Where else shall ® I find such liberty ' of
action, thought, speech ^*^, or" laws which protect me so welP^? —
W. M. Thackeray.
1, rule = reign. 2, Use the gen. of the def. art. The definite article
is used in German before names of persons when preceded by an adjective or
a common name ; as —
2) e r armc %x\% \ Poor Fritz !
2) e X ^aifer SBilfietm. Emperor William.
3, happiness = well-being, 2Bo:^(fa^rt, f. 'Victoria's rule', say 'the reign of
Queen Victoria'. 4, to guarantee, gdvd^ren. 5, are part = form a part.
e, I bless = I thank. 7, share = lot. 8, shall = can. 9, ^^reifjeit
beg ^anbetng. Repeat the article before the two following nouns. In German
the articles, possessive adjective pronouns, and other determinative
•words must be repeated when they are used in reference to several nouns
of different gender or number, whilst in English they are only required before
the first noun. 10, Insert 'and' before 'speech', Oiebc, f., and place the
verb fiubcn immediately after that noun. 11, Substitute the words ' and
where' for the word 'or'. 12, gut.
Section 11.
CONCENTRATION OF POWERS.
The weakest living creature ^, by ^ concentrating his powers on a single
object, can ^ accompHsh ' something. The strongest *, by dispersing his
over many, may fail to accomplish anything ^ The drop, by continually '
falling', bores ^ its passage through the hardest rock. The hasty®
torrent rushes^*' over it with hideous uproar, and leaves no trace be-
hind. — T. Carlyle.
1, creature, ffiefen, n. ; strengthen the superlative of the adjective by placing
' a Her ' before it, forming one compound expression, analogous to : 2)ie aUer?
6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION II.
fdjcn jle 53 (unte, the finest flower (of all) . 2, The copula * can ' must be placed
immediately after the subject and its attributes, as has been pointed out in
S. 5, N. 2. 3, * by concentrating his powers', tuxdt} .Ronjifntratiou feiucr ^rafte ;
to accomplish something, eh»a« jjujlanbe bringen. Use the adverbial expression
*at least' before 'something', which will give more force to the German
rendering. 4, The strongest— fail, 2!cm <2tarfilcn ^iiigegen »irb c« burc^
SevfvUtterung feiner Jlrafte nic^t Qclingen. 5, anything, and) nur ba« ©eringjic.
e, to bore one's passage, flc^ einen 2Deg Icijvtn. Place the verb according
to S. 5, N. 2; the adverbial clause *by continually falling' must follov/ it.
7, To render * falling', form a noun of the verb 'faHcn'. The German
language makes frequent use of the Infinitive Present of verbs to form
abstract nouus, whilst the English language uses the Verbal in -ing for that
purpose. Such nouns are always of the neuter gender ; as tai ®eij(n, going ;
ba« (S\\tn unb Xrinfcn, eating and drinking. 8, continual, unablajTig, adj.
9, hasty, ungcftum ; torrent, (Strom, m. 10, to rush over something, ubcr
ttwas tjinwfg'flfirjcn ; * rushes — uproar', say ' rushes with hideous (entfe^lic^) uproar
(®etofe) over the same.'
Section 12.
(X^OJL^ ^^-^^ COOLNESS \
Of the Duke of Wellington's "^ perfect coolness on ' the most trying
occasions. Colonel Garwood gives* this instance. He was' once in
great danger of suffering " ship-wreck. It was bed-time ^ when (S. 4,
N. 2) the captain of the vessel came to him, and said: "It will soon be
all over ' with us 1" " Very well," answered the Duke, " then I (App. § 14)
need not (App. § 12) take off' my boots!" — W. C. Hazlitt.
1, italtblutigfeit, f. 2, Place the genitive after the governing noun, and
say : * Of (!^oii) the perfect coolness of the Duke of Wellington.* Perfect =
great. 3, *on— occasions * = in the most dangerous (gcfa^rvcK) situations.
4, to give = to relate. See App. § 14 for the construction. *This instance*
« the following example. 5, 'to be*, here fi(^ bcjinben. 6, Construe
according to S. i, N. 3. 7, ®c^Iafenon 1 576-1 586. 5, nnnn(\cn. Place the verb after the
relative clause, since the relative pronoun should follow its antecedent
as closely as possible. 6, 'who — religion*, say 'who bcU.nged to
another religion'. 7, to embrace =- to accept. 8, ' to say *, here ' to
reply', cuti^c^pifii. 9, I— men = I rule (^crrfd)cn) over men. 10, of=
over. 11, This noiin is not used in the plural in German. See S. 3, N. a.
12, * The — God', say *God alone rules over consciences (sing.)'.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 14. 7
Section 14.
HOW HUGH MILLERS BECAME A'^ GEOLOGIST.
Hugh Miller's ^ curiosity * was ^ excited by the remarkable traces of
extinct ^ sea-animals in '^ the Old Red Sandstone, on which he worked as
a quarryman. He inquired ^, observed, studied, and became a geologist.
"// was the necessity", said he, "which made^ me a quarrier, thai taught
me to be a geologist." — S. Smiles.
1, ^iig£) 9)lif(er iwurbe am lot^n r)ftoBer 1802 won armen (SItcrtr ju (S!rontarti) in
(Sc^ottlanb geboren. (S"r avBeitctc 15 3af)rc ate gemeiner ©teinbrec^er, befd^dftigtc ftc^
jebo^ iud^veub jener 3eit mit littevarif^en unb njiffenfc^aftlic^en Slrbeiten, kfonbevg ntit
ber ©cologie, ber er ganj neue ^a^nen eroffnete. 2)ur(^ feiuc 2Ber!e :^at er ^\^\\\ bee
Sijfeufc^aft einen uuftevblii^ett Xiamen ertuorbett, unb ate er am 248*611 2)egembef 1856
j^arb, tterlor @cf)otttanb \\\ if)m einen feiner befien @6fine, unb bie ®eo(ogie cinen it)vci-
berebteflen unb ergebenfien Sef)rer. 2, Contrary to English construction, the
indefinite article is not used in German in stating the business or
profession of a person ; as—
He wants to be a soldier. (Sr hjiH ©otbat n^evbeu.
Exception : When the noun denoting the business or profession is preceded
by an adjective, the indefinite article is used in German, as in English :
His father was a clever physician. (Seiu SSater Iwar ein gefd^idter Stvjt.
3, When a Proper Name is used in the Genitive Case, it is generally
placed before the governing noun, as in English: Schiller's poems, @(^if{er^
©ebid^tc. 4, SBipegietbe, f. 5, How is the Passive Voice to be
recognised? *To excite', here teb^aft an'vegen; construe accord, to S. 13, N. 5.
6, au^'gej^orben. 7, in — Sandstone, in einem atten Oiotfanbjleinlager ; on
which = where. 8, * to inquire', here 9^ac()fcvf(f)ungeu anftelleu. 9, 'to
make' requires here the prep, ju contracted with the def. art.; *that —
geologist', x^fx^ii mic^ fi^lief (ic^ auc^ jum ©eotegen.
Section 15.
EXTREMES MEET^
When Diogenes, during the famous festival "^ at Olympia *, saw * some
young men of Rhodes arrayed^ most magnificently, he (App. § 15) ex-
claimed smiling : " This is pride ! " And when, afterwards ^, he met * with
some Lacedaemonians in a mean '^ and sordid ® dress, he said : " And this
is also pride ! " — Rev. R. K. Arvine.
1, S)ic ©xtrcmc berii^rcn ficf>. 2, the festival at Olympia, bie Dti)m^nf(^en
T^ei^e. S)iefe berur)mten ^i\ii, auc^ Dh)mpifd;c @^iele genannt, iourben in jebem fiinftett
3a:^re om eri^en aSoKmonb nad^ ber ©onnentuenbe (5lnfang 3uU) bei D(l)m^ia ju (Ef)ven
beg 3eu3 gefeiert. (Sie bauerten fiinf Xagc unb bejianben in SSettrennen (ju SBagen,
ju ?i3fevb unb ju t^u§) unb in gt)mnaftifd)cn ©pieten aUer 9lrt. 3, Contrary
to English practice, the comma is, as a rule, not used in German
to enclose adverbs or adverbial clauses of time, manner, and place.
4, 'to see', here erblicfen, which place after 'Rhodes'; young men = youths;
*of', here au^; Rhodes, Oifjobu^. 5, 'arrayed — magnificently*. Turn
these words into a relative clause, and say : ' which were most magnificently
(aufi3 ipvdc^tigfie) arrayed (fd)miirfen) ', according to the rule given in S. 7, N. 3, B.
e, to meet with a person, einem begegnen. Place the subject immediately after
* when '. The Lacedaemonian, ber Sajebdmoniev. 7, armfetig. 8, serhimpi.
8 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION l6.
Section 16.
POOB PAY*.
When the Duke of Marlborough, immediately after the battle of Blen-
heim 2, observed ' a soldier leaning * pensively on the butt-end of his
musket, he accosted ^ him thus : " Why so pensive ", my friend, after so '
glorious a victory?" "It maybe glorious V' replied the brave fellow,
" but ' I am thinking that all the human blood I *" have spilled this day "
has only *^ earned me fourpence." — Rev. R. K. Arvine.
1, Slmifctigc Seja^tung. 2, JDic ®(^la(^t bei 93(inb()eim (Engl. * Blenheim*)
njurbe om 13*®'^ Slugufl 1704 »on bent ^crjcg tton SWarlbcrcug^ in ©frbinbung mit bcm
ofiercid^ifc^en $rinjen (^wo^tn gegen bic granjofen gefoc^ten. 93(inb^eif)t ifi. 10, 'and — grave', say 'and like the blossoms must (App. § 18)
glide (fiufen) into an early grave'.
Section 24.
THE WINKIWa^ EYELID.
The '^ object of winking is a very important one. An outside ' window
soon (S. 5, N. 2) gets soiled* and dirty, and a careful shopkeeper ^ cleans
his windows every morning. But our eye- windows must ^ never have so
much as a speck or spot upon them ; and the winking eyelid ^ is the busy
apprentice who, not once a day, but ^ all the day, keeps the living glass ^
clean ; so that, after all 1°, we are litde worse off than the fishes, who ^
bathe their eyes and wash their faces every moment. — Prof. G. Wilson.
I a GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 24.
• 1, ^a9 jfeffnen unfc tct; the subject should
be placed immediately after the conjunction 'that'; little = not much; to be
badly off, fc^Iimm baran fein. 11, who — moment, tctl^t Slugen unb ®eji(^t icben
Slugcnblirf babcn unb trafcj^en.
Sec ft on 25.
A GOOD EXAMPLE.
It is reported that, one day (S. 19, N. 2), the* two great philosophers
Aristippus ^ and ^schines had fallen at variance '. The * following day,
however, Aristippus came to* ^schines, and said : " Shall' we be friends ?"
"Yes, with "^ all my heart!" answered -^schines. " Remember V' con-
tinued Aristippus, *' that ' though I am your elder, yet I sought for peace."
"True^V' replied ^schines, "and for this^' I will always acknowledge
you to be the more worthy man, for ^^ I began the strife, and you the
peace." — Rev. J. Burroughs.
1, Place the subject immediately after the conj. 'that*. 2, Slri^ti^JJUd
aui (Sr^rene irmbe (380 ». 6()t.) ©tiftcr bcr cijrenaifcbcn <|]()i(cfc)?T)fnfc^uIe, ireld^e bic
£c()rc aufilcUte, ba^ ba(5 l^oc^flc ®lucf beg SWenfc^cn im fumlii^en unb geiiligcn 33ergnfigcn
gu fn(i(>en fci. Slrifli^^^uS n?ar cin 3citgcnoiTc bc« @ccrate« unb bet cinjigc ^Ijilofc^^
feiner 3eit, bcr fi(^ fcinc aSortrdgc mit ®clb bcjat|(cn Hep. ^f(^inf« tear cin ^tUru
buf)tcr unb ©egncr bc« 2)cmoficne3, n>nrbc (389 ». 6^r.) ju Slt^cn gcboren, Icbte fvdter ju
9?f)obu3 unb fiebclte enblic^ md^ ^arnoi fiber, tt)o er (314 ». 6^r.) fiarb. 3, to
fall at variance, ftd^ ubcmjcrfen. 4, The = On the ; however, jebod^, which
must not be placed between commas. 5, Use here the def. art. contracted
with the prep, ju into gum, for : The def. art. is often iised to mark the
Gen. Dat. and Ace. of proper names. 6, Shall = Will. 7, t»cn
ganj^cm ^crj;en ! 8, CSiinnerc bid^ baran. 9, Say ' that I have sought for
peace, although I am the elder'; to seek for peace, urn ben ^rieben nad)'fu(!)en.
10, Say 'That is true'. 11, be«t)alb, adv. (App. § 14). He acknowledged
you to be the more worthy man (of us two), (Sx erfanntc bic^ al« ben ffiurbigeren
von un« beiben an ; construe according to this example, and supply the expletive
' anc^' after the object * you*. 12, benn i^ ttwt ber erfie jum ©treit, unb bu
jum S^riebeu.
Section 26.
DESCRIPTION OP A QliACIER.
I must now explain to you * what a glacier is. You see before you *
thirty or forty mountain-peaks, and between these peaks what ' seem to
you frozen rivers. The snow, from * time to time melting and dripping
down the sides of the mountain, and congealing in the elevated hollows
between the peaks, forms a half-fluid mass, a river of ice ', which is called
(S. 4, N. 4) a glacier. As " the whole mass lies upon a slanting surface,
and is not entirely solid throughout, it' is continually pushing, with a
gradual but imperceptible motion, down • into the valley below. — Mrs.
Beecher Stowe.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 26. I3
1, Use the 2nd pers. sing. 2, Place the words * before you' after the
object. 3, Qiaubjl bu ju (Si^ erjiaiTte i^Iuffc ju erBlirfen. 4, which
(App. § 16) from time to time melts, drips down on the mountain-sides (S3crgs
ab^dtige), and congeals (gefriercn), etc.; see S. 16, N. 4. Supply the adverb
ioteber before the verb 'congeals'. The elevated hollow, bic f|6f)er getegenc '^zUi
fpalte. 5, @ig|irom, m. 6, As = Since, ba (App. § 16) ; to be entirely
solid throughout, buvc^ imb bnrc^ fe^ fein. 7, it — pushing, fo fen!t jic jid)
forttwd^renb ; with a . . . but, mit einer jttjar . . . boc^. 8, down — below, ixi
bag unten tiegenbe X^at ^inab.
Section 27.
WITHOUT! PAINS NO GAINS.
It was one of the characteristic qualities of Charles James Fox^ that^
he was thoroughly pains-taking in all that he did. When ^ appointed
Secretary of State, being ° piqued at some observation as to his bad
writing, he actually took® a writing-master, and wrote copies like a
schoolboy until he had sufficiently improved himself. Though ^ a cor-
pulent man, he ^ was wonderfully active at picking up tennis-balls, and •
when asked how he contrived to do so, he playfully repHed : " Because ^^
I am a very pains-taking man." The same accuracy which he bestowed
upon trifling matters ", was displayed by him in things of greater im-
portance ; and ^^ he acquired his reputation by " neglecting nothing." —
S. Smiles.
1, D^ue ^uift fein ©elinnn. 2, 3^ tnoc^te ttorfi^Iagen ju uBerfe^en : 'of
the famous Gh. J. Fox', ireil baburd^ bag a^ev^dltnig beg ®eniti»g ganj^ f(ar a6 geird{)ven (v. tr.) ; nothing
but, luir ; treat, @d)maug, m. 0, every — plate, fanb bo(^ ein jeber tia^ bem
crimen ®ange j^u feiuem ©vflaunen unlet bcm %iUtx etnen SBed^fet »or. 10, for —
interest = which was issued (au^fteKen) for (auf ) the full amount of the remaining
(riicf|idnbig) debt with (nebjl) interest.
Section 30.
PORMATIOlSr OP A CORAL-ISLAND.
I.
It seems to me, that * when the animalcules, which form the corals at
the bottom ^ of the ocean, cease to live, their ^ structures adhere to each
other, by virtue either of the glutinous remains within, or of some pro-
perty in salt-water. The interstices being * gradually filled up with sand
and ^ broken pieces of coral washed by the sea, which also adhere, a mass
of rock is at length formed. Future ^ races of these animalcules erect
their habitations upon the rising '^ bank, and ^ die, in their turn to elevate
this monument of their wonderful labours.
1, 'that when the animalcules . . . cease to live'. This clause may be briefly
rendered by saying: 'that after the death (9lb|lerBen, n.) of the animalcules*.
To translate the last noun, form a diminutive of %\%x. 2, SD^eere^bcbcn, m.
3, 'their — salt-water'. Use the following order of words for rendering this
passage: 'their little houses _ (dim. of ^aug) either through the in them con-
tained glutinous remains (Ubcrrefle) or through some (ivgeub cine) property
of the salt-water held together are (Pres. of the Passive Voice)'. 4, When
the Present Participle is used to denote a logical cause from which we
may draw an inference, it must, by the help of the conjunction 'i)a', be
changed into a finite verb, i. e. one with a personal termination, thus : —
The interstices being gradually filed 2) a nun bie 3lyifd)enrdume a({mat)tic^ mit
up with sand, a mass of rock is at ®anb au^gefiiltt iwerben, fo unvb
length formed. ou^ bem ©anjen enbli(^ eine gelfen*
ntajfe gebilbet.
The tense in which the verb is to be used, must always be determined by the
•context. 5, and— sea, unb mit ttom SJ'Jeere fierangeunUten gerbrocfelten .^ovafleu;
it is a matter of course that the verbs must follow this passage. 6, The
following generations. 7, 'to rise', here ji(^ er:^eben. Present Participles
l6 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 30.
used attributively are inflected like adjectives. Bank -reef. 8, *and
die — labours', translate * and die to (S. 19, N. 7) contribute also in their turn
(i^reifcitg) to the elevation {iix\)oi)m\Q, f.) of this monument of their admirable
work(5liljat,f.)'.
Section 31.
FORMATION OP A COKATrlSLAND.
II.
The * new bank is not long in being visited by sea-birds. Salt-plants *
take root upon it (S. 4, N. 5, £), and ^ a soil is being formed. A cocoa-
nut, or the* drupe of a pandanus is thrown on" shore. Land-birds
visit it" and deposit the seeds of shrubs and trees. Every high tide,
and still more ' every gale, adds something to the bank. The ^ form of
an island is gradually assumed, and last of all • comes man (S. 3, N. 2)
to (S. 19, N. 7) take possession. — M. Flinders.
1, The new coral-reef is (S. 2, N. i) now soon visited by (won) sea-birds.
2, Sea-plants; to take = to strike. 3, unb fo bilbet fi(^ cine ©rbfc^i^t.
4, tie Svuc^t ciucr ^anane. !X)ic ^anane (Pandanus) ifl cine 5lrt $alme unb tuirb
auc^ *|>anban3 (m.) obcr $almnufbaum flenannt. 5, an, contracted with the
def. art. 6, it = the same, to agree with its antecedent 'shore*; to de-
posit, guriicf laffen ; seeds, Same, m., used in the sing. 7, still more =
especially; adds — bank, tidgt etn?a« ^ur SScrgroperung bf3 Oliffd hi. 8, The
latter (biefcS) gradually assumes (an'nc^mcn) the form of an island. The adv.
'gradually* may be made emphatic; see App. § 14, 9, juU^t; *to —
possession' = to take possession of the same.
Section 32.
REYNARD^ CAUGHT.
A fox observed* some fowls at roost, and wished to' gain access to
them by smooth speeches. " I have charming news * to tell you," he *
said. " The animals have concluded " an agreement of universal peace
with one another. Come down and celebrate ^ with me this decree ^"
An old cock, who was well on his guard, looked' cautiously all around,
and the fox, perceiving (S. i6, N. 4) this, inquired ^'^ the reason. "I was
only observing " those two dogs which are coming this way "," replied
the cock. Reynard prepared" to set off. "What**," cried the cock,
"have not the animals concluded an agreement of universal peace?"
" Yes," returned the fox, " but those dogs (S. 5, N. 2) perhaps have not
yet '* heard of it (S. 4, N. 5, B)r — Anonymous.
1, Dcr nbcrliflcte Oieincfe (or (Hcintjarb). 2, to observe = to see ; at roost,
auf if)rct (Stance fiUcn. 3, to — speeches, buvd^ Qlattf 9Bortc i()rer tjabtjaft ju
tvcrben. 4, charming news =» something pleasant. To render 'you* use
the dat. of the persnl. pron. of the and pers. pi. For the construction see
App. § 7. 6, The words indicating the speaker, after a quotation, must
be rendered in an inverted form (see App. § 13). 6, to conclude,
ab' fd)licpcn, str. v. tr. ; the agreement of universal peace, ber aKgemcine 5ticbcn«j
wertrafl ; to come down, Ijcrun'ttifoninini ; supply the adv. alfo between the verb
and the separable particle. 7, fcicvn. 8, ^cf(f)In§, m. 9, to look
all around, ftrf) nac^ alien ®citcn um'fcl)cn. 10, to inquire the reason, ji(^ na(ft
ber Uvfad^e erfiuibigen. 11, I was observing = I observed (beobac^ten).
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 32. 1 7
Which are coming = which come. The English compound forms of the
verb with the auxiliary and the present participle, and of the verb 'to do*
with the infinitive (I do comLe = I come. I did com.e = I came), must be
rendered by the corresponding simple forms. 12, biefcg SSegcg. 13, ft^
jum ^a^cukufen fcereit madden. 14, 5ffiie. 15, ' not yet ', "here noc^ uid;t^.
Section 33.
THE^ MEANS OF COlSrVEYANCB IN THE TIME OF
CHARLES II.
I.
Heavy articles^ were (S. 2, N. i) in the time of Charles II generally
conveyed from place to place by waggons^. The* expense of trans-
mitting them was ^ enormous. From London to ^ Birmingham the charge
was £7 a*^ ton, and from London to Exeter £12, which ^ is a third more
than was afterwards charged ^ on turnpike-roads, and fifteen times more
than is now demanded by ^" railway companies. Coal ^^ was seen only
in districts where it was produced ^^^ or ^' to which it could be carried by
sea, and " was, indeed, always known in the South of England by the
name of sea-coal.
1, 2)ie Seforbevunggmittet %\\x 3eit ^avt3 be^ 3tt)eiten. 2, objects. 3, Safi*
wagcn, which place after * generally'. 4, 'The — them', may be briefly
rendered by the compound noun ' 2)ie 5!rang^Vortf cf^en '. It may here be pointed
out that the German language lends itself more easily than any other living
language to the formation of compound expressions. Many advantages
result from this adaptabihty of the language to express in one single term
which, otherwise, would require a number of words ; but the greatest of these
advantages seems to me to lie in the power it gives us to avoid the too frequent
use of the Genitive, a power which, if rightly wielded, will impart great vigour,
conciseness, and elegance to the student's style of writing. 5, were extra-
ordinary high (grofi). 6, tta^; 'charge', here ?^ra(f)t, f. ; 'to be', here
betragen; £7, iteben ^funb Sterling. 7, The def. art. is used in stating
the price of goods, when the English use the indef. art. ; as —
2)iefcr ^attun foftet funfjig ^fennigJ tie This cotton is sixpence a yard. (10
ISUe. pfennigs = i^^.)
8, The pron. 'which' referring to a whole clause, and not to a particular
word in that clause, should be rendered by the indef. rel. pron. tpa$ ; as —
She acted without thinking about uel(^cr cr fid^
cnblic^ flvun unbmete. @v entbcrftc mit felbjl weifertigten (Spiegel tclf^fc).>cn vcn bi^ babin
uubefannter (S)iopc ben Uvanu^, jwei @aturn«monbe, j^aljlveid^e Doppolilerne, (Stcrntjaufen
imb yiebclflccfcn, unb licfcrtc t)6c^|l und^tige ^eobadUungen uber bic ^Umeten. !l)iefc
(Sntbecfungen, it»el(^e ber JBelt burd^ bic vcn ber fonigiicben ®ei"ellf(^aft ber iliUfCenf^aften
»en3ffentlicf)ten ^ournale mitgetbeilt ipurben, mad)ten iljn balb jum bcrubmteu 3Jtanne.
®v iriirbc von bem .Honige ®corg III jum foniglicf)cn 5l|lronomcn crnannt unb gcno0
(Jbre, Ohibm unb SiBoblfianb, al« cr am 2 5"to" 9iug. iSaa \\\ @lcugb bci 3l»inbfov flarb.
©6 ift unmcglic^, l)ier nic^t and) unglcic^ feiner gelicbten nid)t u>cnig \\\ ben gldn^enben (Srfclgen biefcii gie§en unb l}cc^fl
weifu>uibigen Wanned bcitrug. ®ic \ateiilabt «^anno»cr.
3bve uuldngil v»creffentlicbten SWcmcircn unb 33riefc werbicncn im b>?dM"ten ®vabc ba«
allgemeinc 3ntercffc, i»eld^cti jte nic^t allein in Dentf^lanb, fonbern au^ in (Snglanb
Idcivcvflcvufcu Ijabcu. 2, This passage requires a different construction in
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION ^^, 1 9
German, thus ; * When Sir W. H. was still officiating (func^ie'ren, see S. 32, N. 1 1)
in the pump-room {Xxinti)a\k) at Bath as a member of the band (^a^^ettc), he
had', etc. 3, close at hand, ganj in ber ^Zd^e, which place before the
object. 4, bie »ielbege:^renben SP^iif iggdnger ; to admit of something, ifma^
gefiattcn, w. v. tr. 5, :^inau^'f^ii'ipfen. 6, ©piegct, m. 7, ©c^leifen, n.
8, ba^ Bei^en jum Slnfangen. 9, when — ready, fo w>ax cr auc^ fc^on bereit ;
to snatch up, evgreifen, see S. i, N. 2. 10, and — first = and as the first to
take (ein'nefjtnen) his place. 11, Thus — time = Thus (©0, adv.) he used
every spare-moment ; the spare-moment, ber fceie SlugenbUcf. 12, ' monarch',
here guijl. 13, jum erjieu 5ljlvonomen feinev MU
Section 36.
THE^ AIR -OCEAN.
I.
Enveloping ^ this solid globe of ours are two oceans, one * partial, and
the other universal. There is the ^ ocean of water, which has ^ settled
down into all the depressions ^ of the earth's surface "^j leaving ^ dry above
it all the high lands, as mountain-ranges, continents, and islands ; and ^
there is an ocean of air, which enwraps ^° the whole in one transparent
mande.
Through " the bosom of that ocean, like fishes with their fins (App.
§ 14), birds" and other winged creatures swim; whilst man^' and other
mamalia creep like ^* crabs at the bottom of this aerial sea ^^
1, 2)a« Suftmeer. 2, Say * Two oceans envelop (umgeljen) our solid globe
((Svbfuget). 3, the one partial (teihoeifc) and the other universal (ganj).
The subsequent sentence is best introduced by a colon ( : ), which we use to
direct attention to what is following. The words ^ Inhere is^ must then be
omitted. 4, bag SSettmeer. 5, 'which — all', say ' which fills (erfuKen)
all '. 6, SSertiefung, f. 7, To render * of the earth's surface ', form a
compound noun by combining the corresponding German terms of the nouns
* earth ' and ' surface'.
A. When the component parts of Compomid TsTouns are substantives, we
combine them often without any connecting link; as — bag fiajltiet, beast of
burden ; bag @tabt»iertel, the quarter of a town, ward.
B. Neither do we require a connecting link for the formation of Com-
pound. Nouns the first component of which is an adjective or a particle ;
as— bie ®rof mutter, grandmother ; bag Ungliicf, misfortune ; ber UvqueH, fountain-
head.
C. The Gender of Compound Nouns (with the exception of a few com-
pounds with aWut, m.) is determined by the last component, which is always
a noun.
8, 'leaving — islands'. This passage maybe rendered thus: *so that all the
high lands (@vt)6f|ungen), as (twie) mountain-ranges, etc rise dry above the
same ; to rise, jic^ er^cben. 9, unb bag Suftmeer. 10, umpl'ten ; say ' the
whole globe' (.Kugel, f.) ; ' in', here mit. 11, In this ocean of air. 12, Smce
the four subsequent nouns in this passage represent a whole class, the def. art.
is required before each (S. 3, N. 2). 13, Use this noun in the plural, smce
the noun with which it is connected by the conj. 'and' stands in the same
number. 14, g(ei^ ^rebfen; to creep, um^er fricd^en. The word ' whilst'
being a subordinative conj., the verb must be placed? 15, .^uftmeer.
c 2
20 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION ^y.
Section 37.
THE AIK- OCEAN.
II.
The air-ocean, which everywhere * surrounds the earth, and feeds and
maintains it, is even ^ more simple, more grand, and more majestic than
the'' 'world of waters'; more* varied and changeful in its moods of
storm and calm, of ebb and flow, of brightness and gloom. The ^ at-
mosphere is, indeed, a wonderful thing, a most perfect example of the
economy of nature. Deprived of air, no animal would live, no plant
would grow, no flame would burn, no ^ light would be dilTused. The *
air, too, is the sole medium of sound. Without it, mountains might • fall,
but '^^ it would be in perfect silence. Neither whisper " nor thunders **
would ^^ ever be heard. — Maury, Physical Geography of the Sea.
1, Place the adverb before the verb. 2, fogar noc^. 3, jcne tnad^tige
SBaffertvelt, after which put a full stop and begin a new sentence. 4, This
passage may be construed thus : * It offers a greater variety (SKanuigfaltigfeit)
and changeableness in the transitions from storm to (ju) calm, from ebb to
flow, and from light to gloom (iDitnfet, n.)*. The article (which, if practicable,
should be contracted with the preceding preposition) must be used with the
last six nouns, see S. 3, N. 2. 5, 2)er Suftfrcie ifl in bcr Xf)at ^cc^jl ivunbcrbav
unb gc\ra()rt ein ttodenbeteg Seifpiet won bcm :^an^(>altcrifc^en Scfen bcv SfJatnr.
e. Without (App. § 14) ; would = could, Impf. Subj. 7, unb fein l(Ji(^t ftc^
yerbrei'tcn. 8, Also (def. art.) sound can only be transmitted (fort'vflanjen)
through the air. 9, might = could ; to fall, cin'fturjcn. 10, Say * and
yet the prevailing silence would not be interrupted'. 11, leife^ ®efififter,
ace. 12, lantcn ^onncv, ace. 13, * would — heard', use the active
voice with the indef. pron. man.
Section 38.
CHEERFUL^ CHURCH - MUSIC.
When the poet Carpani inquired "^ of his friend Haydn » how it hap-
pened * that his church-music was ^ always so cheerful, the great composer
made ' the following beautiful reply :
" I cannot make it otherwise '," said he, " I ^ write according to the
thoughts I feel. When ^ I think of God, my heart is so full of joy that
(App. § 16) the^° notes dance and leap, as it were, from my pen; and
since God has given me a cheerful heart, it " will be pardoned me that ^*
I serve him with a cheerful spirit." — Rev. R. K. Arvine.
1, fic()li(I>. 2, inquired of = asked. 8, Sofcpt) J>a\)bn (gcb. ben 3i»ten
W^\\ 1732 JU 9loT)vau in ^jlreid), + ben 3i"*«° SWai 1809 in aiUcn, fcilbcte fic^ burd^
eii^cne« (gtubumt in bev a)?ufif au« unb Icbte bann namcntlid) o\i JlapellnieiOer be«
JVurflcn (5«ttcvl)a^v in 2tUcn. 6r ill ber ©(^o^^fer bev ^^nivbonie unb be5 (Stveicf)*
qnavtetW ; and) l)at cr fid) bur^ bie ^^ei^vunbun^ ber ncneren i^nUvnmentaticnsjfnni^ eiu
befonbcvc^ ^-IWibicnfi ernnnben. Seine iliVrfe finb ebenfc jal)lrei(b, une mannii^falHv^ ;
bnv(^ bie beiben Ovatorien: 'iTiie @d>cvfunfl' (1799) ""^ '^i^ 3abre(^^eiten' (1801)
l)at er jcbcd) feincn Ulamen mit ebevnen i'cttcrn in bie 0)efd)id)te ber .ftunjl einc\etrai^en.
4, Use the Pres. Subj. of fommen, since the clause contains an indirect ques-
tion ; see App. §§ 28 and 30. 6, was — cheerful, jht^ cinen fc fvel)lid>en
lSl;avaftei" tva^e. 6, to make a reply, eine 9lntii>crt ijcben; 'beautiful', here
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 38. ^1
jiimtg; for the construction see App. § 15. 7, anbevg ; for the place of the
negation see App. § 12. 8, Translate the passage ' I write — feel' briefly
by saying: *I write just as (fo lt)ie) I feel', since it would not be in accordance
with the genius of the German language to render the sentence in a literal
way. (©cbanfen fann ntan nic^t fiit|ten.) 9, 2)enle i^ an @ott, fo ijl, etc.;
full of, »of(er. 10, Construe this clause after the following model :
The notes danced and lept, as it S)ie Sfloten tanjten wnb Iju^ften i^nt
were, from /jis pen. gtetc^fam aug ber iJeber.
11, fo tt)ivb man mix ^offentUd^ verjei^en. 12, that = if.
Section 39.
OUR INDUSTRIAL 1 INDEPENDENCE DEPENDS UPON
OURSELVES.
Truer ^ words were never uttered than those spoken by Mr. Dargan,
the Irish railway-contractor, at a public meeting in Dublin.
" I have ^ heard a great deal S" he said, " about the independence that
we are ^ to get from this or that source, yet ^ I have always been deeply
impressed with the conviction, that our industrial independence depends
upon ourselves. Simple ^ industry and careful exactness would ^ be the
making of Ireland. We have, it^ is true, made a step in advance, but per-
severance is" indispensably necessary for eventual success." — S. Smiles.
1, inbujlvieK. 2, A greater truth than that which Mr. D., the Irish
railway-contractor ((SifenBafjn^Unterncl^met), spoke (au^'fP^^*^^^) ^* (^k) a public
meeting in (gu) Dublin, has never been uttered. 3, The words *he said*
should follow here; see S. 32, N. 5. 4, a great deal = much. 5, are
to get, crrangen folleii ; for the construction see App. § 16 ; from, ait3. 6, yet
I have always had the firm conviction. Render *to have' here by l^egen.
7, fc^U(^t; 'industry', here i5(eip,m.; careful, jlrcng ; exactness, ^jii^terfiiKung, f.
8, would establish (begrunbcn) Ireland's prosperity (2Bolf)l<^anb, m.). 9, it is
true, gtuar; see S. 15, N. 3; *to make', here tf)un; in advance, yorludtt^.
10, Here follow the words *for (ju, contracted with the def. art.) eventual
(ettentueK) success'.
Section 40.
ENGLAND'S 1 TREES.
The principal native^ trees are the^ oak, ash, elm, poplar, aspen,
birch, larch, alder, hawthorn, hazel, and willow. The beech, maple,
horse-chestnut *, Spanish chestnut ^ walnut ^ sycamore, acacia, weeping
willow, cedar, and Lombardy poplar have been introduced.
The moist cHmate of^ England is^ eminently suited to the growth of'
forest-trees, and we find that in ancient times the larger part of the
country presented one ^° vast scene of forest, as ^^ the ^'-^ uncleared dis-
tricts of America do now. The ^^ few scattered patches of natural wood
which remain, show " what was once the character of nearly the whole
country. — Hewitt, Physical Geography of England and Wales.
1, See S. 14, N. 3. 2, ein:^c{mif^. 3, bie (Si^e. The article
is repeated in this passage only when the subsequent noun is of different
gender or number from the preceding one. 4, bie SfJoPaj^anie. 5, bie
c(^te ^aftauie. 6, bev SBaanuf taum. 7, (Snglanb^. 8, to be suited
22 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 40.
to a thing, eittcr @ad^c iju'traglic^ fciit; eminently, ou^crorbentlic^, which place
before * jutra^lic^'. 9, Use the gen. of the def. art. The definite article
should be used in all cases where an object is individualised or singled out from
other objects. 10, one — forest = an almost uninterrupted scene of forest,
SS3a(blanbfef)aft, f. 11, as ... do now, \m nod^ jc^t. 12, bic ungelic^teteu
affialtc^ecjentcn. 13, The — remain, !Dic iDenigen jerflreut liegcnbcn Ubcrrefle
natiirti^cr &if)6[^t. 14, Say * show the character which formerly belonged
almost to the whole country *.
Section 41.
THE INDIAN CHIEP\
I.
During the war in America, a company ^ of Indians attacked a small
body ' of British troops *, and defeated ° them. As ^ the Indians had '
greatly the advantage in swiftness of foot, and were eager in the pursuit,
very few of the English escaped ; and those who * fell into their hands,
were treated with a cruelty of which there " are not many examples, even
in that country.
Two of the Indians came up *** to a young officer, and attacked him
with great fury. As " they were armed with battle-axes, he had no hope
of" escape. But, just at ^* this crisis, another Indian came up ^', who
was advanced in years, and was armed with a bow and arrows. The ^*
old man instantly drew his bow ; but, after ^° having taken his aim at the
officer, he suddenly dropped his arrow, and^* interposed between the
young soldier and his pursuers, who were about " to cut him to pieces.
The two Indians retired with respect.
1, 2)et 3int)ianerf|dui.itling. 2, ^aufe, m. 3, ©d^ar, f. 4, troops =»
soldiers. 5, to defeat, in bie ^tuci^t fc^tagcn. 6, When the conjunction
* as' stands for * since', it must be rendered by * t>(l'. 7, had — foot, ben
Written im fiaufen Bebcutenb uBertegen \t?aven ; and — pursuit = and eagerly pursued
the same. For the following clause see S. 27, N. 8, and say ' only few of
the Britons succeeded to escape (bavon'fomnteii) *. I succeed, eg Qelinyt mir.
8, n^elc^e ben Snbianern in bie J&dnbc jleten. 9, there are, c« giebt. The sub-
ject *e3', which must be placed immediately after the relative pronoun, should
be followed by the adverbial clause 'even in that country*. 10, to come
up to a person, fic^ cinem nafjern. 11, auf 9lettung. 12, at = in ;
crisis =» critical (entf^eibuuQ^ttoK) moment. 13, to come up = to appear;
who — arrows = of advanced (»orgefd)vitten) age and armed with bow and
arrows. 14, bet Sllte ; to araw, fpanuen ; immediately, unverjiigU(^, which
may be emphasized by being placed at the head of the clause (App. § 14).
15, Say * after he had aimed (jietcn) at (auf) the officer*; to drop, fallen (affcn.
10, and interposed, unb j^eKte jid). 17, to be about, im 93egrifl[ fcin ; to cut
to pieces, jerfiitcfetn; with respect = respectfully.
Section 42.
THE INDIAN CHIEF.
II.
The ' old man then took the officer by the hand, soothed him into
confidence by caresses, and, having conducted him to his hut, treated him
with a kindness which did honour to his professions ^ He made (S. 27,
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 4'Z. 23
N. 4) him less a ^ slave than a ' companion, taught ^ him the language of
the country, and instructed him in ^ the rude arts that were practised by
the inhabitants. They ^ lived together in /ke most perfect harmony, and
the young officer, in "^ the treatment he met with, found nothing to regret,
but^ that (App. § 16) sometimes the old man fixed his eyes upon him,
regarded^ him for some minutes with steady and silent attention, and
then burst into tears.
1, Say ' Hereupon the old man seized the hand of the officer, sought by
caresses to gain his (bejfen) confidence, conducted him to (in) his hut, and
treated', etc. 2, 33erfpie(^ung, f. 3, his. 4, The verb le^reit,
to teach (old German leran, Gothic laisjan), etymologically signifies 'to cause
a person to know a thing'. This is the reason that it is in German most
generally used with two accusatives : that of the person and that of the thing ;
as — (Bt te^rt mid^ bie Sanbe^f^rad^c, he teaches me the language of the
country. 8el)re niic!^ 2)eine Oied^te! (Sutl^er.) 2Bet tfat bi(!^ fcld^e @tretd)e
getet)rt? (Uf)Ianb.) 5, in — arts, in beti geringen ®efd)itf lic^feiten ; to practise,
uben; by, won; 'inhabitants', here (SingeBornen. 6, They = both; together
= with one another, which place after ' harmony' (@intra(i)t, f.). 7, in —
with, in bet ifjm juteil icerbenben ^e^anblung. Where must the verb be placed ?
Supply the word ' anbereg ' after * nothing'; * to regret', here Beflagen. 8, aU,
9, Say 'regarded him silently/or a while (App. § 9, ^) with steady (unttevlt)anbt)
attention*.
Sectio7i 43.
THE INDIAN CHIEF.
III.
In^ the meantime the spring returned, and the Indians again took
the field. The old man, who was still vigorous, and able to bear the
fatigues of war 2, set out with them, and was accompanied by his prisoner.
They marched above ^ two hundred leagues across the forests, and came
at length to * a plain, where the British forces ° were encamped. The old
man showed his prisoner the tents at a distance ^ : " There," said he, " are
thy countrymen. There is the enemy who ^ waits to give us battle. Re-
member ^ that I have saved thy ^ life, that I have taught ^° thee to conduct
a canoe, to arm thyself with" bow and arrows, and to surprise ^^ the
beaver in the forest. What wast thou when I first took thee to my hut .?
Thy hands were those of an infant. They could neither procure ^^ thee
sustenance nor safety. Thy soul was ^* in utter darkness. Thou wast
ignorant of everything. Thou owest all things to me. Wilt thou, then 1*,
go over to thy nation, and take up the hatchet against us ? "
1, Say 'Meanwhile it became spring'; to take the field, inS %i^ gte'^cn.
2, bie JJrieggkfc^irerben ; 'to set out', here jie^en. 3, more than. 4, to
= into. 5, forces = troops ; to encamp, feitt £ager auf fd^tagen. 6, won
toeitem, which place before the accusative. 7, who waits, ber barauf tauert ;
to give battle = to attack. 8, Sebenfc. 9, A. The definite article
is often used instead of the possessive adjective pronoun in cases where
the possessor is clearly seen from the context ; as —
%^ f)aBe btc ?5ebcr in bcr Jpanb. I have the pen in my hand.
B. The possessor is often indicated by a personal pronoun in the
dative case; as —
3d^ n?ia mir bie ^dnbe U?a[(i^en. I will wash my hands.
24 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 43.
The latter mode of construction must be applied in this case. 10, * I have
taught thee to conduct a canoe.' Read once more S. 42, N. 4, and mark
further that: that which is taught is often expressed in the form of
a Supine, as in this instance. 11, We say 'mit ^^til unb 2Jcgcn'.
12, ubcvfal'Ieit. 13, Qe\vd(/ren; sustenance, 9fiaf|rung, f. 14, lag in
Sinfievni^ gct|uf(t. 15, atfo; nation = people; to take up =» to seize.
Sec /ion 44.
THE INDIAN CHIEF.
IV.
The officer replied that ^ he would rather lose his own life than take
away that of his deliverer. The Indian, bending* down his (S. 43,
N. 9, -^) head, and covering his face with both h's hands, stood' some
time silent. Then, looking* earnestly at his prisoner, he*^ said, in a
voice that was at once softened by tenderness and grief: "Hast thou
a father?" "My father," said the young man, "was^ alive when I left
my country ''." " Alas 1 " said ^ the Indian, " how wretched ^ must he be !**
He paused ^° a moment, and then added : " Dost thou know that ^^ I have
been a father ? I *^ am a father no more. I saw my son fall in " battle.
He fought at my side. I saw him expire. He was covered with wounds,
when he fell " dead at my feet."
1, that — deliverer = that he would rather die than kill his deliverer. See
App. §§ 28 and 30. 2, The two Participles in -ing are best rendered by
using the Imperfect. ^ 3, stood — silent, unb flanb fo eine 3Bcile fd^lreigcnb ba.
4, Say *Upon this (^tevauf) he looked*, etc. 5, he — grief, wub fragtc
tnit »on 3artli(!^feit uub Summer gebdmpfter (Stimnte. 6, \i\\x tioc^ am Seben.
7, ^eimat; f. 8, exclaimed. 9, unhappy. 10, gcgern, i.e. to
hesitate. 11, bap au(^ \. 16, 'and —
Go'. Begin a new clause here, and say : ' " Go," he added (fiigte er bann i)injn)*.
17, anf bcif (followed by the Pres. Subj. of IjaBen). 18, be^ SlfJorgen^, App. § 9.
The verb 'sees', being the governing verb in both clauses, takes the last place.
See App. § 19.
Section 46.
BICE.
Rice forms the ^ chief subsistance of the people '^ in India, China, Japan,
and other eastern ^ countries. Indeed, it supports * more persons than
any other article of food^ In Asia it (S. 2, N. i) is chiefly cultivated in
India, China, and ^ Ceylon ; in Europe : in Lombardy "^ (Italy) and Spain ;
in Africa : in Egypt ; in South America : in Brazil ; and in North America :
in ^ the CaroHnes and ^ Louisiana. Its ^"^ cultivation requires an" immense
quantity of moisture. It ^^ grows best in ^^ fields which can be inundated.
Indeed ^*, the fact that it is usually sown upon watery soil makes it pro-
bable that the first Verse of the eleventh Chapter in ^° Ecclesiastes refers
to Rice. In Egypt, for example, it is always sown while ^^ the waters of
the Nile cover the land, and when the floods subside ^^, (S. 27, N. 8) it is
deposited 1^ in the mud. A strong spirit 1^, called arrack, is distilled
from 2° rice, and^^ the straw is used for making plait for hats and
bonnets. — Nelson's Readers.
1, bag ^auVUfd(i)lic^iie 9flaf)runggniittet 2, Say ' of the inhabitants of India
(Snbieng) ', etc. 3, orientalifc^. 4, ernai)ren. 5, gflci^rnng^avtifel, m.
e. Supply here the prep, auf, which should always be used to render the
English ' in' before names of islands. 7, in ber SomBarbei. 8, auf ben
^aroUnen. 9, Supply the prep. in. 10, 3)er Otei^fiau, i.e. the cultivation
of rice. 11, an — of = extraordinary much. 12, The noun 'rice'
must here be repeated, since the pron. ' er' would refer to ' Otei^bau'. 13, auf.
14, 3a, bie Xfjatfadjc, baf , etc. 15, int ^Prebiger ©alontonig ; to refer to some-
thing, fid) auf i\\\>, m.; rejoicing,
»ie(c Sreubenbej^cigungen ; to be done, gcfd^e^en. 6, fld^ jur J&eimreife an'fc^icfeii.
7, Supply the adverb 'nun* after 'when*. 8, The subject and apposition
must be placed immediately after the predicate. Comp. App. § 15. 9, Say
' My father, O prince (^iirfi), served yours (use the second pers. sing, of the
posses, pron., and continue the address in the same person) his whole life long
at (jur) sea'. 10, lenfen. 11, ba« am aSovberteilc mit cinem gotbcncn ^x^^iw
»erjicvte ©cf^iff. 12, auf. 13, sailed — England = sailed (fi(^ einfc^iffcn)
for (i\u) the conquest of England. 14, tterleit)cn. 15, Say * I possess
in this (t|icjig) harbour a fair with fifty renowned (bcira^rt) sailors ((Secleute)
manned vessel (gvi()rgcug), called (App. § i) the White Ship'. Comp. S. 7, N. 3.
16, ^err. 17, to let . . . have = to grant ; use the Supine, 18, ' to
steer', here - to conduct, geteiten. See 8. i, N. 3.
Section 48.
THE WHITE SHIP.
II.
" I am sorry," replied the king, " that ^ my vessel is already chosen,
and that I cannot therefore sail with the son of the man who served - my
father. But ' the prince, with all his company, shall go along with you
in the fair White Ship manned by fifty sailors of renown."
An* hour or two afterwards, the king (App. § 15) set sail' in* the
vessel he had chosen, accompanied by other vessels, and^ sailing all
night with a fair and gentle wind, arrived upon the coast of England in
the morning. While" it was yet night, the" people in some of the ships
heard a faint wild cry come '® over the sea, and wondered what " it was.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 48. 2 7
1, Say 'that I have already chartered (Bebingen) a ship*. 2, Use the
Perfect, which is used in German to express an action or occurrence both
perfect and past, without reference to any other action or occurrence.
3, Render 'but' by j[et)0(i^, which place after 'shall'; with — company, famt
feinem ganjen ©efclge ; 'to go along', here fatiren, to be placed at the end of the
whole clause, which construe accord, to S. 48, N. 6. 4, An — afterwards =
Soon after. 5, to set sail, aB'ffgeln. 6, To place the qualifying
parts before the word, qualified is one of the most striking peculi-
arities of German Grammar. This construction, called attributive
construction, has been explained in Section 7, Note 3 with respect to the
rendering of the Perfect (or Past) Participle qualifying a preceding noun ; but
it must here be pointed out that it may likewise be used for rendering the
Present Participle qualifying a preceding noun (comp. S. 16, N. 4), and that
it is sometimes even suitable for translating short relative clauses. This, as
long as it is not too much indulged in, imparts to the construction great con-
ciseness and vigour, and avoids the too frequent use of relative pronouns,
which, contrary to English construction, cannot be omitted in German.
(Comp. S. 16, N. 10.)
Examples.
When the fleet, favoured by the 9Ug btc t>on bent f^6nj!cn ^Better
"finest weather, was about to set Begunftigte ^^(otte im SBegriff l»ar
sail, there arose a shout of joy, objufegein, erl^oB jt^ ein »on »ieten
proceeding from many thousands ta it fenb im) here
(to be placed before 'still'), if we will arrive in England at the same time
(jugleic!^) with the others?' The words Mn England' should stand before the
verbs, which arrange according to App. § 18. 6, Say * " If we sail at (urn)
midnight, O prince (see S. 27, N. 8), my fifty men (Scute) and the White Ship
shall nevertheless (bennod^) before the coming morning overtake the swiftest
ship in the service of thy royal father," replied Fitz-Stephen'. — 'The swiftest
— father '= the swiftest in the service of thy royal father standing ship,
(Comp. S. 48, N. 6.)
Section 50.
THE WHITE SHIP. ^
IV.
Then ^ the prince commanded to ^ make merry ; and the sailors drank
out the three casks ^wine, and the prince and^ all the noble* company
danced in the moonlight on the deck of the White Ship.
When at last she ^ shot " out of the harbour of Barfleur, there "^ was not '
a sober seaman on " board. But the sails were all set ^° and " the oars all
going merrily, Fitz-Stephen at the helm.
The gay young nobles and the beautiful ladies talked, laughed, and
sang. The prince encouraged " the fifty sailors to row harder " yet, for "
the honour of the White Ship.
1, Hereupon. 2, that they (man) should make merry. The verb must
stand in the Present Subjunctive, as will be seen from §§ 28-30 of the App.
3, famt. 4, abelivj ; company = retinue. 5, biefe^, to be placed after
* When'. e, shot out of => left. 7, there to be, fld^ befxnben. 8, not a,
au^ nid^t ein einjigcv. 9, Say 'upon the ship*. 10, Qefpannt. 11, Say
*and the oars moved (ftc^ belvcgen) merrily (luftig), whilst F.-St. stood at the
helm'. 12, an'treibeu. 13, harder = faster, 14, bcm tveipcn <£c^iff
ju ©^ren.
Sectio7i 51.
THE WHITE SHIP.
V.
Crash*! — a terrific cry broke from three hundred hearts. It was the
cry (S. 1 6, N. lo) the people' in the distant vessels of the king had
family ^ heard on the water. The White Ship had struck upon a rock,
and * was going down I
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 51. ^9
Fitz-Stephen hurried ^ the prince into a boat with some few nobles.
" Push off," he whispered, " and row to ^ the land. It is not far, and the
sea is smooth '^. The ^ rest of us must die."
But ^5 as they rowed away fast from the sinking ship, the prince heard
the voice of his sister Mary calling ^" for help. He (S. 5, N. 2) never in
his life had been so good as ^^ he was then. He ^^ cried, in an agony :
" Row back at any risk ! I cannot bear ^^ to leave her 1 "
1, ^xad)\ — eg er{;oB ftd) ein an^ brei ^unbert ^el)teu evfc^aUenbev fuvd^terftd^er Slngjis
[c^vei. 2, the people = one ; in = upon. 3, faintly on the water, im»onfcmtnett
i?on ber @ec ^eriibev. 4, imb wax im ©infen Begviffen ! 5, to hurry into
a boat, fc^neU in ein Soot fteigen (ajfen ; with = and. 6, an, contracted with
thedef. art. 7, rut)ig. 8, The — us = We others. 9, Render 'but'
by jebod), which place before the adverb 'fast' (f^ne(() ; to row away, fid) ents
fernen. 10, See S. 16, N. 4 ; for, um. 11, Say ' as at (in) this moment'.
12, The remaining passage will greatly improve by placing the clause ' Row —
risk' before the words ' He — agony'. In an agony, yoH ®eelenana|!; at any
risk, fofte eg, irag eg h)of(e. 13, When there is in a principal clause a transitive
verb, the object of which is contained in a following objective clause, which
often assumes the form of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with ^n, see S. i, N. 2),
the object in the principal clause is frequently supplied by the pro-
noun e^, which then may be called the grammatical object. This is
more particularly the case when special emphasis is given to the verb contained
in the principal clause ; as —
He liked to hear good music. dx lit^it eg, gnte SWujtf ju I)oren.
The deed proves, that she speaks the JDie Xfjat B e it) e i j^ eg, bap fte bie
truth. 2Ba^v^eit fpvic^t.
Section 52.
THE WHITE SHIP.
VI.
They rowed back. When ^ the prince held out his arms to catch ^ his
sister, such ^ numbers lept in, that the boat was overset ; and in the same
instant the White Ship went * down.
Only two men floated ^ : a nobleman, Godfrey by name, and a poor
butcher of Rouen. By and by^ another man came swimming towards
them, whom '^ they knew, when he had pushed aside his long wet hair, to
be Fitz-Stephen.
When he heard that the prince and all his retinue had ^ gone down,
Fitz-Stephen, with a ghastly face *, cried : " Woe, woe to me \^ and sank^"
to the bottom.
1, Supply here the conj. aBer. 2, auffangen. 3, Say *so many
persons jumped into the boat, that it capsized'. 4, Supply the adverb
and) after the verb. 5, to float, auf bem Staffer fd^lt)tmmen ; of Rouen, au^
9louen. 6, ^urj barauf; supply the adverb nod) before 'another'. He
comes swimming towards me, er fommt auf mic^ ju'gefd^iDommen. 7, Say
'in whom they recognised Fitz-Stephen, when he*, etc.; to push aside = to
throw back. 8, had gone down, ben 5!ob evtitten. The auxiliary verb (had)
may here be omitted, for : In subordinate clauses, the auxiliary verbs
(fjaBen, fcin, and luerben) are often omitted for the sake of conciseness
and elegance; as —
30 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 52.
JDap ftc tttir g e n m m e n (tt)urbc), ifl That she ivaj taken from me is my
meiu grofte« fieib. greatest sorrow.
9, with — face, totenbteid^, adv. How must the words be arranged here ?
10, to sink to the bottom, in bic Xiefc ^inab'finfcn. Supply the adv. bann after
the verb, which will establish a closer connection between this clause and the
preceding one.
Section 53.
THE WHITE SHIP.
VII.
The other two clung ^ to the yard for some hours. At length (App.
§ 14) the young noble said faintly'^: "I am exhausted, jW benumbed*
with cold, and can hold * no longer. Farewell, good friend. God pre-
serve (App. § 34) you ! "
So ^ he dropped and sank, and of all the brilliant crowd ^ the poor
butcher of Rouen alone was saved. In ' the morning, some fishermen
saw him floating in his sheep-skin coat ®, and got * him into their boat, —
the sole relater of the dismal tale.
For^ three days no one dared to carry ^° the intelligence to the king; at
length they ^^ sent into his presence a little boy, who, weeping ^^ bitterly,
and kneeling at his feet, told him that the White Ship was " lost, with all
on board.
The king fell to the ground like " a dead man, and " never afterwards
was seen to smile. — C. Dickens, A Child's History of England.
1, to cling to the yard, fic^ oxi cine ©egclflange an'ftatnmern ; for some hours,
cinige (Stunben long ; for three days, brei Xagc lang. 2, fraftlog. 3, vor
^ulte erflarrt. 4, *to hold', here fic^ Ijalten. 5, Say * Upon this (Here-
upon) he fell into the water and sank to the bottom (in bie 2^iefc i|inab'finfcn) '.
6, crowd = company. 7, In the morning, am SWorgcn. 8, sheep-skin
coat, ^c^afvelj, m. 9, nctjmen; the appositional clause *the sole relater
(Uberbringcr) of the dismal (tmurig) tale (^unbe)' must be placed immediately
after the pronoun ' him', to which it belongs ; and mark that : The apposition
must always agree in number, gender, and case with the noun or pro-
noun to which it belongs. 10, to carry an intelligence to a person,
(lincm einc 5Botfd>aft tocrfiinbeii. See App. § 5. 11, tnaii ; into his presence
= to {\\\) him, which place after 'boy*. 12, The Present Participle
may be used adverbially, as in English, to denote manner or state.
Say 'who told him kneeling and weeping bitterly, that', etc. 13, was
— board, wit SWann unb 5Waiieinfcreniievei, after which supply barau6. 3, inbeffeii. 4, Sflatjvungg?
mittel, n. 5, Say 'which one uses for thickening soups', jur SSerbicfung ber
@uV'>)3en. 6, Benu^en and geBraurf>en, which use alternately; as — poultry,
dt)reiib (while, whilst), be changed
into a finite verb, i. e. one with a personal termination ; thus —
Hearing his opponent speak in this 9ltg er feinen @egner fo fpredjett ^ixit,
way, his features assumed an ex- naf)men feine SiiQc ben Slu^bvucf bet
pression of contempt. 95erac^tuug an.
Having given his orders, the officer 5Jla(^bem er feine 93efep erteift ^attt,
rode quickly away. ritt ber Dpjiet fc^neK »on bannen.
Looking at me in a suppliant manner, Snbem fie mi^ fcittenb atifal^, Qt^uj^^
a tear glittered in her eye. eine ^t^rcine in if)vem Sluge.
I saw it r^vben passing the house this 3d} fa^ e^, aU i^ ^eute SJJorgen betm
morning. ^au\i ijoriiberging.
Consequently, the above passage must be rendered thus : ' When Napoleon
saw (bemevfen) a young Prussian soldier who was pressing his flag to (an) his
(S. 43, N. 9, ^) bosom (.^erj^) in the agonies of death (im Xobegfantpfe, which
place after 'flag'), he said to his officers': etc. 2, Say 'You see, gentle-
men'. 3, *to approach' here = to border (an ttVoaS gtenjen). For the
construction see S. i6, N. 4. 4, Say 'Bury this young man (Siingting)
without delay with military honours'. 5, that — write, urn . . . fd;reiben |U
fcnnen. He writes to me once a month, dx fdjreibt einmat monatlid^ an ini(|.
6, Supply the pronoun i:^m (from him) after the Imperative. 7, Seid)ens
tuc^, n. ; ' for him ' must be rendered by the dat. of the pers. pron., which place
after the copula 'will'. 8, 2)er ©enevat ^oumennc War -^ri»atfefvetar nnb
fpdterer S3iogvap^ S'la^clecng be6 @rj^en. ^^^^g ^ •
(TXTNIVERSITY])
3« GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION ^6,
Section 56.
OUR CULTIVATED » NATIVE ^ PLANTS.
Most ' of the fruits which grow on trees, such as our apples and pears,
have * been greatly ^ improved and raised ^ above their natural state by
grafting and other artificial means.
OV cultivated native plants, the chief are celery', parsley, the cabbage,
turnip, carrot, parsnips, and the hop. The onion is ^ a native of South
France, the lettuce of Greece, the radish of China, and the rhubarb,
now ^° so largely used in pies and puddings, of Russia. Cress comes
from" Persia, spinach from some*^ part of Asia, and the Jerusalem
artichoke ^^ from Brazil. — Hewitt, Physical Geography of England
AND Wales.
1, werebelt. 2, cin'^etmifc^. 3, The clause *Most — trees* maybe
briefly rendered by *2)tc meijleu 93aumfn"i(!^tc '. 4, Here follows the ad-
verbial clause * by grafting — means'. 5, bebeutcnb. 6, 'raised — state'
may be elegantly rendered by the p. p. * cultivated' (ucrebett). 7, Say ' The
principal cultivated native plants are', etc. 8, See S. 3, N. 2. I should
recommend to repeat the art. before each of the following six nouns. 9, is
a native o/J fiammt awg. 10, * Now — puddings'. This elliptic clause must
be completed in German. Say * which is now so largely (much) used in pies
(^afleten) and puddings'. 11, au3. 12, 'some', here iracnb ein.
13, ©rbartifc^ocfe, f.
Section 57.
THE BEQUESTS
I.
An old avaricious English gentleman * had three sons, of whom one ■
was a good-natured but light-minded fellow. Whenever (S. 18, N. 6) he
fell * into any trouble, he excused himself on ^ the ground that ^ he was
seeing hfe. His prodigality, however, annoyed '^ his father so much ^, that
he resolved to disinherit (S. i, N. 2) him. His friends interceded* in his
favour, but their efforts were in vain.
When the old gentleman ^° felt his end approaching, he called his sons
together", and said to them: "I leave ^'^ to my son John my whole
estate ", and desire him '* to be frugal." John ^^ in a sorrowful tone, as
is usual on such occasions, prayed heaven to prolong his father's life, and
give him health to enjoy the gift " himself. ^
1, S)a« a3cmta(I)tni(«. 2, ©itgtanber. 3, Say * the one '# 4, to fall
into trouble, in iBerlcciciiIjcit gcratcn. 5, on the ground, bamit. 6, ba^
ct ba« \!eben feuncu levne. Comp. App. §§ 28 and 30. 7, wcvbvieficn. See
S. 5, N. 2. 8, fc()r. 9, to intercede in a person's favour, jii i\unfteii
einer ^JJerfon fprcc^cn. He interceded in my favour, cv j>rac^ jii niciucu cjimOcii.
Supply the adverb jtrar (it is true) after the verb. 10, J^err ; to feel one's
end approaching, fcin C^inbc tjevan'natjeu fii()len. 11, together, ju fl*.
12, * to leave', here = to bequeath. 18, 33of!^umv f- 14, The con-
struction of the Infinitive with an Accusative, so frequently employed in
English as an imitation of the Latin and Greek, is unknown in German.
Such constructions must be rendered by a subordinate clause introduced by
the conjunction ba^; as —
I know him to be an industrious man. 3(^ weip, ba^ ct cin flcipigev 9}?ann ifl.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 57. QO
See also App. § 34, and say . 14, Say 'grows chiefly', in order to make the con-
struction more concise than it would be by using a p. p., which would have its
place at the end of the whole clause, and would thus make the construction
too lengthy.
Section 60.
OCCUPATION OP THE ANGLO-SAXONS.
Fishing (S. 40, N. 9) was a principal occupation, owing ^ to the frequent
abstinences from flesh-meat, enjoined'^ by (S. 59, N. 13) a superstitious
ritual ". Eels were taken * in immense numbers in the marsh lands of
the Eastern counties ; salmon in the river Dee ; herrings along the shores
of Suffolk, Kent, and Sussex, in ^ their annual migration ; while larger
species, as ^ the whale and grampus ', were captured in the open sea.
Hunting and falconry were the field-sports ^ of the great. The beasts of
the forest or chase, which were protected by fines, and reserved' for
privileged persons, were the ^" stag, roebuck, hare, and rabbit. The wolf,
fox, and boar might" be killed by^^ any one with impunity, if (S. 27,
N. 7) found without ^^ the limits of the chase or forest The wild duck
and heron were the" common quarry. — Milner, History of England.
1, Say *in consequence of the frequent fasting'. 2, an'crbncn. See
S. 7, N. 3, B. 3, 9iitug, m. 4, 'to take', here = to catch; nurpbers
= multitudes, SWengc, f. ; marsh lands, 5)?aif(f)gegcnben. 5, in = upon.
e, as = like, irie. 7, ber ©ci^lucrtfifc^ (Delphinus orca). 8, 93crgnu*
^ungeit. 9, referttieren. 10, I propose to use the following seven nouns
m the plural and without the article, in order to avoid the frequent repetition
of the same. 11, Use the Imperf. of biirfen. 12, by — impunity, tton
icbcrnianii ungcjlcaft. 13, without = outside, aupcvl;al&. 14, Say ' the
booty of air.
Section 61.
TENDER ^ TRUSTY, AND TRUE.
I.
(Extract from a Sermon preached to a congregation of children at Chicago.)
\Vhen ' I was in the Sunday-school, and had just begun to read about *
David, I * did not feel sure he ever was a real baby, and had to be fed
with a teaspoon ; or that he ever was a real little boy ° that ^ went to
school as I did, and played marbles ^ and had a peg-top ^ a jack-knife ^
some slate pencils, ever >° so many buttons, and a piece of string *S all
in one pocket ; that '^ he ever had to try hard not to cry when he went
to school very cold ^' mornings; or " that the teacher spoke sharp to him.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 6l. 35
when the little chap had tried ^^ his best to get " his lesson, and *^ did not
get it very well.
1, 3artfuf)tenb, giwetlaffig unb treu. 2, Say * When I went to the Sunday-
schoor, and supply the adverb noc^ after the subject. 3, uUx. 4, Say
* I could scarcely imagine, that he ever really had been a little child and had
to be fed with a teaspoon (mib ntit einetn X^eeloffet :^aBe gefiittert twerben tniiffen)'.
By carefully reading §§ 29 and 30 of the Appendix, the student will see that
the verbs depending on the governing verb 'imagine' must stand in the Perfect
of the Subjunctive Mood. According to S. 52, N. 8, however, the auxiliary
Ycc2i/* H' may be omitted in the clause *that he ever really had been a little child*.
^ 5, Sunge. The auxiliary 'fei' may again be omitted here. 6, that = who;
as I did = Mike myself, M'hich place immediately after the relat. pron.
7, ©d^uffer. Remember that both this and the next clause are depending on the
relative clause ' that— did'; place, therefore, the verb ' played ' after ' marbles*,
and the verb ' had' after ' peg-top'. 8, Jtveifel, m. 9, S'afc^enitteffer, n.
10, ever so many, eine Unj^atjl »on, i. e. no end of. 11, ein @tu(J ^inbfabcn.
12, that — hard, baf er fic^ je i)aU anjlreiigen mu^m. 13, cold mornings,
an cincm fe^r falten 3Worgen, which place after the subject. * To go to school ',
gur (or in bie) @d)u(e gefjen. 14, Say ' or that the teacher had ever scolded
(fd^elten) the little fellow (S3urfd)e), when he had*, etc. 15, to try one's
best, fid^ SWiJtfie geben. 16, to get one's lesson = to learn one's lesson,
fcinc Scftion eriernen. 17, Say 'and had not learnt it well', and supply
the adverb bod& (nevertheless) after the objective pronoun 'it*. For the
position of the verb see App. § 17.
Section 62.
TENDER, TBUSTY, AND TRUE.
II.
But you * know, ministers '^ have to find out all about such men as
David ; and I have found out enough to ^ make me feel sure he was
once a little boy, just like one of you ; that he had * to learn verses, like
you; and didn't like (S. 20, N. 2, A) it, like you; and that he did not
like to go to bed early, or to get up early, like you.
I rather ^ fear that, in the summer, he ^ ate green apples, unripe melons,
hard peaches, and sour plums, as "^ you do ; and ^ got sick, and was very
sorry, and had to take^ medicine, as you do) that he said he would
(App. § 28) never do it again, and that he^® then never did do it again,
as ^* I hope you will neither.
1, Use the 2nd pers. pi., and after the verb supply the adverb 'ja*, which
will be equivalent to the English * I am sure*. 2, bic ^farter, before which
supply the conj. baf. Have to = must; to find out, au^'^nbig madden; all —
David = all (S. 3, N. 7) that relates (fid) Bcjic^en) to (auf) such men as David.
3, Say * to (S. 19, N. 7) be convinced, that', etc. Just— you, tuie t()r. 4, The
auxiliaries 'to have' and 'to be' followed by the infinitive of another verb,
must generally be rendered by the auxiliary verb of mood 'miiffeH'; as —
I have to do it, 3d^ ntu^ eg tf)un. 5, faft, adv. ; see S. 5, N. 2. 6, The
subject 'he' must immediately follow the conj. 'that*. 7, as you do, mc
if)r. 8, that he became (irerben) ill; 'and — sorry*, say 'felt (enH.fnbcn)
bitter repentance*. 9, 'to take*, here cin'ne^men. 10, Here follows
the pron. ' it*. 11, ivie i^r eg f)oifcntIic| al)ven) us'. Place the
pron. ' us' immediately atter the rel. pron. 8, is — perfumery = explains
sufficiently (jur ©euugc) our love for perfumery. 4, to pass away, vmvclfcn.
5, 2Uo()K^cru(|, m. 6, as — can, fo langc \m mcglic^. For the position of
the verbs see App. § 19. 7, to succeed, gciingcn, v. intr. (used with fcin),
governs the dative of the person ; as—
He succeeds admirably in this. IDie« gelingt ifjm ^crtrcfflid^.
Construe the above clause accord, to the preceding example ; perfumer, %\xs
funtcur. 8, ' perfume', here - scent, 2)uf(, m. 9, The relat. clause
'which — plant' is best rendered by the attributive construction, as explained
in S;48, N. 6; peculiar, cigentumUd^. 10, odorous, tt»ol)lric(^enb } its own
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 70. 4I
particular oil, i^r Befonbeveg Dt. The clause ' almost — oil ' must be con-
strued accord, to S. 30, N. 4. 11, of — importance = still more important.
12, Say * which one calls essential (dtl)erif(^) or volatile (|iitcf)ttg) oils'. 13, to
become volatile, ftc^ »erfliid)tigen. 14, when heated = when they are heated
(eriuavmen). Comp. S. 27, N. 7.
Section 71.
ON" PEBrUMERY.
II.
The common or fixed ^ oils, on the contrary, such as olive "^ or linseed-
oil, do not evaporate. This ^ may be easily illustrated, thus : If a piece
of writing-paper be touched* with a fixed oil or grease, (S. 27, N. 8) it
leaves^ a stain, which ^, upon being held before the fire, will not disappear.
Now ^, if any ^ plant has a peculiar smell or taste, it is * generally found
that its essential oil is the cause of this (S. 4, N. 5, B). Consequently',
if we extract this, we really obtain ^° the essence. — Prof. Ascher.
1, feji ; on the contrary, l^ingegen. See S. 15, N. 3. 2, as olive or linseed-
oil, tt)ie bag Dliven-obev Seinfamenol. When two compound nouns which have
the last component in common follow each other, the last component is
generally omitted in the first noun, which is connected with the next one by
means of hyphens. — To evaporate, jtd^ Vevpci^tigen. 3, '^m la^t jt(|
oiif folgenbe 2Beife leid)t belweifen. 4, Turn the Passive Voice here into the
Actice Voice by means of the pron. man, as explained in S. 4, N. 4. 5, 'to
leave ', here = to leave behind ; it = this. 6, The passage ' which — dis-
appear' may be briefly rendered, thus: 'which does not disappear before the
fire*. See S. 32, N. 11. 7, Reverse the order of the first two words in
this clause. 8, any = a. 9, Consequently = therefore, alfo, which
place after the subject * we'. 10, to obtain, geimtmen; the essence (as a
Nom.), ber ber -^fianse eigentitmUci^e S©ot)lgerud^.
Section 72.
OI3- IWSTIWCT^
The^ following most turious instance of a change of instinct is
mentioned by Darwin. The bees carried ^ over to * Barbadoes and the
Western Isles ceased ^ to lay up any honey after the first year, as ^ they
found it not useful io them. They found the weather so fine, and the
materials ^ for making honey so plentiful, that they quitted ^ their grave,
prudent ', and mercantile ^° character, became exceedingly profligate and
debauched", ate^^ up their capital, resolved to work no more, and^^
amused themselves by flying about the sugar- houses and stinging the
blacks. The^* fact is, that^^, by^^ putting animals in different situations ^^,
you may ^^ change, and even reverse, any of their original propensities.
Spallanzani ^' brought ^^ up an eagle upon ^^ bread and milk, and fed a
dove on ^^ raw beef. — Rev. S. Smith.
1, liter ben tierifc^en Snftinft. 2, This clause requires a different render-
ing ; let us say ' Darwin gives the following most ({)6d)ft) curious example of a
change of the animal instinct '. The last noun requires the def. art., as explained
42 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION J 2,
in S. 3, N. 2. 3, to carry over, ^imV6erkingcn. The Perfect Participle
qualifies the noun 'bees'. According to S. 7, N. 3, the words * carried — Isles*
may be rendered either by the attributive construction or by forming of them
a relative clause. I venture to propose the use of the attributive construction
as the more elegant of the two modes of rendering, and more especially in
order to avoid a repetition of subordinate clauses. 4, When the pre-
position *to', in connection with a verb denoting motion, stands before the
names of countries, towns, islands, etc., it must be rendered by *nad}'.
5, Here follow the words * after — year'; to lay up honey, cincn 93orrat oon
^ouig au'fammeln. 6, See S. 41, N. 6 ; it = this; not useful, nid)t mdjx sou
9lu^cn. 7, materials — plentiful, SWatcvialicu jur ^onigbcrcitung in fclc^em
iiberfluiTc »orI)auben. 8, aiif gebcii. 9, prudent = cautious. 10, mtxi
fantiUfd). 11, unmd^ig. 12, to eat up, auf jc()reu. 13, imb fic^
baran evgc^tcn. For rendering the passage *by — blacks' see S. i, N. 3. To
fly about, umfcl)\wdr'men, v. tr. 14, The — is, (§& iji einc au^gcmac^tc X^atfad^e.
15, Here follows the subject * you' (comp. S. 66, N. 15), which translate by the
impers. pron. man. 16, by — animals, tuxd) a^evfe^mig ber Xierc, i.e. by a
removal of the animals. In = into; different = other. 17, Here follows
the object and its attributes, * their original (angcboren) propensities {Xxkh, m.) '.
18, may = can; reverse, in cntgcgengefe^tc Oiid^tungcn leiten. 19, Sajaro
(S))allani;ani, beriJtl^mter itatienif^cr 2lnatom unb 5Jiaturfcvf(^ev, gc&. 1729, + 1799.
20, to bring up, gvop jie^en. 21, bet. 22, mit.
Section 73.
PETER THE GEEAT AND THE MONK.
Peter the Great ordered ^ many foreign books to be translated into the
Russian language, and among others ^ " Puffendorf's ' Introduction to
the Knowledge of the States of Europe." A monk, to whom the
translation of this book was committed *, presented ^ it some time after ®
to the Emperor. The monarch examined ^ the translation ; at ^ a certain
chapter, however, he suddenly changed ^ countenance, turned indignantly
to the monk, and said : " Fool, what did I order ^° thee to do ? Is this
a translation?" He^^ then referred to the original and showed the poor
monk a paragraph in which the author had spoken with great asperity ^^
of the Russians, but which had not been translated. " Go," resumed the
monarch, *' and instantly carry out " what I have bidden thee to do. It is
not to (S. 19, N. 7) flatter my subjects that I^* have ordered this book
to be translated, but (S. 6, N. 10) to instruct*^ and reform" them!" —
Anonymous.
1, Use the auxiliary verb of mood *Irtfffii' as a translation of 'to order',
*to command', and 'to cause', when these verbs are connected with the
auxiliary 'to be* and the Past Participle of another verb; as —
The emperor or^^rf^/ the ringleaders 2)er Jtaifcv lief bie Slnfii'^rer cr*
to be shot. f d^ i c f C n.
The admiral commanded the ships to JDcr Slbmirat lic§ btc ©(^iffe in ©d^laci^tj
be draivn up in order of battle. cvbnung anfjlcUcn.
He caused the money to be paid to me. (Sr liep mir ba« ®flb au5 jal}tcn.
2, Supply here the adverb ond^. 3, ?)5ufffnbcrfi5 93eitvage juv curov^aifd^cn
©taatenfunbc. 4, an'vevtrancn. 5, ubcmi'djcn ; it « the same, which must
agree with its antecedent 'translation'. 6, after, bavauf. 7, ^riifen.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 73. 43
8, Bet. 9, to change countenance, bie ^arBe Jt)C(!^fe(n. 10, *to order*,
here 13efer)tett. See S. 48, N. 2. 11, Say ' Hereupon he opened (auf f^lagen)
the original'. 12, ©c^cirfe, f.; had spoken . . . of = had expressed himself
(jtd^ au^'fpi^ec^cn) . . . about. 13, ^emc^ten. 14, Inverted construction.
15, Belef^ren. 16, refovmtercn ; the prep, ju must be repeated before this verb.
Section 74.
THE BEAUTY OP THE EYE.
I.
Look * how beautiful the human eye is, excelling ^ in beauty the eye
of every creature ! The eyes of many 0/ the lower animals are doubtless
very beautiful. All ^ of us must have admired the bold, fierce, bright eye
of the eagle ; the large, gentle, brown eye of the ox ; the treacherous
green eye of the cat, waxing ^ and waning ^ like the moon, as ® the sun
shines upon it (S. 4, N. 5) or '^ deserts it ; the pert eye of the sparrow ;
the sly eye of the fox ; the peering ^ Uttle bead ^ of black enamel in ^" the
mouse's head ; the^^ gem-Hke eye which ^^ redeems the toad from ugHness ;
and the intelKgent, affectionate expression, which ^^ looks out from the
human-Hke eye of the horse and dog. There ^'^ are these and the eyes
of many other animals full of beauty ; but ^^ there is a glory which ex-
celleth in the eye of man.
1, Use the 2nd pers. sing. 2, Say * and how it excelleth in (an) beauty
the eye of every other creature ! ' The words ' in beauty ' should be placed
before the verb. 3, All of us, lt»ir iiHe ; all of them, fic atlc ; all of you,
i^t (or (Sic) alte. Render the words *must have' by 'have certainly'. The
p.p. should be placed after 'eagle'. 4, jic^ ttergrofern. 5, |t(^ ^ix-,
fUiuern. 6, as = according as, j[e ttad^bem. 7, or deserts it = or not.
8, fovfc^enb. ^ 9, ^erlenauge. 10, im SWaufefo^fc^en. 11, bag eiiiem
(Ebetfieine gteid^enbc 2lugc. 12, Say 'which lets us forget the ugliness of the
toad*. 13, which — the = in the. 14, There are these . . . full =
These ... are full. Full of, yo[(er. 15, im Sluflc be^ 9}Jettf(!§en ieboi^ tiegt eine
af(eg ubevtwffmbe ^x^^\.
Section 75.
THE BEAUTY OP THE EYE,
II.
We realise ^ this fully only when ^ we gaze into the faces of those we
love. It^ is their eyes (S. i6, N. lo) we look at * when we are near them,
and ^ recall when we are ^ far away. The face is a "^ blank without the
eye, and the eye seems to concentrate every ® feature in itself. // is the
eye that smiles, not the lips ; it is the eye that Hstens ^, not the ear ; it ^®
that frowns, not the brow ; it ^^ that mourns, not the voice. Every sense
and every faculty ^^ seems to^^ flow toward it, and find expression through
it ^*, nay ^^ to be lost in it ; for all must have felt at times as *" if a man's
eye was not a part of him, but (S. 6, N. lo) the man himself; as" if it
had not merely life, but also a ^^ personality of its own ; — as ^^ if it was
not only a living, but also a thinking being. — Prof. G. Wilson.
44 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION y^.
1, *to realise', here =to comprehend, begreifen. The object *this' may be
emphasized by being placed at the head of the clause. Fully only, eifl gan^.
2, Say 'when we look upon (betrad^ten) the face (9lntli^, n.) of our loved ones
(unfercr Sicbcn)'. 3, ©^ ftnb. 4, onbtiffen. 5, and which we recall
(fic^ jurucfrufcn). 6, are far away, fern tton itjncn hjcilen. 7, a blank =
expressionless. 8, Supply here the adj. Mndividual' (cinjetn). 9, laufc^eti.
10, Say 'the eye frowns (oilmen, i.e. to look angry)'. 11, Say 'the eye is
sad*. 12, ©emut^flimmung, f. 13, to — it, ba^in gu jlromen. 14, Mt*,
here = the same. 15, \a, barin aufjitget|cn. 16, as if . . . was, aU trdrc ;
a man's eye = the eye of a man. 17, as if it had, aU l^atte c3. 18, a
personality of its own = a self-dependent personality, 19, as if it was,
aU toaxt ed.
Section 76.
A PUNEBAL DANCED
Drums were beating^, horns blowing^, and* people were seen all
running in one direction. The cause was a funeral dance. I joined^
the crowd, and soon found myself in* the midst of the entertainment^.
The dancers were most (^od)ft) grotesquely ® got up ®. About a dozen
huge ostrich feathers adorned their helmets. " Leopard or black and white
monkey-skins^" were suspended" from their shoulders, and a leather,
tied (S. 7, N. 3, ^) round the waist, covered a large iron bell which was
strapped ^^ upon the loins of "each dancer ; this they rang ^^ to the time of
the dance. A large crowd got up in^* this style ^'^ created" an inde-
scribable hubbub, heightened ^^ by the blowing of ^^ horns and the beating
of seven nogaras " of various notes '^^. Every dancer wore ^^ an antelope's
horn "^"^ suspended round the neck, which he blew occasionally in ^ the
height of his excitement. — Sir S. Baker, The Albert N'yanza.
1, C^in %
LOVEIiY".
I.
In ' no place in the world has individual character more * weight than
at a public school. Remember'^ this, I beseech^ you, all you boys who^
are getting into the upper forms. Now® is the time when you may' have
more'" influence for good or evil in the society you live in than you ever
can have " again. Quit ^'^ yourselves like men, then ; speak out " and
stand up for whatever is true, manly, and lovely. Never (S. 68, N. 2)
try to be popular", but only do your duty, and help^* others to do theirs ;
and when you leave the school (S. 27, N. 8), the^^ tone of feeling in it
will be higher than you found it, and so you " will do good to " genera-
tions of your countrymen yet unborn. For boys follow one another in
herds like sheep, for ^® good or evil ; they " hate thinking, and ^® have
rarely any settled '^'^ principles.
V Use the 2nd pers. pi.; whatever = all that; see S. 3, N. 7, 2, fd^on.
3, In no place = Nowhere. 4, more weight = greater influence. 5, Re-
member this = Think (2nd pers. pi.) of it; see S. 4, N. 5, 5. 6, bitten.
7, ®ft (m. sing.), tie (f. sing.), and bic (pi.) must be used as relative pro-
nouns in reference to a personal pronoun of the first or second person of
either number, and also in reference to the personal pronoun of the third
person plural (@ic) used instead of the second person plural. For the sake of
emphasis the personal pronoun is frequently repeated after the relative pro-
noun, and the verb must then agree with the personal pronoun, as the following
examples will show.
S3ctf(f|mdt)fi bn nti^, bie \6^ beine Dost thou disdain mcy ivbo am your
Stcunbin bin? friend?
3(^, ber iH) bi(i^ »ott beinen S^einben /, enben. 17, bocf), adverbial conjunction, see App. 24, JS.
18, SIKenge, f., only used in the sing. 19, as — believe, ba^ eg fic^ faum gtauben
td§t. 20, that — medicinally = it (to agree with $lvtiM) could (Pres. Subj.)
only be used (benu^en) for (ju) medical purposes (S^ecf, m.}.
Section ^Q.
THE liOlNTDO]^ DOCKS.
n.
On* another floor of the same building may^ be found bundles of
Pimento^ sticks and Malacca* canes, a great store of mother-of-pearl,
a heap of delicate ^, richly-tinted ear-shells ^, and a quantity of ivory.
Here are elephants' teeth, some "^ of which are larger than bricks and
weigh fourteen pounds. Passing^ out of this building, we find® ourselves
in an enormous shed . with little black boards, hung ^° at intervals, and
bearing the names of vessels. Beneath these boards are " goods lying
ready for shipment, and these are at least as varied ^^ as the imports ^^.
Here are pickles^*, blacking, a*^ cartload or so ^bricks, and scores" of
anvils. There ^'^ are church-bells, a chest of drawers, a rocking-horse,
a mangle, and boxes, bales, and barrels innumerable". — 'The Globe'
Newspaper.
1, 3tt. 2, Use the Active Voice with 'man', and say 'one finds'.
Comp. S. 4, N. 4. For the constr. see App. § 14. 3, S^etfen^feffer, m.
4, 9)?ataffarot)r. 5, jart. 6, ©eeoljrinufdjeln. 7, The clause must
commence with the words ' of which'. 8, * To pass out' here =to leave,
V. trans. Construe according to S. 55, N. i. 9, to find oneself, ftd^
befinben. 10, auf {jdngen ; at, in. Construe according to S. 7, N. 3, B.
11, are — shipment, tiegen gur (Sinfcf)iffung fceftittttttte 2Baren. 12, yerfd^iebencr
Slit. 13, (Sinfu^rartifet. i4. Use this noun in its unaltered form.
15, Say 'one or two loads o/" bricks'. 16, scores of, eine Unja^t »cn.
17. 3)ort fiub. Comp. S. 82, N. 7. 18, in gapofer «)»enge.
£ 2
^Z GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 87.
Section 87.
DB. JOHNSON ON^ DEBT.
Dr. Johnson held * that ' debt is ruin. His * words on the subject are
weighty, and worthy of being held in remembrance. " Do not," said * he,
" accustom * yourself to consider debt only as ^ an inconvenience. You ^
will find it a calamity. Poverty takes ^ away so many means of doing
good, and ^° produces so much inability to resist evil, that it " is by " all
virtuous means to be avoided. Let ^^ it be your first care, then, not to be
in any man's debt. Resolve " not ^^ to be poor. Whatever ^^ you have,
spend less. Poverty" is a great enemy to human happiness. It destroys
liberty. It makes some *^ virtues impracticable " and others "^^ extremely
difficult. Frugality'*^ is not only the basis of^^ quiet, but^ of benefi-
cence ^*. No '^^ man can help others that wants himself. We must have ^'
enough, before '^'^ we have to spare." — S. Smiles, Self-Help.
1, iiBer ba3 ©c^utbenmaci^en. 2, *to hold' here = to be of opinion, bcr
Sluftd;t fein. 3, Say 'that debt (bag (5c^utbenma(!^en) leads (Pres. Subj.;
Gomp. App. §§28 and 31) to ruin'. 4, Say * What he says on (uber) this
subject (©egcnjianb, m.) is important and worthy of our notice (^eadjtunc^, f.)'.
5, Place the words 'said he' at the end of the whole clause. 6, When
verbs and adjectives, governing a preposition, are used in a principal
clause and are followed by a subordinate clause, either in the form
of a supine (i.e. an infinitive with ju, see S. i, N. 2) or beginning with a
subordinative conjunction, the adverb fca, in connection with the pre-
position required, is generally placed in the principal clause ; as —
We will accustom ourselves to be 2Bir iwoKenund baran 9Ci»o(;nen, fpavfam
thrifty. ju fciu.
Do not excuse yourself with having (Sntfc^ulbigcu ©ie ftci^ nic^t bam it, bap
had no time. ©ie feine 3cit Qe^abt ^akii.
The verb jxc^ getuo^nen requires the prep. an. Construe accordingly, and use
the 2nd pers. sing. 7, an inconvenience, al^ etiuaS SdfiigcS. 8, Say
* You will find that it leads to poverty', see S. 3, N. 2. 9, to take away,
eiitjie'^cn, after which supply the pron. un3 (from us). 10, and — inability
= and makes us so often incapable. 11, it is . . . to be avoided = we must
avoid it (to agree with 5li*mut), see S. 62, N. 4. 12, by — means, nac^
beftcn ^rfiften. 13, Say ' Beware therefore (jlc^ l^utcn) of running into debt*.
To run into debt, (Sd|utbcn mac^cn. Use the Supine according to S. 34, N. 10.
14, jlc^ etn)a« Oor'ncljmen. 15, not — poor = not to get (gevatcn) into
poverty. 16, Say 'However little (S^Jie geving, after which supply the
adverb (S. 27, N. 8), I wonder"
that ^^ everybody, that can at all afford it, does not have one."
1, To avoid repetition render the verb ' can * here by imflaubc fein.
2, bejlimmcn, which use in the form of a Supine and place at the end of the
whole clause. 3, of — whatever, irgenb eincg ©e^eufiaube^J. 4, A — one
= The possessor. 5, is — questions = needs therefore (alfo) not (to) ask
a thousand questions. To ask a question, eine Srage jleKen. 6, and — ex-
periments = and to make various troublesome experiments. 7, 95crfa()ren, n.
8, after all not, boc^ nic^t, which must not be placed between commas. Gomp.
S. 15, N. 3. 9, gclingen. 10, thing = object. 11, I wonder,
e« ivmibert mi)) we wonder, c3 ivuubert un3; you wonder, eg iinuibert (Sic.
12, that — one = that not everybody, who can at all (ivgeub) make it possible,
possesses the same (to agree with 'object').
Section 91.
A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT.
IV.
Father. " These instruments are not so uncommon as you suppose ;
I myself happen to know several individuals * who * are possessed of one
or two of them."
Charles. "How large are they, father? Could I hold one in my
hand?"
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 9 1. ^^
Father. " You '' might ; but ^ I should be very sorry to trust ^ mine
to you."
George. " You must take "^ very great care of it, then ^ ?"
Father. " Indeed ^ I must. I intend every night to envelop ^° it in "
the light curtain I mentioned ; it must, besides, occasionally be washed
in ^2 a certain colourless liquid kept ^^ for the purpose ; but this is such a
delicate " operation, that ^^ persons, I find, are generally reluctant to per-
form it. But notwithstanding the tenderness ^^ of this instrument, you "
will be surprised to hear that^^ it may 'be darted to a great distance, with-
out " suffering the least injury, and without any danger of losing it."
1, individuals = persons. 2, who — one = who possess one. 3, of
them = of the same. 4, ^ag fonnteji bu Wto'ijt 5, but — sorry = but
I should be very unwilling. 6, to trust anything to a person, etnem cttt»a3
an'ijertrauen. 7, to take great care of a thing, etwag fe:^r im^i nefjmen.
8, then = thus, alfo, which place after the object. 9, ©etoi^ muf ic^ ta3 !
10, umfjut'Ien. 11, in — mentioned = with the above-mentioned light
curtain. 12, in = with. 13, bie man fi^ ju biefem 3^t)ecfe pit. 14, deli-
cate = critical, beben!li(i^ or gefdfjvUei^. 15, that — it = that one, as I have
found, performs (»o((jie'f)en) the same generally but (nur) very unwillingly
(ungevne). 16, @ntpj!nbttd)feit. 17, you — hear = you will hear with
astonishment. 18, that — distance, bap man eg in iceitc ^ernen hjevfen !ann.
19, Say * without that it suffers the least injury, and without that one runs any
danger of losing [to lose] it.' Comp. S. i, N. 3.
Section 92.
A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT.
V.
Charles. " Indeed M and how high can you dart it.?"
Father. " P should be afraid of teUing you to what a distance it will
reach, lest you should think I am jesting with you." ^
George. " Higher than this house, I ^ suppose ? "
Father. " Much higher."
Charles. " Then *, how do you ^ get it again ? "
Father. "It^ is easily cast down by a gentle movement that does it
no injury."
George. " But who can do that ? "
Father. " The ^ person whose business it is to take care of it."
Charles. " Well ^ I cannot understand you at all ; but do ^ tell us,
father, what it is chiefly used for ! "
1, 3)ag trare ! 2, Say * I almost fear to tell you what distances it can
reach, that (bamit) you may not believe that I am jesting with you'. 3» *I
suppose*, in interrogative sentences, may be elegantly rendered by the
adverb tOol)l:
You have prepared your lesson well ©ic ^aBen 3^rc Scftion l^ente U^ol^t gnt
to-day, I suppose ? fiubtert ?
In elliptic sentences, where the verb is omitted, iuo^t generally occupies the
first place. 4, The adv. benn must stand after the object e^. ' 5, The
pron. 'you*, used in a general sense, is mostly rendered by the indef. pron.
man. 6, It ~ down, m fenft fi^ . . . teic^t luiebev na^ unten. The place of
^6 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 9a.
the words by — injury* is indicated by the three dots. 7, JSerifnigc.
8, Well = Alas, ^Id). 9, The English *do*, in sentences of entreaty, may
colloquially be rendered by the adverb t)orf) ; as —
Do give me the book, my child ! ®ieb mit bo(^ ba^ S3u(i^, mcin Siin'ol
Sec /ton 93.
A CUEIOUS INSTRUMENT.
VI.
Father. " Its ^ uses are so various that I know not which * to specify.
It' has been found very useful in deciphering (S. i, N. 3) old manuscripts,
and *, indeed, has its use in modern prints. It '^ will assist us greatly in
acquiring*' all kinds of knowledge, and without it^ some of the most
sublime parts ^ of ^ creation would be matters ^® of mere conjecture. It "
must be confessed, however, that very much depends on a.^^ proper
application of it, being (S. 30, N. 4) possessed by many persons who
appear to have no " adequate sense of its value, but " who employ it
only for the most low and common purposes, without even thinking,
apparently, of the noble uses ^° for which it is designed, or of the ex-
quisite" gratification^'^ (S. 16, N. 10) it is capable of affording. It" is
indeed in order to excite in your minds some higher sense of its value
than you might otherwise have entertained, that I am giving you this
previous description."
George. " Well //len, tell us something more about it (S. 4, N. 5, B)."
Father. "It is also of" a very penetrating quality, and // can often
discover secrets which can be detected by no other means. It ^° must
be owned, however, that ^^ it is equally prone to reveal them ^\"
1, Its — various = It serves for (511) such (fo) various purposes (3ive(f, m.).
2, which — specify = which I shall specify (aufiiijren). 3, It — useful = One
has found it of great use. 4, and — prints = and also in (bet) our modern
printing it is indeed of great use. 5, It — greatly = It helps us much.
e, it(^ erireiben ; all kinds of, aUcvtei. 7, it «= the same. 8, 'parts' here
©ebiete. 9, Use the gen. of the def. art. 10, matters = objects.
11, It — however = I must however confess. 12, Use the def. art. ; proper
= right ; of it = of the same. 13, no — sense = a wrong idea (©egriff. m.).
14, unb. 15, uses = purposes (Sivecf, m.). 16, luittcrcjteid^lid^, i.e. in-
comparable. 17, ©crnip, m., i.e. enjoyment. 18, Say * Only to awaken
in you a higher idea of its value than you probably (cevmutUi) otherwise (fonjl)
would have had (Pluperfect Subj.), I give you this previous (»ovldufic|) descrip-
tion '. 19, of — quality = very penetrative (fc^avffidf^tig). 20,' Say * But
(2)oc^) I must confess. 21, that — prone = that it is just as much (eten fo
fct)r) prone ; prone = disposed, geneigt. 22, them = the same, to agree with
* secrets'.
Section 94.
A CURIOUS INSTRUMENT.
VII.
Charles. " What I can it speak then ?"
Father. "It is sometimes said (S. 54, N. 13) to* do so, especially
when "^ it happens to meet with ^ one of its own species."
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 94. 57
George. " What colour are * these instruments ? "
Father. " They vary ° considerably in this respect."
George. " Well, what colour is yours ? "
Father. " I believe it is of a darkish colour ; but if I shall confess
the truth (S. 27, N. 8), I must say that I never saw (S. 48, N. 2) it^ in
my life."
Both. " Never "^ saw it in your life ? "
Father. " No, nor ^ do I wish ; but I have seen a representation of it,
which (S. 48, N. 6) is so exact that my curiosity is quite satisfied."
George. " But why don't you look ^ at the thing itself? "
Father. " I should be in great danger ^° of losing it, if I " did.'*
Charles. " Then you could buy (S. 58, N. 8) another."
Father. " Nay^^, I believe I could not prevail ^^ upon any one to part
with such (S. 28, N. 9) a thing"."
George. " Then, how did you get yours ? "
Father. " I am so fortunate as ^^ to be possessed of more than one ;
but ^^ how I got them I really cannot recollect ^'^."
Charles. " Not recollect ! Why ^^, you said you brought " them from
London to-night ! "
Father. *' So ^^ I did ; I should be sorry if I had left them behind me
(see App. § 36)."
Charles. " Now% father, do tell us the name of this curious instru-
ment ! "
Father. "It is — the Eye." — Jane Taylor.
1, * to do so *, referring to the preceding verb * speak ', must be rendered by
the infinitive of that verb. 2, when — with = when it accidentally comes
together with. 3, with — species, mit cittern feittegg(ctd)eit. 4, are =
have. 5, to vary considerably, fe^r »erfc^iebett feitt. 6, Supply the
adverb ttod^ after the object. 7, Never — life ? = You have never seen
it in your life ? 8, id) tt^iittfd^e eg and) tiic^t. 9, to look at a thing, \i^ citi
JDing ati'fe^eit. 10, Ho be in great danger*, here @efaf)r (aufett. 11, Sup-
ply here the object * eg '. 12, D tteiit. 13, to prevail upon any one,
jentattb'iibeiVebeii. 14, * thing', here ©egettftattb, m. 15, tio^ tne^r aU
eitteg ju Befi^ett. 16, but — them, aber \vk ic^ baju gefotntttett fciti. 17, to
recollect, jic^ etlraS ittg ©ebad^tttig pritcf'rufeii. ^ 18, The English 'why' is,
in this instance, best rendered by the adverb ' |a ', which place after the verb.
19, Use the Perf. Subj., according to App. §§28 and 30 ; here tttit'bringen.
20, @ett3i^ t)aBe i^ bag. 21, Say ' But father, tell us at last,' and supply the
adverb 'boc^' after the pron. *us'. Comp. Lange's German Manual, p. 354,
L. 31, N. 4.
Sectio7i 95.
AITGLO^- SAXON DRESS.
The dress of civilians in general consisted ^ of a shirt and tunic de-
scending ^ to the knee, of linen or wool, according * to the season. A
belt was often worn round the waist ^, and a short cloak over the whole.
Drawers, leather shoes or short boots and hose, or sandals, completed
the ordinary costume. Labourers (S. 3, N. 2) are generally represented
with shoes, but without hose. Females ® of all ranks '^ wore long, loose
58 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 95.
garments reaching^ to the ground, completely hiding (S. 16, N. 4) all'
symmetry of ^ shape. Long hair, parted ^^ on the forehead, and falling "
naturally down the shoulders, with an ample ^^ beard and moustache, dis-
tinguish the Anglo-Saxons from the closely cropped^^ Normans. Planche
remarks that " the character of face, as delineated in illuminations, im-
mediately designates ^^ the age^° wherein" the early ^^ portraits of our
Lord^^ which have^° been reverently" copied lo^^ the present day,
were 2^ originally fabricated. — Milner, History of England.
1, Say * The dress of the Anglo-Saxons'. 2, to consist of a thing, and
cttvag Bejief)en. 3, to descend = to reach ; to, on or auf. Use the attributive
construction explained in S. 48, N. 6. 4, according to, jc md). 5, waist
= body. 6, Females = Women. 7, *
noiselessly about the room, a noise is heard without ^^ It^'' becomes
M.
62 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION lOI.
more*^ audible by degrees. Suddenly the door flies open, and two" men
enter, pale as ghosts. They^'' are Ministers of State (S. 76, N. 22, A).
They have news to communicate. Discontent prevails in the city ; the ^
populace are out ; the dragoons have surrendered their sabres, the soldiers
their arms, within '^^ sight of the apartment in which the king had just now
enjoyed his meal, and his daughter-in-law had looked ^ so sad.
1, National adjectives require a small initial in German. 2, period
«= season. 3, time = day-time (S. 76, N. 22, B). Connect the two nouns
by means of the genitive inflection te. 4, rau'^. 5, wife, consort,
@p|lial)liu^ which term generally applies to the wife of a king, or to that of
persons of the upper ranks of society. — The possessive adj. pron. is best
repeated before the next noun. 6, Since the subject begins the sentence,
the verb must be placed immediately after it. Say 'The king of France
sits, etc.', and transl. the words *at — table' briefly thus: beim %tui)iiuditi\ie, after which supply the pron. fic to
agree with 'conversation'. It becomes princes, eg pa^t fl(^ fur gurfien.
11, Ubat — tbem*, may be briefly turned by 'over them'. 12, occupies
— moments, Idf t bie 3cit fdjneK baf>inget)en. 13, ^oxd} ! 14, to move,
fid> beiregen ; about the room = in the room. 15, without = outside.
16, Use here a demonstrative pronoun to agree with 'noise'. 17, more
— degrees = louder and louder. 18, two men pale as ghosts, jtuei gciflcri
brcirf)e ©cjktten. 19, They are, ©g fuib. 20, S)er «15obel ifl auf ben ^einen.
21, within — meal = and this almost (fafl) immediately in front of (»or) the
windows of the room in which the king had just now breakfasted. — Use the
verb in the Imperfect, and vender Just no. 15, that — anxious, baf e^ i^m »ie( mef)i*
bariim ju ttjun ift. 16, to crave permission to resign, urn (Svtautmi^ Bitten,
fein 9tmt nie'berlegen ju biirfen. 17, Use the def. art. with this noun, and
supply the dat. of the pers. pron. er after the auxiliary ; the verb is in the
passive voice. 18, 2Ku^!etenfattte, f. 19, close to their ears = in the
immediate neighbourhood. 20, 'This — enters' may be briefly rendered:
2)er foetien (Sintvetenbe nnvb eg ung jn erfennen gebcn. 21, nntevfd^rei'feen, insep.
comp. str. v., which use in the 3rd pers. pi. of the Imperative mood. As a
mark of respect, the word ' @ire' may be inserted after this clause. 22, the
64 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 102.
— comer, ber J^ercingetrctene. 23, ciii 3curna(ijl. 24, 'face', here = im-
pudence or boldness. 25, spirit = courage. 26, lieber. 27, fine
= critical. 28, to drop from, entfaKen, with the dat. 29, Form a noun
of the present participle of the verb fprcd^en. The noun ©prec^et applies, as
a rule, to the Speaker in the English House of Commons. The Speaker in
the Imperial German Reichstag is styled ^rajtbent. 30, In German,
when the subject stands before the verb, the adverb must never
precede the latter or, in compound forms, the copula (auxiliary
verb). Comp. App. § 9. 31, wieber gebeii.
Section 103.
THE DBAMA OP THE FBENCH REVOLUTION OP 1848.
III.
The audience ^ is already touched ^. The poor king looks around him
for 'advice; no* one offers it; even the Prime Minister of^ yesterday
is dumb; and in^ another instant the^ deed is done. The King has
abdicated in* favour of his grandson ^ Behind the scenes ^° you (S. 92,
N. 5) hear sounds " of tumult and disorder, and your ^^ heart is already
beating for the issue. The King doffs ^' his robes ^*, places his sword
upon the table, and^^, dressed (S. 102, N. 3) as a private gentleman^*', is
evidently anxious ^^ to depart. The Queen would ^* fain meet the coming
danger, but his ^' Majesty has already ordered the carriages. The horses
are put^** to, but horses and groom are shot'^^ by the multitude ^^ A broad
path leads from ^' the palace garden '^^ and at the end ^^ of it a friendly
hand "^^ has brought two hired coaches '^l " Let ^* us go," exclaims the
Monarch, and, leaning (S. 53, N. 12) heavily ^^ upon the Queen, whose'*
head is high and erect, he hurries on. The coaches are '^ reached ; the
fugitives escape '^ They arrive at St. Cloud '', at Versailles, but not to
(S. 19, N. 7. Supply the adv. bort) stay. On'* they go, and at half-past
eleven o'clock at night they descend at Dreux ^^
1, iDic Stnttjcfeubcn. 2, tief cvgvijfeii fcin. 3, nad^. 4, No — it,
.Kciner cvbietct jld^ bajit. 5, of yesterday, gcfiern cmaunt, which use attri-
butively before the noun. 6, in another = in the next. 7, * to do
a deed', here cine Urfunbc ttodjie'^en. 8, gu guuficn . 9, JDec (Snfcl irar
bcr dltejle @ot)n be0 ttcrjlorbeiicn 4f^ofl3 ^crbinanb »on Drlcan« unb feincr ©ema^tin
^elcne. JDiefer @o{)n, \^i\^ix ncc^ i|eute (SDe^. 1886) in (Snglanb lebt, tragt ben
9lamen Subwig ?pt)iUv^p von Orleans unb fu^rt ben %\\.t\ einc3 ®rafcn con ^ari«. @ein
lungcrer SSrubei* i|l (Robert ^()ili)?p won Drle'an« mit bem Xitel ^erjog won 6^artrc«,
augcnblicflit^ ebenfa[(« in ©nalanb. 10, Use here the Sing. 11, sounds
— disorder = confusion and noise. 12, your — issue = our hearts beat already
in anxious expectation of the events to come (be« ^ommenbcn). 13, won fic^
ivcrfen. 14, 'robes', here @taat<5nctbev. 15, Here place the verb * is'.
16, ' priv. gentl.', here (i'iinlifl. 17, bcgievig; 'to depart', here = to flee.
18, would fain = would willingly; use the Imperf. Subj. of mogen with the adv.
gem. To meet danger, ber @cfa()r bie ©time bieten. 19, <2e. (for (Seine)
SWajeflat, after which place the verb in the 3rd pers. pi., which is customary in
speaking of Sovereigns. 20, to put to «= to put the horses to, an'fpannen.
21, crfd^iepen. 22, *}Jobet, m. 23, 'from', here au« . . . I|inan«. Comp.
S. 102, N. 4. 24, Form a compound of * castle' and * garden'. 25, * end',
here ^u^gang, m. 26, Form a comp. of 'friend* and 'hand* according to
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 103. 6^
S. 76, N. 22, B. 27, ^Umxxi\^t, f. 28, The King would address
his Consort in the 2nd pers. sing. 29, to lean heavily upon, ft^ fe|l ftu|en
auf (with Ace). 80, iveli^e mit ftotjev^oBenem ^viupte einf)evfd)veitet. 31, are
reached, irerben Befiiegen. 32, entfommeu. 33, @anct (Sloub bei 35erfaif(e^
h?ar ju fener 3eit eiuc beliettc Otejibenj ber foniglic^eu i^atnitie. * @anct' (abbreviated
@t.) comes from the Latin *sanctus'. 34, @g ge()t iweiter. 35, JDreui:
ijl eiu @tdbt(^en im S)epartement (Suit^Soire, an ber (Sure, mit 7000 @intr>o:f)nern uub
entf)a(t ctn (Sc^bf mit @raBfa)3e((e beg ^aufe^ Drtean^, icetc^e «on ber SDiutter beg ^ontgg
^ubiDig $()i(ivp gegruubet tvurbe.
Section 104.
THE DRAMA OP THE PEEISTCH REVOLUTION" OF 1848.
IV.
At one in the morning they are joined * by (yon) one of the King's
sons, who informs the unhappy pair that the claims ^ of the grandson
had^ been disregarded, and that the repubHc had been declared by the
people of Paris. It is enough. The King shaves off his whiskers, puts
on green spectacles, buries * his face in a handkerchief, speaks EngHsh,
and calls himself Smith. The wind is ° high, the coast ^ dangerous, em-
barkation "^ is out of question at the moment, and before an opportunity
offers, the rank of the runaways^ is discovered. Fortune (S. 3, N. 2),
however, is^ with them : they escape^*' capture and put to sea. Protected
by Heaven, they reach in safety " the hospitable shores of England.
Meanwhile ^^ what has happened in Paris } The whole city has given
way^^ to a handful of rioters — men (S. 53, N. 9) who meditated an
*'emeute^*", and effected, to their astonishment, an actual revolution.
But ^° two individuals upon the side of the King evinced a ^^ particle of
courage, and these were women — his wife and his daughter-in-law
already^''' mentioned. The ^^ rest of the city were^^ faithless to themselves
as well as to the King.
1, *to be joined', here eiugef)ott iverben (to be overtaken). 2, Here
XBronanfpriic^c. 3, According to the two rules in §§ 28 and 30 of the
Appendix, the Perfect of the Subjunctive Mood is to be used in this and the
following clause. The two clauses, however, can be joined by omitting the
second conjunction * that' and the copula ' had been' of the first clause. Turn
'to disregard' by mrf)t auerfennen; the words 'by — Paris' may be briefly ren-
dered by yon ben ^arifern, which place immediately after the conjunction 'and'.
4, 'to bury', here = to veil, itmt)iif(cn ; the prep, 'in' must then be rendered
by mit. 5, is high = blows violently. 6, Since the copula ' is ' was
changed into another verb in the previous clause, it must be inserted here.
7, The literal version of this clause would not read well. I propose to use
the following construction: it is (Gomp. N. 19) for the moment impossible to
embark. 8, runaways = fugitives. 9, is with them, iji itjnen ^olb (pro-
pitious). 10, to escape capture, ber a5er:^aftung entge^en ; to pub to sea, in
bie erfd^ont. 4, work
— destruction, aUgemeineg BerflcrungsJivei!. 5, Heiben ; not touched = un-
touched. 6, toerj^orbcn. 7, jtub bem ^nbcnfen nod^ fKi^tg. 8, Supply
here the adverb ba, which will make the sentence more emphatic. 9, It is,
©3 ijl bieg. Comp. S. 104, N. 19. 10, to — applause, ben arfgemeiujleu
©eifaU ^evttovjurufen.— 2)iefcr aSorfaK evflavt |tc^ butd^ bie grope ?Pcv>utaritdt beg sax-^
fiorbeneu ^^erjcgg unb feiuer ®emat)tin, ber -§erjogin ^elene »ou DrUaiig. 11, Place
the adv. 'here' after whilst, and use the adverb noc^ with it. 12, * there
is*, here jtnbet wan, after which place * in — Deputies'. 13, the — way =
how the mob forces its way {{\6) einen SBeg ba^nen). In German the verb
agrees in the Singular with a collective substantive in the Singular.
14, 9U(eg ; to, anf. 15, ©ret Oiebner l)6rt wan ubei- bie anbern I)inaug. 16, ftc
tjei^en. 17, they = these ; to gain the popular ear, fic^ beiw Solfc ®e^6r
»crf(^affen. 18, irieber Ijer'jteKen. 19, wit Oiawen benannt. 20, Say
'one voice', and afterwards 'hundred other voices'. 21, nnter. 22, nnb
untcr ttiebert)o(ten SlnSrufen tton . . . 23, 'to set out', here bie ^rcjeifion
an'treten; for, nacf|. The verb must of course appear before the Subject
Lamartine. gonig 51(^1) onfc Sawartine evvegte j^nnac^jl bnrc^ feine garten
3ugenbbicl;tungen in ben jtvanjiger Sla^vcn aKgeweinc Slufinerffawteit. 9la(!^bcw cc
bnrc^ ben Xcb eineg D()eiwg cm bcbcntenbeg iBerwcgen crcrbt t)atte, bereiftc er 1832
ben Diient, ivorauf er bie volitifc^c Sauf batjn betvat nnb eincv ber glanjenbflen 9iebnev bir
2)cv>uticvtenfawwev u>uvbe. 9lac^ ber Sebrnavrevolution von 1848 u>urbe er aJiitglieb
ber proviforifd)en Oiegievnng unb a)?inifter be3 Slugtuavtigcn, jog fi^ jebod) 1851 wm
jufrieben ^uiu^ nnb + aw i. SWarj 1869 ju ?Paf[t), Wo er in burftiv^en !!Bcr{)dltnifi'en
gelebt Ijatte. Sfaac 9lboU>()c (Srewienr, 35raelit, irnrbe 1830 9lbvofat am
^affation«()ofc ju ^aritf, bcfdwpfte, feit 1842 SWitglieb ber Jlawmcr, Ijcftig ba^ 9}Jini«
^erium ©nijot nnb forbertc bie S^cformbeivev^nng. !i)]a(l^ bev ^fbrnarrevohition "Oi^w
1848 tvavb er SDHtglieb bev vrooifovifc^cn O^cglcrnng, in bev ev fnvje 3cit ba« 3n|!ijwinij
flevinm befleibete. 9iac^ bev 3Bat)t bevariavb fvdtcv 3J?itglieb bev Dlationalvevfamwtung.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 107. 69
Slicx-atibte 9lugufie Sebru SloUin tt?atb 9lbyo!at, unb ttat 1844 in bie hammer
bet S)e^nitievten, nac^bem er al^ 9lbtto!at in wieten VoUttfc^en ?Projeffen ^taibiert 'i)atk. (it
beteiUcjte [i^ leBfjaft Ui bev 9tefoi*magitation toon 1847, ivavb 1848 a)?itgtieb ber pxo>
»ifovifd;en SZegiernng unb SWiuiftev beg Snnern, trat jebo^ f^on im 3uni be^felben 3at}ve3
toon ber Oiegievung juriicf. Sm 3uni 1849 mnSte er iregen :(.^o(itif(i^er Sntriguen nac^
(^ngtanb i!iel)en, ivarb aBwefenb jur 2)e|)ortation toerurteilt unb lebte feitbem aU 2)?itglteb
beg bortigen Oietoolutiongfomiteeg in Sonbon. 3m Safjre 1857 ivurbe er mit ^JJa^^ini
eineg ^om^Iotg gegen Sla^oteon III. angeftagt uub aBevmate toerurteift, unb fet)rte
enblid) am 26. ^lax^ 1870 infclge ber ©vfldrung ber OiepuHi! unb ber Vlmneftie na^
^arig juruc!, o'^ne \id) aUx an ben bortigen ©reigniffen Ijertoorragenb ju beteiligen.
24, made up of, n^el^et ji(^ aug . . . geBilbet ^ai ; seething, gdfirenb. 25, 3n«
mitten, followed by the Gen. 26, After *and' supply the adv. fo, which
requires the constr, to be inverted. 27, Search — another. This passage
would not read well in a literal version, which may be altered thus : — Where
can we find in the dramatic annals of the history of the world (comp. n.) a
similar one (einen gleid^en).
Section 108.
EXPERIENCE IS THE BEST TEACHER i.
A French student of (S. 3, N. 2) medicine lodged ^ in the same
house in London with a man in a fever. This poor man was con-
stantly plagued by the nurse to drink, though ^ he nauseated the insipid
liquids that were presented to him. At last, when she* grew more
and more importunate, he whispered in her (S. 43, N. 9, B) ear: —
" For ^ God's sake bring me a salt herring, and I wiii drink as much as
you please M"
The woman indulged^ him in his request; he devoured the
herring, drank plentifully, underwent^ a copious perspiration, and
recovered ^
The French student inserted this aphorism^® in his journal" : — " A salt
herring cures ^^ an Englishman in a fever."
On^^ his return to (S. 72, N. 4) France he prescribed the same remedy
to the first patient in a fever ^ to whom he was called.
The patient died ; on which ^^ the student inserted ^^ in his journal the
following note: — "N.B. Though a salt herring cures an Enghshman,
it ^® kills a Frenchman.'* — W. C. Hazlitt, Anecdotes.
1, 8eT)rerin, to agree with 'experience', which is feminine in German.
2, Here place the words *in London — fever*; a man in a fever, ein giefeer^
franfer. 3, Construe the sentence 'though — him' after the following
model: S)ie mir gerei^ten gefc^macflofen ©etrdnfe itoibcrn mic^ an. 4, Here
place the adv. *at last'; more and more importunate, immer jubringlic^er.
5, Itm ®ottegttoif(en. 6, itooKen. 7, to indulge a request, einer ^\\Xt
itoif(fa:^ren. 8, to undergo a copious perspiration, in tuc^tigen ©c^ltoei^
gevaten (str. v.). 9, genefcn, str. v. 10, Se^rfa^. 11, Form a
comp. n. of 'day' and 'book' according to S. 76, N. 22, C. 12, htrieren;
in a, toom. 13, Say 'When he had returned to France'. 14, on
which = ^'hereupon. 15, fd^reiben, after which place 'following note'.
16, fo ftirbt ein granjofe baran.
70 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION IO9.
Section 109.
ON^ SELF CUIiTURE.
(From* an address delivered to an assemblage of young men at Edinburgh.)
I^ stand before you a self-educated man. My education was* that
which was supplied at the humble parish schools of Scotland ; and il was
only** when P went to Edinburgh, a poor boy, that I devoted my
evenings, after the labours of the day, to the cultivation of ^ that intellect
which the Almighty has given me. From seven or eight in the morning
till nine or ten at night ^, was I at^ wy business as a bookseller's ap-
prentice ^°, and " it was only during hours after these, stolen from sleep,
that I could devote myself to study. I assure you that I did not read
novels ^^; my attention was devoted ^^ to physical science and other useful
matters ^*. During ^° that period I taught myself French. I look back ^^
to that time with great pleasure, and am almost sorry I have not to go ^^
through the same troubles again. I ^^ reaped more pleasure when I had
not a sixpence in my pocket, studying in a garret in Edinburgh, than I
now find when sitting amidst all the elegancies and comforts of a parlour.
— William Chambers.
1, iibcr (Setfcpitbung. 2, SluS ; to deliver an address to an assemblage,
ttor cincr SBevfamnttung eine 9?ebe fatten ; young men, j[ungc Scute. 3, I — man.
This sentence does not allow of a literal rendering ; say * You see before you
a man who has educated himself (ftcf| fclfejt bilben or aug'bitben). 4, was —
Scotland = was such as (it) (einc folcf)e, line fie) is given (crtei(en) at (in) a simple
Scottish village-school. 5, The adverb * only', when used in reference
to time, is turned by * crft*, but in reference to number by * tllir* ; a^p-
This man has only (but) one coat. 2)iefer SWann l^at nur cinen (Rodf.
It is only one o'clock. @^ ijl erjl i\n U^r.
e, when — boy = when I, a poor boy, came to (S. 72, N. 4) Ed. 7, Con-
strue the clause ' of — me' according to S. 48, N. 6 ; intellect, ®cifl. 8, * at
night', here aBcub^, since S'lac^t applies only to the hours between 11 p.m. and
5 A.M. 9, at = in, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art. 10, Supply
here tt)dti9 (engaged). 11, Say *and only during the later (fpatcr) hours,
which I stole from sleep (bem ©ci^Iafe ab'|^et)Ien), could I ', etc. 12, 9iomau\
m. 13, auf iiatumnfTenfd^aftti^c ©tubien . . . geridjtet. 14, ©egenj^anb, m.
15, * During that period' may be briefly rendered by bamat^ ; to teach oneself
German, ot)ne Setjrcr 2)eiitfc^ flubieren. 16, jurud'blicfen. 17, to go
through troubles, aJefc^lreiben buvdj'mac^cn ; again, no(^ einntat. For the constr.
see App. § 19, 18, Say 'When (S. 4, N. 2) I had no sixpence (@ed^ie. 12, bad
ttevbunf^ctc SBaffer. 13, carries it. 14, nac^ ben norblic^en unb fublic^cii
^olargegenben. 15, and distributes it north and southward. Comp. S. 71,
N. 2, the principle stated there applying likewise to other compound expressions
besides nouns. 16, the = on (an) the. 17, in the form of = as, which
place after the rel. pron. 18, to enter again the ocean, bent Dj^ean n^iebec
jufiromen. 19, anf fangen, sep. c. str. v. 20, to draw water, SSajfer
fc^opfen. 21, au«. 22, down = deep. 23, fammeln. 24, ' to
pass along*, here ba(|in'f[iepen. 25, 9luf bicfe Sffieife.
Section 115.
THE ABT OF ORATORY.
I * owe my success in life to one single fact ^ namely : — At ' the age of
twenty-seven* I commenced, and continued for years, the process of daily
speaking (S. 34, N. 10) upon the contents of some historical or scientific
book. These efforts ^ were made sometimes in a corn-field ^, at others "^
in the forest, and not unfrequently in some distant ^ barn, with ^ the horse
and ox for my auditors. It ^^ is this early practice in the greal art of all
arts that I am indebted for the primary and leading impulses that stimu-
lated me forward, and shaped and moulded my entire subsequent" destiny.
Improve ^2, then, the superior advantages (S. 16, N. 10) you here enjoy^^
Let not^* a day pass'^ without exercising (S. 34, N. 10) your powers ^^
of speech. There is (S. 82, N. 7) no power like ^^ that of oratory. Caesar
controlled** men by^^ exciting their fears; Cicero'^" by^^ captivating their
affection and swaying their passions. The influence of the one perished ^^
with its author ; that of the other continues '^'^ to this day. — Henry Clay-*.
1, To avoid beginning with the pronoun *!*, which seldom looks well in
German, and is considered bad style in letters, place the object first, and con-
strue according to App. § 14. 2, fact = deed or action = '^{^at, f.;
fact - event (as in this instance) = 2^brttfacl)C, f-; the Latin ^-actlim, pi.
^acta or ^actcit, is, however, used in both significations. 3, At
the, 3m. 4, Supply 'years', and construe thus: I began the process
(a3eifaf)ren, n.), which I continued for years (jaf^relanij) to speak daily about
(uber, with Ace), etc. ; some = a. 5, efforts = exercises. 6, Here
place the verb. 7, jmi>eifen. 8, entlei3en. 9, whereby horse and
ox formed my audience (3u()in-er). 10, It — forward = To this early
practice ... I owe the first and leading impulses (Xviebfebcvn) which urged me
forward (vov'UHht^tveibcn, sep. comp. str. v.). 11, subsequent = later.
12, Improve = Use, which use in the 2nd pers. pi.; then = therefore; superior
= great. 13, {jcnicficn. 14, 'Not' in connecfion with the indef. art.
must generally be rendered by *no'. 15, »onVbci\3c()cn. 16, {Wcbei
talent, n. 17, n>eld}e ber bcv JPevcbfamfeit 9leid)fcnnnt. 18, beljovvfc^cn.
19, bnvc^ (Srreivini^ ; render * their' by the Gen. of the def. art. 20, Supply
here 'controlled" them' (kl)enfd)te fie babnr*, bap er . . .). Comp. and read
carefully S. 87, N. 6, and also S. i, N. 3. The verb bctjervfc^en requires the
preposition buvc^. 21, by — passions = that he gained (fic^ geunnnen) their
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 1 5. 75
love and guided (fenfen) their passions. 22, erjlartt ; its author = the author
of the same (to agree with 'influence'). 23, fovt'bauern, sep. c. w. v.; to
this day, lie auf ben frentigen Xag. 24, JQtm\) (Slai) (geb. 1777 in SSirginien,
+ 1852 in 2Caff)ington) war ein attteii!anifd^ev ©taatgmann, wddjtt ftd) aU ®ot)n
eineg einfac^^en Sanbmannc^ 1x6 gn ben :^i3d}ften 5lmtem beg ©taat^ l^eraufavieitete ;
1824 iravb er ^nm ©taat^fcfvetdv beg SJtn^uwtigen crnannt unb 1829 n.iar er nnter
3ac!fong ^rdftbentfd)aft im Jton^re^ i^u()ver ber D^^^cfttion, alg irelc^ev er bie Scbu^j
jcf(e nnb bie S^aticnafeanf ttevteibic3te. 3m Sa^re 1849 6rac^tc er ben ^om).iromii^ ^u;
j!anbe, \wmd) bem @uben bag Ote(!^t ber a^erfotgung p^tiger u(ben freifjalten. 4, at
starting, beim SBeginn nteiner SanfBa'^n ; see App. § 9. 5, je ; for the position
of the pronoun 'me' see App. § 9, and use the verb in the Perfect, omitting,
however, the auxiliary according to App. § 22. 6, anf meinem $often ;;nr
©ee. 7, I — more = I drew another (no(^ ein) bill of twenty pounds. To
draw a bill, einen SBed^fet gietjen. 8, to come back protested, ntit -^rctejl
n)ieber j^urucf-'fommen. 9, I felt (ftc^ fiil)len). 10, mortified = humbled,
gebemfitigt; at, bnrd). 11, 'to make a promise', here ein ©eliibbe ciblegen.
12, ever = always, jietg. 13, that — bill. This clause is best changed into
a shortened subordinate clause in form of a supine : never to draw a bill again.
Place 'again' after 'never'. 14, without — paid, o:^ne anc^ fic^er jn fein,
ba^ wan if^n :^onoriercn \ruvbe. 15, ' To quit', here to give up. 16, ^^x^
ijievgttfc^. 17, To live, equivalent to reside or dwell, is generally rendered
by tvo^^lteit ; but equivalent to exist is rendered by Icbeit. 18, nnb f|iett
mic^ an bie ©c^iffgrationen ; quite, bnv^ang. 19, here f!iif en. 20, bed
';i6 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION ll6.
= bed-covering; Gomp. n. S. 36, N. 7, ^. 21, by these means = in (auf)
this manner. 22, as — honour = in order to redeem (ttjicber ein'Iofen) my
honour. 23, to take up one's bill, fcincn 2Bc(^fel beja^leii. 24, Say
* I have always endeavoured'. 25, to keep within one's means, nit^t ubct
fcine aSittel I)inau« lebcn ; for six years, fec^5 Sa^re long. 26, We would use
the superlative here; pinching, brucfenb. 27, 'to rise*, here cmpor'fteigen ;
to, big ju, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.
Section 117.
THE BLESSEDNESS^ OP FBIENDSHIP.
I.
A*^ blessed thing it is for any^ man or (S. 10, N. 9) woman to have
a friend; one human soul whom we can trust utterly; a friend who
knows the best and the worst * of us, and who loves us, in spite of all
our faults; who wilP speak the honest" truth to us, while the world
flatters us to "^ our face, and laughs at us behind our backs ; who will
give^ us counsel and reproof in the days of (S. 3, N. 2) prosperity and
self-conceit ; but ^ who, again, will comfort and encourage us in the days
of difficulty ^^, and sorrow, when the world leaves" us alone to^^ fight our
own battle as we can.
If we have had the good fortune to win such a friend, let us do any-
thing " rather " than lose him. We must give and forgive ; live and let
live. If our friend have^° faults, we must bear^" with them (S. 4, N. 5, E).
We must hope all things, believe all things, endure all things, rather"
than lose that most precious of all earthly possessions — a trusty^* friend.
1, ©ccjen, m. 2, It is a blessing. 3, every. 4, Superlative of
fd)timm. 5, will speak = always speaks. Use the Present likewise with the
following verbs in this passage. 6, oufvid^ttg. 7, iu3 ®cfi(!^t. 8, to
give counsel and reproof to a person, cincm mit 9lat inib 2;abcl j^ur ©cite fie()en ;
self-conceit, ©elbjltdufc^ung, f.— The adverbial clause ' in the days — conceit*
stands after the rel. pron. and the Dat. *us' (App. § 9). 9, but — again,
bet itng aber ^w^. 10, ^rufimg. 11, 'to leave a person alone', here
eineii imftic^ (affeu. 12, unb ivir unfevn JTamvf, fo gut tvir fcnnen, a((ein
au^jufec^tcn \)Q^t\\. 13, all. 14, urn it;n nur nic^t lu tterlicren. 15, has.
16, to bear a thing, ©ebulb ntit ctUHig ^aben. 17, lieber, which place before
the last *air. 18, gWdldiTig.
Section 118.
THE BLESSEDNESS OP FRIENDSHIP.
II.
And z. friend once won (S. 7, N. %, A) need * never be lost, if we will
only be trusty and true ourselves. Friends may'' part, not merely in body,
but in spirit, for a while. In the bustle of (S. 3, N. 2) business and the
accidents of life, they may lose** sight of each other for years (S. 115,
N. 4); and* more — they*^ may begin to differ in their success in life, in
their opinions, in their habits, and there may be, for a time •, coldness
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION II 8. 77
and estrangement between them : but not for ever, if each will be but
trusty and true.
For then ^, according to ^ the beautiful figure of the poet, they will be
like two ships which set sail ^ at morning from the same port, and ere ^^
nightfall lose sight of each other, and " go each on its own course, and
at its own pace, for many days, through many storms and seas; and'^
yet meet again, and^^ find themselves lying side by side in the same
haven, when the long voyage is past. — Charles Kingsley, " The Water
OF Life."
1, need — lost = we need (hmtd^en) never to lose. 2, may = can, after
which place the adverbial clause ' for a while ', auf furjc 3eit ; the verb ' part ',
which is equivalent to ' be separated ' should stand at the end of the whole
passage ; * in body ', !6vVett{(^ ; ' in spirit ', geiftig. 3, to lose sight of each
other, ft(^ aug bem ®eft(^t yertieven. 4, ja tic(^ ntet)v. 5, Say ' it is
possible that their success in life, their opinions, their habits begin to differ
(bifferieren) '. 6, for a time, eiue 3eit lang, which place after ' and ' ; * may ',
here tnag ; 'be ', here == exist, Beftet)en. 7, Here follow copula and subject
according to App. § 14. 8, according to, iiad^; figure, S3ilt),n. ; to be like,
gleic^en, which governs the Dat. 9, to set sail au^'f^S^f". 10, ere night-
fall, »or lX)unfehuerbeu. 11, Say ' and of which each through many storms and
upon many seas (2)?eer, n.) for days pursues its own course (9iicf)tung, f.) and its
own pace (Sauf, m.) '. 12, and — again, iretc^e afecr benuoc^ uneber j^ufcim'nteni
treffen. 13, Say ' and find that they lie after the long voyage (©eefaf^rt, f.)
side by side (neBeu einanbev) in the same haven '.
. Section 119.
DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN SPHERE OP ACTIONS
I.
" I want to be at work ^ in the world," said Tom, " and not dawdling
away ^ three years at Oxford."
"What do you mean* by 'at work in the world?'" said the master,
with ^ his lips close to his saucerful of tea, and peering at Tom over it.
" Well, I mean real work ; one's ^ profession, whatever '^ one will really
have to do, and make one's living by. I want to be doing some real
good, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that I am not only at play ^ in the world,"
answered Tom, rather^ puzzled to find out himself what he really
did mean.
"You are mixing up two very diff'erent things in your head, I ^° think,
Brown," said the master, putting down" (S. iii, N. 6) the empty saucer,
" and you ought to get clear ^^ about them (S. 4, N. 5, B). You ^^ talk of
' working to get your Hving ' and ' doing some real good in the world '
in the same breath."
1, SBirlunggfvei^, m.; your = thy. 2, to be at work = to do something.
3, to dawdle away, t>evgcuben. 4, mean =- understand ; by, imter ; use the
and pers. sing. 5, S)ic g{^^^.ieu an ben Otanb ber l^ollen Untertaffe fe^enb; to
peer at a person, anf einen blicfen ; over it, bariibev itjeg. 6, jemanbe^.
7, whatever (ba^ tt»ag) one must really do to make one's living (fetnen Untevl)alt
wetbiemn). 8, at play = for play (jum @)){e(en). 9, Say 'somewhat
78 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 1 9.
puzzled (vertecjen) at (uBer) the meaning (@inn, m.) of his words '. 10, The
words * I think, Brown * are best placed at the head of the passage ; Comp. S.
64, N. II ; to mix up, wcrmcngen. 11, auf beu Jifc^ jleUen. 12, to get
clear about a thing, ficf| fiber ehva3 ffar tvcrbcn. I cannot get clear about that,
i^ fann mir bavuber nic^t flat iverben ; — ought = should. 13, Use the 2nd
pers. sing., and read carefully S. i, N. 3, and S. 87, N. 6, which will enable you
to construe this passage. The adverbial clause * in the same breath * ( = in one
breath) must be placed after the predicate 'talk '; to talk of a thing, tjou etira^
fpvect^fu.
Section 120.
DO GOOD IN YOUR OWN SPHERE OF ACTION.
II.
Now ^, you may be getting a good living in a profession, and yet
doing no good ai all in the world, but (S. 6, N. lo) quite ^ the contrary.
Keep ^ the latter before you as your one object, and you * will be right
whether you make a living ^ or not ; but * if you dwell on the other,
you'll very likely drop*^ into mere money- making, and let^ the world
lake care of itself, for good or evil. Don't be in a hurry ^ about finding
your work in the ^qx\^ for yourself ; you are not old enough to (S. 19,
N. 7) judge for yourself yet, but just^*' look about you in the place you
find yourself in, and try (S. 51, N. 13)10 make things ^^ a little better
and honester there. You'lP'* find plenty to keep your hand in at Oxford,
or wherever else you [may] go. And^^ don't be led away to think this
part of the world important, and that unimportant. Every corner of the
world is important. No man knows whether this part or that part is ^*
most so, but every man may ^^ do some honest work in his own corner. —
Thomas Hughes, " Tom Brown's School Days."
1, Now — getting, S)ii !anufl bir nun aber tiicHeic^t . . . vcvbicnen. 2, quite =
just, Qcrcibc. 3, Say ' Keep the last part of your sentence as your principal
aim (J^aiiptj\wccf, m.) before your eyes (vor Slu^eii) '. 4, Say * you will do
right'. 5, Insert babei after * living'. 6, Say * but if you have only
the other (to agree with * part ') before your eyes '. 7, to drop into mere
money-making, in b(ope ©elbma^cvei wevfalleu. 8, to let the world take care
of itself for good or evil, bie S33clt im ©iiteii unb im 33ofcn fic!^ fclbfl ubcilajTen.
9, to be in a hurry, jid^ bceilen; about finding = to find (S. i, N. 3).
10, 'just', here nur, which place after verb and pronoun; in the place, an bcr
©telle ; to find oneself, fict| befliibcn. 11, * things ', here = life, with def. art.,
after which place the adv. 'there'; honester = more virtuous. 12, The
clause * at Oxford — go ' is best placed at the head of the whole passage ; to
keep your hand in = to do. 18, And — away, ?vif bi(!^ aud^ nid^t baju
vcvleiten ; to think a thing important, cine (Sad^e fiiv ivid)ti3 tjvUtcn. 14, is
most so = is most important. — When the superlative is used as a pre-
dicate, it is generally preceded by am (the preposition an contracted with
the definite article, dative case singular, masculine), and takes the dative
termination cil; as — This matter is not important, but that is most important^
bicfc ®act)c ifl nid^t und)tii\, abcv fenc ifi am und^tiflllcii. 15, may — corners
can in his own corner do somethitig good.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 131, 79
Section 121.
THE STATE 1 OF IRELAND.
(Conclusion of a Speech delivered'^ in the House of Commons
in March 1868.)
I.
We must all endeavour to get ^ rid of passion in* discussing this church
question, which ^, I am sorry to say, is, of all others, the most calculated
to create passion. We are® all, I believe, of one religion. I do not
know (S. 51, N. 13), but I suppose there "^ will come a time in the history
of the world, when men will be astonished^ that Catholic^ and Protes-
tant, Churchman ^° and Nonconformist", had^^ so much animosity and
suspicion against each other.
I ^^ accept and believe in a very grand passage which I once met ^* with
in the writings of the illustrious founder of the colony and (S. 10, N. 9)
state of Pennsylvania, that ^^ " the humble ^®, meek, merciful, just, pious,
and devout souls are® everywhere of® one religion; and when death ^^
(S. 3, N. 2) has taken off the mask, they will know^^ one another, though
the diverse liveries " they wear make ^° them strangers."
1, 3ufianb, m. 2, to deliver a speech, eine Olebe fatten. Construe according
to S. 7, N. 3, ^; the House of Commons, tag S^ag lt)unbern.
Comp. S. 87, N. 6. 9, Use the pi. with this and the three following
nouns. 10, = members of the English Church. 11, Stlonfonfcrttiiften.
12, to have animosity, ^etubfd}aft ^egen.^ 13, Say ' I believe in (an, with
Ace.) the following sublime utterance (Siuferung, f.) '. 14, met with = read.
15, The passage 'that — religion' will be much improved by substituting the
adverb 'ndmUrf):' (viz.) for the conjunction 'that'. 16, bie ^ef^eibeneii.
17, After ' death ' insert the pron. ' if|ucn ', which will make the reading much
clearer; auxiliary 'has' may be omitted according to App. § 22. 18, ftd>
eiuanber evfenncn. 19, Use the pi. of ©eivaub, n. 20, make them
strangers, [ie t>ieuieben uuter eiuanber entfvemben.
Section 122.
THE STATE OP IRELAK-D.
H.
Let us act in this spirit, and our work is ^ easy. The noble lord (S. 5,
N. 2), towards ^ the conclusion of his speech, spoke of the cloud which is
at present hanging^ over Ireland. It is a dark and heavy cloud, and
its darkness expands ^ over the feelings of men in all parts of the British
Empire. But^ there is a consolation that we may all take to ourselves.
An inspired king, bard, and prophet has left ® us words which ^ are not
only the expression of a fact, but we may take them as the utterance
of a prophecy. He says : " To ^ the upright there arises light in the
darkness."
8o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 122.
Let US try in this matter to be upright '. Let us try to be just, and
that cloud will ^° be dispelled ; the dangers which we see will vanish ;
and we " may have the happiness of leaving^ (S. i, N. 3) to our children
the heritage of an honourable citizenship in a united and prosperous "
empire. — The Right Hon. John Bright.
1, is easy = will be easy for us (Dat. of persn. pron,). 2, an, contr. with
the dat. of the def. art. 3, f(^\ueben. 4, fi4 erflve'rfen. 5, Say
* But one consolation we can all gather from it '. To gather, cntne^men ; from,
aii3. Read S. 4, N. 5, B. 6, ^interlalfcn, insep. comp. str. v. 7, Say
* which not merely designate (t)ejeid)ucn) a fact (S. 115, N. 2), but (S. 6, N. 10)
which we may («=can) also take (tjin'nc^men) as a prophecy (read App. § 18)'.
8, " Sue ben ®cred)ten ev^ebt ftc^ cin Sid^t in bet ^inilernies ". 9, I think there
is but the adj. 'gerec^t' to render both 'upright' and 'just' in the underlying
sense. 10, tt)irb [id) »ertcilen. 11, we may have = we shall perhaps
have; happiness = joy. 12, prosperous, glucflic^ ; empire = state.
Section 123.
DR. GUTHRIE ON RAGGED SCHOOLS \
L
The "^ interest I have been led to take in the Ragged School move-
ment is an example of how, in Providence, a man's destiny — his course
of life, like that of a river — may be determined and affected by very
trivial circumstances. It is rather ' curious — at least it is interesting for
me to* remember — that (S. 66, N. 15) il was by a picture I was first''
led to take an interest in ragged schools — by a picture in an old, ob-
scure ^ decaying burgh "^ that stands on the shores of the Frith of Forth,
the birth-place (S. 53, N. 9) of^ Thomas Chalmers. I went^ to see
this place many years ago, and, going (S. 55, N. i) into an inn for^° re-
freshment, I found the room covered (App. §1) with pictures of shep-
herdesses with their crooks, and sailors in " holiday attire, not ^^
particularly interesting. But above the chimney-piece there" was a
large print ", more " respectable than its neighbours, which ^^ represented
a cobbler's room.
1, 2)oftor ®utt)tie \xUx bic av au(5 bcm einfvic^cn ©runbc, n)ci(
nni fic bi^Ijer nic^t nijtig Ijattcn 2, This passage requires an altogether
different construction. Say 'The circumstances which led me (ivctc^c ntid^
baf)in fu()vtcn) to interest myself for the establishment of schools for neglected
children, are an example of (bavon) how through Providence (buic^ bic SslJccfc-
ftuncj) the fate of a man (3}?enfc^) — his course of life (S. 76, N. 22, B,i) like
(g(cirf), with dat.) that of a river — can be determined and affected (becinflnpt)
by very trivial (flcrincifiu^icj) circumstances '. For the position of the verbs read
App. §§ i6-2o. '3, 'rather', here = not a little. 4, to remember,
mi^ baran ju ciinnern. 5, j^uerfl. 6, obscure -unknown. 7, 'burgh',
here ^le^cn, m. ; the relat. clause ' that — Forth ' may be elegantly rendered
attributively, thus : am Ufer bc(J gritf) of 5ort() bete^cn, which last word inflect
correctly and place before the qualified noun 'burgh *. 8, von. 9, went
to see = visited; place, Dit, m. ; the adverbial clause of time is best placed at
the head of the passage. 10, Say 'to (=»in order to) refresh myself.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 23. 8 1
11, in holiday attire, im ??eflanjuge. 12, Insert' ivbicb ie cin (Spiel aufiiaf)m ; ubcrfjaupt »ou
icncr Sufi an Jtrieg unb ®efa1^r, irie fte ben abenteuernben .^eerfonigen ber SSolfertoan*
berung eigeu geioefen icar; in ben tt)ic^tigen 5)ingen ber SSclt »on iener ^drte unb
(Riicf It^tgiojigfeit, bie nod^ feinem gro^en 2)?annc gefetilt ; unb ebenfo im fleinen Sebeii
be« .i^aufeg unb beg tdglici^en a3erfet|rg »on jener SWilbe, ^eitevfeit unb 5vif<^e beg
©emiiteg, bic fo gernc ®efd:^rten e(^ter ®ro^e jinb. SlIIc biefc (Sigenfc^aften ^atk er
mit feinem bamatigen SSolfe gemein; \m& i^n aber iiber bagfelbe erfjob, bag trar ber
locitfc^auenbe ®eifi, ber bem alten 9tomertum bag 33orbilb eineg ioeltumfaffenben (Staateg
abgelernt f|atte, imb ber bieg SKujier o^ne fne^tifc^c Sflad^a^mung bem fo ganj anbern
germanifd)en Sffiefen anjupaffen ivnf te. Hub juuir ijl biefer ®eit% ber ftc^ in i{;m offeui
barte, urn fo iouubervoKer, n)cil niemanb naci^ioeifen faun, n)ie er ji(^ gebilbet, unb mx
\f)n fo gelet)rt unb ergogen l^at. Slug bem 2)unfet feiner 3eit ge'^t er, im eigenen 8id)te
leu(^teub, auf. 2, 23cim 2lnaU)fieren »on Jpetbend^araftercn. 3, the share (Slnteil,
m.) of fortune = of a happy (giiuflig) fate (® ef^icf , n.). 4, Supply * individuality ' ;
altogether = quite. 6, made, gefc^affen ; by, »on. Use the attributive con-
struction as explained in S. 7, N. 3, ji. 6, Say * which called him with pride
their progenitor '. 7, Say ' even the romantic legends '. 8, Say * have
crowned his head with glory (Sfiu^m, m.)'. In elevated diction 'head* is
rendered by * ^ailpt ', n. 8, bejeuqen. 10, Say * It is indeed Ooot)l)
true that none of Charles's wars can be compared to (mit) the victories of
Charles Martel over the Saracens *. 11, but — conquest = but these were
contests for freedom (grei^eitgfdmpfe), whilst his (to agree with * wars ') were
contests for conquest (@voberunggfdmvfe). 12, Say ' and fame (S. 3, N. 2) has
more partiality (iBorliebe^ f.) for successful aggression (9lngrijf, m.)', etc.
Section 128.
CHAKACTER OF CHARLEMAGNE.
II.
As a scholar ^ his acquisitions * were little superior • to those of his
unrespected son ; and in * several points of view the glory of Charle-
magne might be ° extenuated by an anal^'tical dissection. But " rejecting
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 28. 85
a mode of judging equally uncandid and fallacious, we shall find that he
possessed in everything that grandeur of '^ conception which distinguishes
extraordinary minds ^ Like Alexander, he seemed born ^ for universal
innovation ^° ; in a life restlessly active", we see him reforming (S. 78,
N. 14, B) the coinage ^^, and establishing the legal divisions of money ^^;
gathering ^* about him the learned of every country, founding schools
and collecting libraries ; interfering ^^, but with the tone of a King, in
religious controversies; aiming ^^, though prematurely, at the formation
of a naval force ; attempting ^', for ^^ the sake of commerce, the magnifi-
cent^^ enterprise of uniting (S. i, N. 3) the Rhine and^^ Danube; and^^
meditating to mould the^^ discordant codes of Roman and barbarian
laws into one uniform system. — Hallam, '* The Student's Middle Ages."
1, Scholar =/ pupil or s.choolboy ' is rendered by (Sc^uter ;=' student ' by
©tubent, and = ' learned man ' by ©eteljvter. The last sense is applicable here.
2, acquisitions = knowledge, 3, superior, uBevIegen, with dat. unrespected =
unnoticed. 4, in many respects, in tttaud)er .^injtd)t, after which place
'might'. 5, be — dissection, burc^ cine eitiget)enbe Uutevfuc^ung gefci^ntalevt
Irerben. 6, Say * But if we reject an equally (einc eBenfo) partial (^avteiifd^)
and (alg) fallacious (trugerifi^) mode of judging (35eurteitmtg^ii!eife, f.) '. 7, Use
the gen. of the def. art. 8, * mind ', here @eijl, m. 9, born = created ;
* universal ', here tveitumfaffenb. 10, innovations = reforms. 11, All
parts q.ualifying a noun must be placed before it. 12, a)?unjfi)jient, n.
13, form a comp. n. according to S. 36, N. 7, y^; both nouns are combined in
the sing. 14, Complete the clause by saying : 'we see him gathering', etc., —
to gather, tocrfammetn ; about, urn ; of every country = of all countries. 15, in-
terfering in religious controversies, fi6) tttit retigiofen ©treitigfeiten feefaffen ; after
which place the clause ' but — King ', and supply 'always ' after ' but ' ; 'tone ',
here = dignity. 16, This sentence should likewise be introduced by
supplying 'We see him ', after which place ' though prematurely ' (ju frij^jeitig) ;
to aim, ftreBen (nad^). 17, Begin this clause with 'see him'. 18, for
the sake of, urn . . . twirfen, with Gen. 19, attempt the magnificent enter-
prise, ben gro^avtigen SSerfu^ ntac^en. 20, and = with the. 21, unb bavauf
finnctt. 22, the — laws, bi^jic^ iribevfpred^enben romif^en unb fonftigen ©cfe^e;
uniform, cinl^eitU^ ; to mould, yerfc^metjen.
Section 129.
GOETHE'S DAILY LirE AT WEIMAR.
I.
Passing through an ante-chamber, where, in cupboards, stand his
mineralogical collections, we enter (App. § 14) the study, a \ovi-roo/ed,
narrow room (@emac^, n.), somewhat dark (S. 128, N, 11), for it is
(S. 2, N. i) lighted only through two tiny windows, and* furnished
with a simplicity quite touching to behold.
In the centre'^ stands a plain oval table of unpolished oak^ No arm-
chair is to be seen, no sofa, nothing which (S. 3, N. 7) speaks* of
comfort. A plain hard chair has ^ beside it the basket in which he
used ^ to place his handkerchief. Against "^ the wall, on the right, is a '
long pear-tree table, with book-shelves, on which stand lexicons and
manuals. Here hangs a pincushion, venerable in ^ dust, with the visiting-
85 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 129.
cards, and other trifles which" death had made sacred. Here" also a
medallic^, of Napoleon, with this'^ circumscription : " Scilicet" immense
superesti-ex nomine multum^' On the side-wall again, a book-case,
with some works of poets. '(Dn the wall to the left is a long desk of
soft wood, at ^* which he was wont" to write. A sheet of paper with
notes of^^ contemporary history is fastened near^" the door, and behind"
this door tables^* of music and geology.
1, and — behold = and is (iji) furnished with an almost (fafl) touching sim-
plicity. 2, middle. 3, @i(i^en()otj, n. ; the oak = oak-tree, is rendered
by (Bid^c, f., or ISi^baum, m. 4, speaks = points to ; to point to a thing, auf
etiua^ beutcn. 5, has beside it = stands beside. 6, used to place, ^u
leflctt Vflfflte. * To use ', when employed transiti'vely, is generally rendered by
braudjen, geBrau^en, benu^en, au'irenbcn, and »erbraud)en, whilst intransiti'vely it is
rendered by ^ijfegeii or gewc^nt fcin, in the sense of *to be accustomed to ', * to
be in the habit of *, * to be wont to do '. 7, A gainst = on ; on {or to) the right,
red^tg; on {or to) the left, \\\\U. 8, cin tangcr Xifc!^ »on a3iruBaum^olj.
9, in dust = through its age. 10, which — sacred, bie buvc^ ben ilob gctieiligt
fuib. 11, Insert Ms ' or * hangs '. 12, this = the. 13, Scilicet --
multum. Little honour is derived from a great name. 14, at, an.
15, fiber bic (or aiig bet) 2;a9eg3efd)i^te. 16, in ber S^a^e ber 2:^ur ; to fasten,
an'()eften. 17, an ; supply * hang * after * door '. 18, mufifalifd^e uub
geologifd^e ^abeHen.
Section 130.
GOETHE'S DAILY LIFE AT WEIMAB.
II.
The same door leads into a bedroom; it is a* closet with a window.
A simple bed, an arm-chair by* its side, and a tiny washing-table, with
a small white basin on it and a sponge, is' all the furniture.
From the other side of the study we enter the Hbrary, which should*
rather be called a lumber-room of books. Rough® deal shelves hold the
books with ^ bits of paper, on which are written " philosophy," " history,"
" poetry," etc., to mark the classificatioikj He rose at seven [o'clock],
sometimes "^ earlier, after a sound and prolonged' sleep ; for Hke Thor-
waldsen ** he had a " talent for sleeping," only surpassed (S. 7, N. 3, B)
by*" his talent for" continuous work. Till eleven he worked without
any interruption. A cup of chocolate was then** brought, and " he re-
sumed work till one. At two he dined. This " meal was the impor-
tant meal of the day. His appetite was immense. Even on the days
when" he complained of not being hungry, he ate much more than
most men. Puddings, sweets *", and cakes were always welconieA He
sat" a long while over his wine, chatting*' gaily to some friend or
other — for he never dined alone — or to one of the actors, whom he had
often with " him, after dinner, to read over their parts, and to take ** his
instructions.
1, ein fUinca .flabinett. 2, by its side = before it, ba\Jor. 3, is — furni-
ture = form (bilben) the whole furniture (5Wcbiliar, n.). 4, should rather
be called = could (Impf. Siibj.) much rather (vielmc^r) be called. The auxiliary
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 130. 87
* could * stands last of all, whilst * called ' has the first place of the three verbs,
which are used in the Passive Voice. 5, Say ' Upon simple (fc&Itc^t) deal
boards stand the books '. 6, The passage ' with — classificatio may be
simplified by saying: * on (an) which (benen) bits of paper with lae labels
(5luff^rift,f.) . . . indicate (Be^eic^nen) a certain order'. The abbrevi^ion 'etc.*
corresponds to the German ' u. f. \vi.\ which is the short for ' uub fo it>eiter ', and
so on. 7, Insert aud^ after * sometimes '. 8, long. 9, 5llbeit
S9erte( X^ortt)albfcn, Beru()mter bdnif^er S3Ub:^auer, tourbe im Sa^re 1770 auf ber
o:^nU(^eg, troju eg nng nc(^ geigcn?
13, The English ' so ' in connection with a transitive verb is generally
to be rendered by ' c§ '. If we want to emphasize the object, however,
we use either of the demonstrative pronouns * t<^^ ' or * bie§ % and
place it at the head of the clause ; as — Do you think so f ©lauben @ie
eg? No, I do not, gflein, bag glaubc ic^ m^t 14, fagcn or mit'teilen.
15, Say ' it was neither bound, nor . . . nor . . .* 16, Render 'at the' by
the gen. of the def. art. ; and place the clause ' at — Oxford ' after ' clock '.
Last night, oergangene S^lad)!. 17, * Copy ' in the signification of ' specimen '
is rendered by ©xcm^lar, n.; pi. e ( = e) ; ^Oipic, f., is the written copy of any
book, document or MS. 18; Say ' in order to distribute them here during
this festival '. 19, and— arrived = and it shows the high degree (@tnfe, f.) of
(ber) perfection which this great art has reached now-a-days (tjeutjutage) (App.
§ 17). 20, If— printing = If I began with the humiliating confession that
we in respect to (auf) our contribution to the (jnr) early (frii^even) history
of the art of printing can claim (beanfprucfcen biirfen, which comes last) only
a small (gering) share. 21, may = can; leave off = conclude ; spirit = mood,
(Stimmnng, f. ; performance, Seijlung, f. 22, is — world, uberaH in ber Sett
mit (S^ren anerfannt hJerben ivirb. 23, *To ask' in the signification of
'asking a question ' is rendered by ftJrtOCW or elite %ta^t fteUetl, but m that
of *to request' by VxiUn. 24, to— name = to empty your glasses with
me to the (juni) memory (Slnbenfen) of (an) this most (f)od)ft) distinguished
name ; (' your glasses to empty ' must be placed at the end.) 25, 3um
©ebdc^tnig. 26, Use the Anglo-Saxon genitive here. 27, native = son.
28, country = fatherland.
Section 133.
BOBERT DICK, THE BAKER, GEOLOGIST, AND BOTANIST.
Not long ago, Sir Roderick Murchinson discovered at Thurso, in the
far north of Scotland, a profound ^ geologist, in the person of a baker
90 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 33.
there', named Robert Dick. When (S. 4, N. 2^ Sir Roderick called
upon him at ^ the bakehouse in which (S. 131, N. 4) he baked and earned
his bread, Robert Dick deKneated * /o him by ^ means of flour upon a
board, the geographical features^ and geological phenomena of his
native country, pointing ' out its imperfections in * the existing maps,
which ' he had ascertained by travelling over the country in his leisure
hours. On^° further inquiry, Sir Roderick ascertained " that the humble"
individual before him was not only a capital baker and geologist, but also
a first-rate ^' botanist. " I found," said the Director-General of the Geogra-
phical Society, " to my great humiliation, that this baker " knew infinitely
more of (S. 40, N. 9) botanical science, ay, ten times more, than I did ;
and that there were (S. 82, N. 7) only some twenty or thirty specimens ^^
of flowers which he had not collected. Some he had obtained ^° as
presents, some (= others) he had purchased, but the greater portion had
been accumulated ^^ by his industry, in his native county of Caithness ;
and the specimens ^^ were all arranged" in the most beautiful order,
with 2° their scientific names affixed." — S. Smiles, " Self-Help."
1, gvunblic^. 2, bortig, which use attributively before the noun * baker*;
named, nameii^. 3, in. 4, cntlxjevfen, insep. comp. str. v. 5, tnittc(3
cities tttit Wiii)i beflveuten S3rctte3. 6, UmriiTe. 7, Say * whereby he
pointed out the imperfections'. To point out a thing, auf ettvaS oenceifen, insep.
cornp. str. v. 8, Use the gen. of the def. art. 9, which — hours = of
which (woiJou) he had convinced himself on (auf) his travels through the
country in his leisure hours (SJiupefiunben). 10, ^ang, m.) to work (jur Sltkit) and the
necessity to do your ( = thy) bestf 14, Place ' in you ' ( = thee) after
'virtues', immediately before the infinitive 'breed* (= awaken, eriretfen).
15, the idle man, bev a?Ju^igt3dn9er.
Section 135.
THE GOSPEL OP WORK.
II.
The monks in olden times found it so^ When (S. 18, N. 6) they
shut ^ themselves up from the world to worship God in ^ prayers and
hymns, they found that [here follows the subject "they"], without working*,
without ^ hard work either of head or of hands, they could not ^ even be
good men (S. 134, N. g)./ The'^ devil came and^ tempted them, they
said, as often as they were ^ idle. An idle monk's soul was lost, they
used (S. 129, N. 6) to say, and they spoke truly. Though they gave^°
up a large portion of ^^ every day, and of every night also, to ^^ prayer
and worship, (S. 27, N. 8) yet^^ they found [that] they could not pray
aright without work.
And "working (S. ii> N. 7) is praying," said one of the holiest of
them that" ever Hved; and he spoke truth (S. 3, N. 2); if^^ a man will
but do his work for the sake of duty, which is for the sake of God. —
Charles Kingsley.
1, Turn * it so ' by * bag ', which place at the head of the sentence, using the
inverted construction and inserting the adv. 'and)' after the verb. 2, to
shut oneself up, jic^ ab'f^Ue§cn, sep. comp. str. v. refl. 3, bmd) ; to worship,
cere^ren. 4, working = virork, 5, ©"^ne angejlrengte ^ovf-obet ^anbarfeeit.
e, not even, nic^t einntal. 7, The words ' They said ' are best placed at
the head of this passage. To translate the verbs correctly, you must carefully
read App. §§ 28 and 30. 8, and tempted them = in order to tempt them.
9, ttdren. 10, 'to give up', here = to devote, njibnten, with dat. 11, of —
also = of the day and of the night. 12, bem ©etset unb ben Slnbac^t^iibungen.
13, yet, bo^, to be placed after the subject. 14, who ever (j[e) has lived.
g% GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 35.
How must the verbs be placed? 15, Begin a new period here, and say:
* When a man (S. 134, N. 9) does his work for the sake of (um . . . iriUen,
which governs the Gen.) his duty, (S. 27, N. 8) he does it (to agree with
*duty ') for God's sake '.
Section 136.
DO NOT BE ASHAMED OF YOUR ORIGIN'.
I.
General Bau, a German (S. loi, N. i) officer in' the service of Russia,
who had contributed much to the elevation of the great Catherine ^, had '
orders to march to Holstein with a body of troops of which he had the
command. He was a soldier of fortune, and no one knew either his
family or his native place. One day (S. 19, N. 2), as he was encamped
near * Husum, he invited the principal ^ officers to dinner. As they were
sitting down to the table, they ^ saw a plain miller and his wife brought
into the tent, whom ^ the general had sent his aide-de-camp to seek.
The poor miller and his wife approached, trembling (S. 53, N. 12) with^
apprehension. The general reconciled them to* their situation, and
made " them sit down beside him to dinner, during which he asked "
them a number of questions about their family.
1, Origin, ^erfunft, f.; in the service of Russia, in tufilfd^cn ^itn^tn.
2, ^atl^arina I., Jlaiferin Bon 9tuf tanb, h)urte am 15. SH^ril 1684 gcBoten unb
Yoax bic 3^oc^ter cine6 lit:^auifd^en 93auev0, namen^ (Samuel tSfairrongfi. 3m ^a^xt
1 70 1 tourbe fie bie ©attin eineS fd^tvebifcfien 2)ra9oner3, fiet bann bei bcr (§innal)me
aWarienburgg burd^ bie Otuffen (1702) in bie ^dnbe beg niffifd^cn (Sencrat« ©(^eremetjen),
bur(f| ben jle jum ^ui^jlcn SWenfd^ifotr unb enbUc^ jum ^aifer ?)3eter bcm @ro§en fam,
ber fic^ in jte vcrtiebtc unb ji^ im Sa'^re 1707 ^eimti(^ mit ii)X »erma{|ten liep. 3^r
cigentUd^et J^aufname h)ar SWavtJia, fceim Ubertritt jut gried^ifd^ fat^pUfd^en Jlirc^e
eri^ictt jte iebod^ bie Xiamen ^at^arina Slteriensna. 3m 3a'^re 171 1 gelang e« t:^r, inbem
fie fi^ bie ©unjit be3 ®ropvejier3 p gettjinnen icuftc, am ^rutl) bag ruffifc^e ^eer burd^
8ijl ani gefdl^rlic^er Sage ju befrcien, n^orauf fie im 3at)re 17 12 Bon ^eter bem ©ro^en
offentUc^ alg feine red^tma§ige ©emal^tin auerfannt h)urbc. ©ie tourbe enblic^ im 3af)rc
1724 al3 Jtaifcrin fcicrlici^ gehont, aU jie jeboc^ md} ^etcrg be3 ©rofen llobc im 3a^re
1725 auf QBetrieb beg Siitften aWenfc^itow alg regierenbe Jlaiferin auggenifen tvurbc, uberlie^
fie f\6^ eiuer jiigcHofen Sebengu^eifc unb fiavb am i7.9)'?ai 1727. .'
NOT NEAR ENOUGH YET.
There* is a popular report in the Brandenburg district, where Bis-
marck's family has been so many centuries at home, which attributes to
the Bismarcks, as the characteristic saying of the house, the phrase :
" 3*lod^ lange ni^t genug " — (Not near enough yet), and which expresses ",
we^ suppose, the popular^ conception of* their tenacity of purpose —
that "^ they were not tired out of any plan they had formed by a reiterated
failure or a pertinacious opposition which would have disheartened most
of their compeers. There '^ is a somewhat extravagant illustration of
this characteristic in Bismarck's wild, youthful days, if his biographer may
be trusted. When studying ^ law at Berlin, he had been more than once
disappointed ® by a bootmaker who ^^ did not send home his boots when
they were promised. Accordingly ^* when this next happened, a servant
of the young jurist appeared at the bootmaker's at six in the morning
(App. § 9) with the simple question : " Are Herr ^^ von Bismarck's boots
ready ? " When he was told they were not ^^ he departed ^\ but ai ten
minutes past six another servant appeared, asking ^^ the same question,
and ^^ so at precise intervals of ten minutes it went on all day, till by "
the evening the boots were finished and ^^ sent home. — Earle, " The
Philology of the English Tongue."
1, Say ' In the province 0/ Brandenburg, where the family Bismarck for
(fcit) several centuries is at home (* to be at home,' here anfciffig fcin) there is
(erijiieit) a popular (yolf^tumti^) report (@age, f.) which, as a characteristic
94 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 38.
saying (2Bat)tfpnt(!^, m.) attributes (gu'fc^rcibcn, with the dat.) to the Bismarcks
the phrase (SWotto, n.) '. 2, Say *as we suppose *, which place after the rel.
pron. 3, ^o^uldt; conception, SSorjlcUuiig, f. 4, »on ifjrcm jdf)en
gejl()a(tcn am 3tt)ecfe. 5, bcjcici^net. 6, that they even (au(^) through
repeated failure (^e^Ifd^tagcn) or pertinacious (^artnacfig) opposition (SSiberftanb,
m.), which would have discouraged (cntmutigt ^dtte, which place at the end of
this clause) most of their compeers ((Stanbe^genoffen), were not tired out of any
plan they had formed (fic^ ni^t won if|rcm cinntat aefa^ten ^lane abbringen ttcfen).
7, A somewhat eccentric illustration (^dag, m.) of (fur) this characteristic
quality we find in Bismarck's wild (flurmifi^) youth, if we can trust his bio-
grapher. 8, To study law, Suva fiubievcn. 9, tdufci^cn ; by, von. 10, Say
* who had not (App. § 10) sent back his boots at the appointed (wcrabrcbet) time'.
11, When (S. 4, N. 2) it therefore happened again (luieber gefd^e'^cn). 12, i^iitft
C)tto »oit SSi^marcf ivuvbe am i. %\fx\[ 1815 ju ©d^on^aufcn, bem (Stammgutc bcr
gamilie 33i«marcf, in bet 5|5rooinj ^ranbenburg im ^onigreici^c ^reufen geboren. @r
entftammt ber alten ^rcu§ifd)en abeligen tJamilie con ^i^marcf , tweld^e aud^ »on 33igmarcf5
@(i)on^ufcn genannt tt)irb, um biefelbe won ber il^r ttcrwanbtcn gamilie won SBi^marcf*
IBo^leu JU unterfci^eibett. SSon ©i^marcf trat juerjl ojfentlic^ auf bem Sanbtage »on 1847
atg %\x\)xtx bcf du^crjlen SUeci^ten (extreme Conservatives) unb bann atS aJJitglicb ber
im 3al)rc 1848 tagcnben gnjcitcn ^^rcufifd^eu .hammer (the Prussian House of
Commons) at3 entfc^iebcner ©egner beg Sfie))rdfentation6ft)|tem3 (Representative
Government) unb ber Oleid)gtterfajfung fjerttor. ©ein entfd^iebcneS Xalent fiir bie
btplomatifc^e 8aufbaT)n Beftimmte bie 9tegierung, i^n im 3at)re 1851 gum Segation^s
fefretdr feci ber ^reufifc^en SSunbegtag^gcfaubf^aft in iJvanffurt ^j^. ju ernennen. 2)rei
SWonate fpdter iDurbe er jjebod^ \6^m jum SSunbeStag^gefanbten cr^oben, in njeld^er (Sigcn*
fdjaft er »ergebUcf| 513reufeng ®lci(||lef{ung mit Dftreici^ betm 6unbe6tage erfirebte.
Sflad^bem er feit bem i. Slpril 1859 preu§ifd)er ©efanbter in ^eter^burg unb feit bem
griif)ia()r 1862 S3otfd^uftcr in ^ari« gewefen, trat er am 24. September be^felbeu 3at|re«
atl a^inifler beg Slugtvdrttgeu an bie (£).n|^e beg neu emannteu .ffabinettg. _ ^g iviirbe ju
wcit fut)ren, l^ier auf bie ©injet^eiten feiner gro^artigen ©rfotgc atg SWinifter^^rdftbent
einjugetjen, genuge eg ;^u bemevfen, ba^ fein ^auv^tftreben barauf gerid^tet tear, ^reufen
jur t)errf(!^enbert Wla6^\ in IDeutfc^tanb %\\ mac^en, Dflrei^ baraug ju tjerbrdngen,
unb f(t)licplid) burc^ Slufiofung beg beutfc^en vager ^riebengwertrag entfagtc Dllreid^
nid^t aKein feinen 9lnfrriic^en atg ^rdjibialmac^t im bcutfci^en ic l)0(i^t)evj{g|lcn SWenfc^en, gerabc bicienigen. 8, * to feel ', here
cm^finben ; * most ' here = deepest, am ttefjien ; pleasure, @enuf , m. 9, In
order to connect this sentence more closely with the preceding, I propose to
say: 'the pleasure (®cnup, m.) of having (S. 34, N. 10) some one to (ju) whom
they can look up, and whom they can admire *. The auxiliary * can ' must be
omitted in the first instance. 10, Where must you place the two verbs,
and in what order ? 11, It is a matter of course that the words * their
own ' must be repeated here in German. Why ? 12, Whatever (3Ba«
(xwCCj) may happen.
:» . .>,v Section 141.
.c ^^.tvrv^ ' ' ^EBO WORSHIP.
II.
Blessed^ and ennobling is the feeling which gathers round a wise
teacher or '^ a great statesman all the more earnest, high-minded, pious
youths of his generation^; the* feeling which makes'^ soldiers follow the
general whom they trust, they know not why or whither, through danger •,
hunger, fatigue, and ^ death itself ; the * feeling which, in its highest per-
fection, made * the Apostles forsake all and follow Christ *, saying (S. 1 1 1,
N. 6) : " Lord, to ^° whom shall we go ? Thou hast the words of eternal
life," and which made them " ready to- work ^"^ and to die for Him whom
the world called the Son of the carpenter, but whom they, through ^' the
Spirit of God bearing witness with their own pure and noble spirits,
knew ^* to be the Son of the Living God. — Charles Kingsley, " The
Water of Life."
1, 93cg(ucfcnb. 2, Repeat here the prep. * round ',um. 8, generation =
time. 4, [tmi. 5, to make follow, folgen Ijei^cn, which verbs must be
placed after the rel. clause ; folgen requires the dat. ; to trust a person, etnem
oertvanen. 6, Use the pi. with this noun. 7, yea, even unto death.
8, * to make *, here again t^eipen (to bid), str. v. tr. ; which place after * follow *
according to App. § 19. 9, Jesus Christ has retained its Latin declension,
thus: N. 3efn6 (StjrijlusJ ; G. 3efn 6t)«fti; D. 3efn ©{jrijlo; Ace. 3efnm (5f>vifium.
Use the dat. (5(}riflc>, since foUjcn governs the dat. 10, *to whom', here
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 141. 97
Iwoiim (whither), which appears in the German text of the Bible. 11, 'to
make ready ', here = to enable, befdl^igen. 12, unv!en is more appropriate
here than avBeiten, considering the elevated style of the whole speech.
13, through — spirits, fraft beg g6ttti(^en ©eij^eg, bet in if)ren reineu, ebten Jperjcn
3euguig ablcgtc. 14, knew to be, aU (followed by the Ace.) . . . erfaniUcn.
Section 142.
JAMES WATT AND THE STEAM-ENGINE.
I.
James Watt was the great Improver of the steam-engine; but, in
truth ^, as to all that is admirable in its structure, or vast in its utility, he
should rather be described as its Inventor. // was by his inventions thai
its action ^ was so regulated as ^ to make it capable of being applied to
the finest and most delicate manufactures, and its power so increased as
to set weight and solidity at defiance. By his admirable contrivances* it
has become a thing stupendous alike for its force and flexibility, for the
prodigious power which it can exert, and the ease, precision, and ductility
with which this power can be varied, distributed, and applied. The
trunk of an elephant, that can pick up a pin or rend° an oak, is as
nothing to it. It can engrave a seal, and crush masses of obdurate
metal before it^ draw out without ^ breaking a thread as fine as gossamer,
and lift a ship of war like a bubble in the air. It can embroider''^ muslin
and forge anchors, cut steel into ribbons *, and impel ^ loaded vessels
against the fury of the winds and waves.
1, * in truth ' is better not translated here. Say * but in regard to {y,\\
(Ruiftc^t auf) all that (S. 3, N. 7) refers (fic^ bej|ict)eu) to (auf) the excellence of
its construction and (u>ic) to (auf) the variety (SWanni^faltigfeit, f.) of its
application (3^u|>amueubuug, f.), should he rather (eigentlicf>) be called the
Inventor of the same'. 2, 3Bivfung, f.; in what voice is the verb ? Insert
the adv. evft after the auxiliary. 3, as — defiance = as (urn) to be able to
employ it in (bei) the making (5lnfertigung, f.) of the finest and most delicate
(javt) manufactures (^atrifate), and its power so increased as (urn) to be able to
render resistance (Sffiibevftanb (eijleu) to every weight (8afi, f.) and every solidity
(S^eftigfeit, f.). Translate ' to be able ' by fonncn, which need be expressed but
once, and must be placed at the very end of the whole period, which, along
with the following, is perhaps the most difficult to translate that has yet been
given. 4, (Sinnd;tungen ; it = the machine; thing, 2Berfjeug, n., after which
place the verb * become ' ; alike for, uub jtt)ar bieg fott)oI)l ioegen . . . line oI(e gefertigt ; ' goods ', here ©toffe. 5, ivbeneg ©efc^irv or
Xovferimren. 6, ^Berg^unb ^ '^he supplies must arrive within
two days, or '^ I may have a fearful time of it among the dying. Of course
I hold myself responsible for any^ expense (S. 16, N. 10) you^ may
incur in the business./^What is wanted is immediate relief, and I pray
you to^° use your utmost energies to forward it at once. If (App. § 21)
you have such little luxuries ^^ as tea, coffee, sugar, and biscuits by you,
such ^2 as one man can easily carry, I beg you on ^^ my own behalf that
you will send a small supply ^^ and^^ add to the great debt of gratitude due
to you upon the timely arrival of the supplies for my people. Until ^^ that
time I beg you to believe me,
Yours sincerely,
H. M. Stanley,
Commanding" the Anglo-American Expedition for^^ the
Exploration of Africa. %
rS. You^^ may not know me by name, I therefore add, I^° am the
p^on that discovered^^ Livingstone in 1871. H. M. S. — H. M. Stanley,
"Through the Dark Continent."
1, cloths = pieces o/" cloth. 2, of — have = and of that quality with
which you trade, which is quite different from ours. 3, but — grain = but
still better would be (Pluperf. Subj.) as much rice or grain as ten or fifteen
men (Seute) can carry. 4, = hungry stomachs. 5, as — food = as (after
which place the subject * ive '), even in the possession of the cloths, we should
yet want time to exchange provisions for them (S. 4, N. 5, B). 6, bie ^imQev?
leibenben. 7, or — dying, Liter. = if (after which place the subject */') among the
dying I shall (foK) not experience (bur(i)te'Ben) a dreadful time (App. § 18).
8, any = all. 9, bic 3f)nen au3 biefer Slugelegentjeit ertoac^fett wogen. 10, to —
once = to do the ( =- your) utmost in your poiver (feiii 5lu^erjleg t{)Utt) and to send
us the same (to agree with relief) at once. 11, Suni^artifet ; to have by
oneself = to possess. 12, such = about as much. 13, on — behalf =
for my own person. 14, supply = quantity. 15, and — people = and
thereby still to increase (^Jerc^vo^ein) the great debt of (S. 3, N. 2) gratitude, to
which I shall be in duty bound to you (einem »ev^f!irf)tet fein) after the timely
(rcdjtgeitig) arrival of the supplies (Sffiarenfeubung). 16, ®i^ ba'^in entpfet)le
\6^ tttic^ 3f)ncn I)od>ad)tenb uub erc|eBen|i. 17, .^ommanbiercnber ber. 18, jur.
19, = Perhaps is my name unknown to you. 20, I — that = that it is I,
who. 21, auf'ftnben, of which use the Perfect.
" Section 148.
ANSWER TO^ THE PRECEDIK-Q LETTER.
English Factory, Boma, 6th August 1877, 6.30 a.m.
H. M. Stanley, Esq.
Dear Sir,
Your welcome letter came'^ to hand yesterday, at 7 p.m. As' soon as
its contents were understood, we arranged to despatch to you such articles
as you requested, as much as our stock on hand would permit, and other
things that we deemed woujd be suitable in that locality. You will see
102 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 48.
^/la/ we send fifty pieces ^ cloth, each twenty-four yards long, and some
sacks containing sundries for yourself; several* sacks ^rice, potatoes, a
few bundles ^fish, a bundle ^tobacco, and one demijohn*^ ^rum. The '^
carriers are all paid, so that you need not trouble yourself about them.}!jf "'
That ^ is all we need say about business. We are exceedingly sorry to
hear that you have arrived there in such (fo) piteous ' condition, but we
send our warmest congratulations to you, and hope that you will soon
arrive in Boma. (This** place is called Boma by us, though on the map it'^^v
is Embomma.) Again '* hoping that you will soon arrive, and that you
are not suffering in health,
Believe" us to remain,
Your sincere friends,
HaTTON & COOKSON.
(Signed) A. Da Motta Veiga.
J. W. Harrison.
1, auf, with Ace. ; a.m. ntovgen^ ; p.m. aknbS. — This letter and the ac«
panying supplies were received by Mr. Stanley in the morning of the 6tl
August, two days after he despatched his letter to Boma. Messrs. A.
Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison were the managers of a factory be-
longing to Messrs. Hatton & Cookson of Liverpool. 2, came to
hand = we have . . . received. 3, As — locality = As soon as we had under-
stood the contents of the same (to agree with letter), we (App. § 14) made
arrangements (Slnftatteu treffen) to send you the asked for (erfceten) articles, as
far as (fo Wnt) our stock (2Baren(aiier, n., or SSarenvovrat, m.) would permit
us (S. 51, N. 13), and add (supply nod^) some other things of which we thought
they might ( = could) be useful to you there. 4, several, a few = some.
5, cine grope .^orbfiafc^e. 6, Sffieiter ^abtn 'mix nidf)t^ ®ef(^aft(i(^e3 ju fagen.
7, trauvig. 8, Say 'We call this place (Drt, m.) B'. 9, Say Mt is
called'. 10, Say ' Again (no^ eiumal) expressing (8. iii, N. 6), the hope'.
11, jeid^nen it)ir in aufric^tigct i^reunbf^aft ergcBenjl.
Section 149.
MB. STANLEY'S ACKNOWIiEDGMEWT^ OF THE PEECEDING
liETTEB AND THE SUPPLIES '^
I.
Banza M'Buko, August 6, 1877.
Messrs. A. Da Motta Veiga and J. W. Harrison,
Embomma, Congo River.
Gentlemen,
I (S. ii5> N. i) have received your welcome letter, but better
than all, and ^ more welcome, are your supplies. I am unable to express
just at present how grateful I feel./ At the sight of (oon) the stores ex-
posed^ to our hungry eyes— at the sight of (yon) the rice, the fish, and
the rum, and * for me — wheaten bread, butter, sardines, jam, peaches,
grapes, beer (ye » gods 1 just think of it— three bottles pale ale " !), besides
tea and sugarAe (App. § 14) are all so over-joyed and confused that
we cannot restrain^ ourselves from falling tQ and* enjoying this sudden
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 149. IO3
bounteous store. I beg you will charge' our apparent want of (an)
thankfulness to our greediness. If we do not thank you sufficiently in
words, rest assured we ^° feel what volumes could not describe.
For the next twenty-four hours we shall be too busy eating and
drinking to think of anything else much ; but I may say that the psople^^
will cry out joyfully, while ^^ their mouths are full of rice and fish:
" Verily, our master has found the sea and his brothers, but we did not
believe him until ^^ he showed us the rice and the pambe (rum). We
did not bcHeve there ^* was any end to the great river; but God be
praised for ever, for we shall see white people " to-morrow, and our
wars^^ and troubles will be over !"
1, 5lnjetge »on bent (Sm^jfangc ; * supplies ', here aBarenfenbimg, f. 2, Insert
the adverb tio^ here. 3, It was exposed to my eyes, eg Wax t)ov nteinen
5Xugen auggeBreitet ; ' hungry *, here gierig. 4, unb — beg fiir mid^ Bejlimmten
SBelprotg ; the article, in the Gen. case, must be repeated before each of the
following nouns. 5, ye — it = o fefjet, 3^r ©otter. 6, SBeipier.
"Mfce^triiigen ; from falling to, j^ugugreifen. 8, unb biefe ung fo fc^nefl uftb
^Rmi'itig jugefanbten SBovrate gu »evjef)veu. 9, I beg you will charge this
tlP^his greediness, i^ Bitte olj^en an ber SWauer an'rciben, to draw
a match across the wall.
Section 153.
NEW-YEAR'S EVE.
II.
She drew one out — "Ritsh!" how it sputtered* and burned 1 It
burned with a warm, bright flame, hke a candle, and she bent her hand
round it (S. 4, N. 5, B), it was a wonderful Hght ! It appeared to the
little girl as if she were sitting '^ before a large iron stove, in which the
fire burned brightly, and ^ gave out such comfort and such warmth. She
stretched out her feet to warm them, too — but the flame went* out, the
stove disappeared, and there she sat, still holding ^ a Httle bit of the
burnt-out* match in her (S. 43, N. 9, A) hand.
Another was ^ lighted ; it burned, and, where "^ the light fell upon the
wall, that* became transparent, so that she could see into the room.
There the table was covered with a cloth of dazzling white, and with
fine china ; and a roast goose was smoking most ® temptingly upon it.
But what was still more delightful, the goose sprang down from the
table, and^*', with a knife and (S. 10, N. 9) fork sticking in its" back,
waddled towards the little girl. Then " the match went out *, and she /
saw nothing but the thick, cold wall.
She lighted a third one (S. 67, N. 3); and now she was sitting under
the most splendid Christmas-tree. It was larger and more beautifully
decorated" than the one (S. 16, N. 10) she had seen at Christmas^*
through the window at" the rich merchant's. Hundreds of" tapers
were burning amongst the green branches, and painted " pictures, ^such ^'^
as she had seen in the shop-windows, looked down upon her. She
stretched out^° both her hands, when the match was burnt* out, —
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION I|3. 107
1, f^iru^en, w. v. 2, Use the Impf. Subj. according to App. § 33 ; as if,
dg. 3, uub id) ivei^ ni^t h)ie »iel Sef)a9a^feit uub 2Bai*me augilrat)(te. 4, ' to
go out', and ' to burn out', here erlofd)en, insep. comp. str. v. 5, The Present
Participle may be used here in German, but where must it be placed ? 6, In
which Voice is the verb here ? Introduce the clause by the grammatical
subject 'eg', as explained in S. 104, N. 19. 7, where = at (an) the place
(©tefle, f.) where. 8, biefe. 9, Use the superlative of f)od^. 10, Here
follows the verb * waddled '. 11, in its = in the, contracted ; towards,
auf . . . iM, which latter preposition place at the end of the whole period.
12, Then = Thereupon. 13, anf pitmen, sep. comp. w. v. 14, at (an,
contracted with the dat. of the def. art.) Christmas-day. 15, The pre-
position * at ', in the signification of * at the house of is generally-
rendered by the preposition ' bci% which governs the dative; as—
At Easter we shall all dine at my Sim Dftcrtage n)erben mr af(e Bei meiner
mother's. s0f u 1 1 e r gn SWittag effen.
16, won. 17, painted = coloured, Bnnt. 18, such as, n)ie. 19, Supply the
pronominal adverb ' banac^ ' before the particle au^, which stands at the end.
*
Section 154.
NEW-YEAB'S EVE.
III.
The countless lights rose higher and higher, and she now saw that
they (eg) were the stars, one of which fell ^ leaving a long line of light
in the sky.
Some^ one has (S. 29, N. 3) died just now, the girl said; for her
old grandmother, who alone ^ had loved her, but who was now dead,
had told her that* when a star fell, a soul took (App. §§28 and 30) its
flight up to heaven. •
She drew another 'match across the wall, and in the light it threw °
around stood her old grandmother, so bright ^, so mild, and so loving.
"Grandmother," the httle girl cried, "oh, take me \y\ihyou ! I know
that you will disappear as soon as the match is burnt out, just like the
warm stove, the delicious roast goose, and the Christmas-tree 1 " And
hastily she lighted the "^ rest of the matches that remained in the box,
for she wished to keep ^ her grandmother with her as long as possible ;
and the matches burnt so brightly, that it was lighter than day. Never
before^ had she seen her grandmother so beautiful and so tall, and
behold, she ^° now took the litde girl in her arms, and ", in radiance
and joy, flew high, high up with her into the heaven, where she felt
neither (fein) cold, nor (feiti) hunger, nor (unb fein) fear any more ^^, —
for she was with God.
But, in the corner between the two houses, in the cold morning air,
lay the little girl with pale cheeks and smiHng lips. She was frozen ^^
to death during the last night of the Old Yean^ The first light of the
New Year shone upon the dead body of the little girl with the matches,
one ^* box of which was nearly consumed. " She must have tried to
warm herself," the people said ; but no one knew of (i?on) the visions ^^
she had had, or of the splendour that (S. 48, N. 6) surrounded her when
Io8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 54.
she entered with her grandmother into the joys of a New Year. — After
Hans Andersen, " Fairy Tales."
1, Say * fell down and left (jurudftaflfen) a long line of light (Sid^tflrcifen, m.)
in (an) the sky *. 2, This sentence is best introduced by the grammatical
subject * c6 ', see S. 104, N. 19. 3, Say * alone of all '. 4, that — fell ;
ba^ bcim ^evuntcrfaKcn eiucg ©tcrncg ; flight, ^(ug, m. ; up to, ju, contracted with
the dat. of the def. art. 5, to throw around, urn fic^ ^tx oerbrcitcn.
e, bright = friendly ; mild, fanft ; loving, ticbrci(!^. 7, the — box, bic in bet
©c^ac^tcl fid^ noc^ befinblidjcn 3iinbl)6(jer (Gomp. S. 48, N. 6). 8, to keep with
oneself, Bei fic!^ bet)altcn, insep. comp. str. v. tr. 9, jjnwor. 10, It will
be best to begin this clause with the adv. * now *, and to turn the personal
pronoun * she ' into the demonstrative pronoun * the same ', to agree with
'grandmother'. This will commend itself in order to avoid ambiguity.
11, Here follows the verb 'flew'; in radiance and joy, freubejlra'^lenb, adv. J"
high— heavens, mit if)r ^um ^immel empor. 12, any more, mc^r, before the
verb; 'with', here bci. 13, crfvicren, insep. comp. str. v., to freeze to
death. 14, Liter. *of which nearly a whole box was burnt up'.
15, XraumHtb, n. ^
Section 155.
PKOVIDENCE^ VINDICATING THE INNOCENT.
It is (S. 2, N. i) recorded in history that a beautiful maiden named
Blanche, the serf of '^ an ancient nobleman, was wooed ^ by her master's
son. Not * admiring his character, she scorned ^ his suit. Upon this
his course of love turned ^ to bitter hatred. Just ' then a precious string
of pearls confided (S. 7, N. 3, B) to the maiden's care was^ lost. Her
pseudo-lover ^ charged her with the theft, and, in *® accordance with the
customs of that rude age, she was doomed to die. On the day of the
execution, as the innocent girl knelt to offer" her dying prayer, a^^ flash
of lightning struck a statue of Justice, which adorned the market-place,
to the dust. From^^ a destroyed bird's nest, built (S. 7, N. 3, -^, and S.
48, N. 6) in a crevice of the image", dropped the lost^^ pearls, thus"
declaring the maiden's innocence. In a moment the exultant crowd
rushed to the scaff"old, demanding her release. There she knelt beside
the block, pale and beautiful, and with a smile of peace upon her lips.
They (S. 134, N. 4) spoke ^^ — she answered not. They touched her —
she was dead 1 To preserve her memory they raised a statue there ^^ ;
and to" this day, when'^" men gaze upon her image, they condemn her
oppressor; they praise her for the purity of her character; they recog-
nise the justice of Him whose '^^ lightning testified her innocence. —
W. Smith.
1, Say, 'Providence (S. 3, N. 2) protects innocence.* 2, of — noble-
man = of a nobleman of an old family (®cfc^lf(^t, n.). 3, unnvcr'bcn, insep.
comp. str. V. 4, == As his character displeased (mi^fatlcn, insep. comp. str.
v., governing the dat.) her. 5, tfcifd^maljen, insep. comp. w. v. tr. 6, fic^
vtev\ran'bchi in. 7, Just then = Just at this time. 8, was lost = one
missed; care, DM)ut, f. 9, = false lover. 10, in — customs = according
to the law. 11, = to speak. 12, a — Justice ... to the dust = fu^r cin
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 55. I09
^(tpra'^t in bte (Statue ber ©erecS^tic^feit . . . unb ;^erfc^mettertc fte. 13, 5lug.
14, ^ilbfdufe, f. 15, = missed. 16, Say 'and testified (Bejeu^en, w.
V. tr.) thus the maiden's innocence '. 17, Supply ' to her '. 18, bafelbjl.
19, H^ auf ben ^eutigen ^^rtg. 20, Construe thus : ' those who look
at her image (^itbni^, n.) condemn her oppressor', and consider App.
§ 14. 21, In order to avoid a repetition of the same form of pronoun,
turn the last clause into : *who with his lightning testified her innocence '.
Section 156.
WAPOLEON BONAPARTE \
I.
Napoleon understood his business ^ He was a man who in each
moment and ^ emergency knew what * to do next. This ^ is an immense
comfort and refreshment to the spirits, not only of (S. 3, N. 2) kings,
but ^ of citizens. Few ^ men have any next ; they live from hand to
mouth, without plan, are^ ever at the end of their line, and, (S. 102,
N. 30) after each action, wait for * an impulse from abroad. Napoleon
would have been the first man of the world, if ^° his ends had been
purely public. As" he is, he inspires confidence and vigour by the
extraordinary unity of his action.
He is firm ^^ sure, and self-denying ; he sacrifices everything to his
aim ^^ — money, troops, generals, his own safety even, and is not misled ^*,
like common adventurers, by ^^ the splendour of his own means. " In-
cidents ought not to govern policy," he said, " but ^^ policy incidents."
" To " be hurried away by every event, is ^^ to have no political system
at all." His victories were only so many doors ^^, and^*^ he never for a
moment lost sight of his way onward in the dazzle and uproar of the
present circumstances. He knew what to do, and he flew to his mark.
He 2^ would shorten a straight fine to come at his object. Horrible
anecdotes may no doubt be collected (S. 4, N. 4) from his history, of '^^
the price at which he bought his successes ; but he must not, therefore,
be set ^^ down as cruel, but only as one ^* who knew no impediment to
his will : not ^^ bloodthirsty, not cruel ; but woe to ^^ what person stood
in his way 1 " Sire, General Clarke cannot combine with General Junot
for the dreadful fire of the Austrian battery." " Let '^^ him carry the bat-
tery." " Sire, every regiment that approaches the heavy artillery is
sacrificed ^*. Sire '^^, what orders ?" " Forward ! Forward !"
1, 9Za!poIeoii I., ^aifer ber ^ranjofen, geboren ben 15. Slug. 1769 ju Sliaccto
auf ^orftfa tear ber jtveite @o§n be^ ^atnjievg (Sarlo ^cnaparte unb bei* SWaria :i^dtitia
OiatttoUni. lUa^bent er feit 1779 bie ^rieg^fc^ulen gu S3rienne unb ^arig befuci^t 'ijiiiii,
trat er am i. @ept. 1785 al^ Sieutenanl bet SlrtiUerie in bie 5lrmee ein. 3m 3a()re 1793
nmrbe er al6 9lvtilterie:^auvtmann feiten^ ber OiepuMif gegcn bie 2lufftdnbif(^en in ^cvfifa
tterujanbt, treldje i^n d(i^teten, ba er at^ Sanb^mann gegen fie fdmvfte. @eit bem 12. (Se:pt.
1793 D6erbefet|tiS^a6er beg ^etagerung^gefd^iitgeg oon S^oulon, trelc^eg jic^ in ben ^dnben
ber ©ngtdnber befanb, jtwang er ben ^(utj am 19. 2)ej. juv Capitulation, irovauf er gum
a3rigabegenerat ber 2lrtitterie beforbert n)arb unb in ber 5lvmee »on Stalien im Criege
gegen Dllreic^ biente. Otac^bem er jti^ yielfac^ auggejei(^net :^atte, icurbe er im.^^ebruar
1796 sum Dberbefe{)(g^akr ber 5lrmee »on Stalien evnanut, reovganifievte biefelbe, ixaUxti
no GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1^6.
in furjem bie gomBarbci, fc^difl bie j5ftrci(i^er in mc^rercn ^ro^en ©d^lad^tcn, jtoang
QKantna gur Capitulation, brang in Sftiien, ^arnt{)cn unb ©teicrmarf cin unb fc^to^ am
i8. Slpril 1797 i^u (Bampo gormio ben fuv ^xanUdd) tjoc^fl gunftigcn 5«cbcn tnit
Dftveit!^ ah. @cit bent 9. SUidrj 1796 mit bcr tterhjitiweten ©cncralin Sofcjj'^inc SSeau^
l^arnai^ »ermd:^lt, ttjarb ev am 7- %(hx. 1800 neben (Sambacercg unb ScBrun, trelc^c if|m
beratenb j^ui* ©eite l^anben, quf jcf)n 3a{)rc jum crften Conful crnannt. S^iad^ me(|;
reren fiegreic^en Jlriegen mit Oflrei^ ^veu^cn, Oiuflanb, ©ngtanb u. a., njarb cr im
SHai 1802 burc^ (£enatgbefc^tu§ auf njciterc je^n So^re unb am 2. Slug, begfelbcn
Sa^reg auf ficbcn^jcit jum Confut crnannt. 9lm 8. SWai 1804 tt>urbe cr jebo^ fc^on ali
9lapoUon I . jum erblic^en Caifer bcr ^ranjofcn erf (art. Sflun folgtc cine fa|i ununter?
brodjenc 9iei()e von Criegen mit fafl alien cuvopdifc^en SWdc^ten, unb aU cr im Sa^rc
1809 ben Jpoljepunft feiner SWad^t erreic^t ^atte, Iie§ cr ftd^, fciner finberlofen (5^c ttjcgcn,
»on fciner ebenfo flugen wic Uebengtnurbigen ©ema'^Un fc^eibcn unb »crmd^lte fic^ am 2.
Slprii 1810 mit Wlaxit l&uifc, bcr Xoc^ter Srang I. won Djlreic^. 91(3 cr iebod^ 1812
Oiuplanb ben Crieg crfldrte, mit bcr gropen Slrmcc in 9iuf lanb cinjcg, aKe^ l^inter jtc^
t)er »crbranntc unb gerftorte, bann aber burc^ bie ioeltbefannte, ftetS benfn?iirbige (Sind*
fc&crung bcr gropen ^auptjiabt 2J?o6fau feiteng ber ()elbenmiitigen, »crjTOeife(nben (Sin*
ioofiner gejtoungen iourbe, ben Oiiicf jug anjutreten, auf bem faft bie ganjc gro§e Slrmec »on
ber furd)terli^en .^dttc unb bie bur(^ bie 33er6bung beg Sanbeg »erurfad^tc ^ungev^not »ers
nid^tet ttturbe — fd^ien ba3 ©liicf i()n oerlaffen gu tjaben. 93on biefer 3eit an fo(gtc cine
9lieberlage nac^ ber anbcrn, »on benenbie gro^e 3Solferfc^ta(!^t bei Seipj^ig (18. Dft. 1813),
in n)el(^er ber ungliicflic^e Jlaifer ben vereinigten .^ecren ber 5|ireupen, Dilreid^er unb
SHuifen gegeniiber jianb, bie entfc^eibenbe tt)ar. 9laj)oteon iourbc in berfclben gdnjlic^
gefd)(agen unb bie pet)enbc Slrmee oon ben SSerbiinbeten unter ©liici^crg 5iif|tung vei^'
folgt. 9la^ ber ©inna^me won ^arig feiteng ber Sldiirtcn am 31. SKdrj^ 18 14 crfolgtc
bann bie burci^ ben @enat ergtwungene Slbbanfung bes Caiferg unb bef[eu 93erbannung
nad) ber Snfel @lba,tton wo cr jeboci^ f^on anfang^ aKdrj beg ^aljxtS 18 15 guriicffef)rtc.
@ein btopeg (Srfd^einen njar geniigenb, bag frangofifd^e SSolf aufg neuc fiir i:^H ju begeijlern.
liberatl lourbe cr mit Subcl begriif t, fein 25orbringen iwar unti>iberftel)lic^, bie Slrmee ging
freubig ju i:^m iiber, unb fci^oti am 14. SWdrg n,>ar bcr Conig Subiwig XVIII. gejwungen,
ben iiingft Bejiiegeuen Xfjron ju werlaffen unb ft(^ bur(| bie glu^t ing 9lug(anb' gu
retten. — 9lavo(eong gtt)eitc Olegierung tuar inbejfen nur won furjcr t)amx (100 2!agc).
iDcr tangerfc^nte^^ticbc fonntc nur burc^ fcinen Untcrgang l^crbcigefu^rt hjerben, wegtjalb
bie ®ro^md(^te Djlrcici^, Olu^lanb, ^reu^en unb (Snglanb am 25. ajJdrg cinen Sllli*
anjwertrag abfc^(of|en, burc^ ben ile fi0 werbanben, Sflapotcon gcmeinfc^aftlic^ gu be;
(dmpfen unb ber »^errfd^aft begfetben auf immer cin (Snbc gu mad|en. il)ieg gelang i^ncn
avL^ balb, bcnn am 18. 3uni 18 15 njurben bie nod^ iibrigen, fd^nell won Olapolcon
gufammengcrafften a^ i^ bin. 17, (&i}t, adv. 18, to think about a thing, ubcv ttwae
nad^'benfen, read S. 87, N. 6; in — success, im ©lurf^faUc; in — fortune, im
Ungh"icf6fallc. 19, au^' jeic^ncn. 20, ^anbtunggnjcifc. ^11 bis happiness,
fein ganj^eg ©lucf ; all our family, unfcre ganjc ^amilic. 21, SScr^altunggs
befet}l, m., directions for conduct ; to, an. 22, This is not worth remem-
bering, bieg ifi nic^t ber SSeaci^tung n?ert. 23, ntelben. 24, Say literally
* these have no haste*. 25, His — business, (Seine Slrbeit^haft. 26, unb
erweitert unferc bigt)crigen 93or|lennngen von ben im 9J?en[(^en ico{)nenben ^rdften.
27, big auf. 28, Dvanien. Commence this period with : * From Ulysses '.
29, bo(^ feinm, ber aud^ nuv ein jct)utet won ben Xtjatcn biefeg SWanne^ tJoUbva^t tjdttc
(App. § 33).
Section 158.
THE WARLIKE CHARACTER OP THE GERMANS.
The Germans fight as a nation. Whatever^ their birth ^ or (S. lo,
N. 9) profession, all are trained ' soldiers. The natjon is the army ; the
army is the nation. Hence * they cannot be moved save at the bidding
of some grand principle, and the stirring ^ of some soul-penetrating^ ^^^
elevating sentiment; and yet they are as sensible' as any nation that
they abandon comfort ^ domestic ease, monetary independence, every-
thing*^ which (S. 3, N. 7) men (=man) love and live for, in^° order to
identify the nation and the army. But they are willing to pay the price.
They count ^^ hardihood of body and trained"^ courage of heart the
noblest riches of a nation. They reckon " that national independence
and national greatness are a thousand times more precious than gold
and silver, and ^^ that to die on the field of battle is better and happier
than to rot ^* and crumble away in sybaritic ease. They ^'^ hold, too,
that " the cause of liberty, and the free noble spirit engendered by the
brotherhood of a nationality which affirms its oneness by noble acts ", is
blessed by God, and that He will give " victory to the armies who go
forth to battle in (S. 3, N. 2) trust in " His name. No wonder "° they
fight and triumph ^^ — Admiral Garbett.
1, Supply the verb 'be'. 2, = station, (Stanb, m. 3, = practised.
4, Say * Hence they can be moved (erve^cn) only at (buid^) the bidding (®ebot,n.) '.
5, ©wecfung, f. 6, bie ®ee(c evgreifcnb. 7, * to be sensible *, here jic^
bcniupt fein. 8, here bie 9lnnct)mlid)feitcn be« ?cben«. 9, Say ' in short
give up everything ', for the verb 'abandon ' must be placed at the end of this
clause. 10, Say * in order to prove the identity of the nation and the
army'. 11, tjalten (fuv). 12, here gefldtjU. 13, Say ' and feel
that it is better and nobler to die ', etc. 14, tjerntobern ; to crumble away,
vcrfaflen ; * ease ', here ©emdc^lic^feit. 15, 9lui^ ^alteu fic bafur. 16, Con-
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 58. II3
strue thus : ' that God will bless the cause C^ci^t, f.) of liberty ', and use the
attributive constr. for the transl. of * and the — nationality '. Any other
constr. would be much too clumsy. 17, = deeds. 18, to give victory,
ben ©ieg »erlcif)en; to go forth to battle, in bie tlirf) belangen.
4, to settle a matter amicably, eine @ad)e auf giittid)e 2Beife orbnen. Comp. S. 30,
N. 4, and note that the Present Participle ' being ' is understood at the com-
mencement of this period. 5, = whereupon. 6, = emphatically,
nad}briicf li(i). 7, Say ' may God alter thy mind (©ejtnnmtg, f.) '. 8, to
be subdued, ft^ Befiegt tu^(en; by, buvc^. 9, 'that — wrong' may be briefly
turned by ' of his wrong '. 10, to send for a person, ciiten ju fid) rufeu faffeit.
11, ' and — asked '. This passage, literally translated, would be inelegant in
German, say : ' humbly begged his pardon, and asked then '. Abuse, ^eteibi*
Qung, f. 12, »on Slatur. 13, = passionate. 14, = that it was
sinful, etc.; to indulge one's temper, feinem 3orn freien Sauf lafen. 15, =that
I could (App. § 33) conquer my anger through mastering my voice (bur(^
^e^ervfc^utig tneiuer ©timme). 16, We make it a rule never to let our
voices rise beyond a certain key, itjir ma^en eg un^ gut Oteget, unferc (Stimmen uic
uber eine geluiffe Xcnftdvfe ^inaug p erfjekn. 17, = with God's help. 18, = my
natural inclination to (ju) anger (S. 3, N. 2).
Section 160.
OPINIONS^ AS TO ENGIiISH EDUCATION".
I.
This'^ energy of individual life and example acting throughout society
constitute ^ the best practical education of Englishmen. Schools, aca-
VOL. IV. I
114 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION l6o.
demies, and colleges* give but the' merest beginning of culture in com-
parison with it (S. 4, N. 5). Far higher" and more practical is'' the life-
education daily given in our homes, in" the streets, behind (S. 3, N. 2)
counters^ in workshops, at the loom and behind the plough, in counting-
houses and manufactories, and ^° in all the busy haunts of men. This
is the education that " fits Englishmen for doing the work and acting
the part of free men. This ^^ is that final instruction as members of
society, which Schiller designated " the education of the human race,"
consisting" in action, conduct", self-culture, self-control — alH^ that
tends to discipline a man truly, and fit him for the proper performance
of the duties of life — a kind ^education not to be learnt (S. 7, N. 3 ^)
from (au§) books. Lord Bacon observes that ^^ " Studies teach not
their own use, but that there is (S. 82, N. 7) a wisdom without them
and above them, won (S. 7, N. 3 B, and S. 2, N. i) by (burc^) observa-
tion, a remark that holds" true of^^ actual life, as well as of^' the culti-
vation of the intellect itself. For all observation serves'^*' to illustrate
and enforce the lesson, that a man perfects himself by work much more
than by reading 21, — //lal^ it is Hfe'^^ rather than Hterature2\ action 2*
rather than study, and character ^'^ rather than biography ^% which ^^ tend
perpetually to renovate mankind.
1, Slnftc^ten uUx. 2, This — society. A good German rendering of
the thought underlying this line is so difficult, that the author thinks it best
to give at once his own translation, which he hopes will find acceptance:
S)icfe im nte^r fclbftdubigen ScBen [id) cntlt)icfe(nbe (Anergic unb ba^ babur^ gegcbcue, auf
bic ganjc ©efcKfc^aft ivirfenbe ^eifpiel. 3, au^'mac^en. 4, = universities ;
* to give ', here geirdtjreu. 5, = a mere. 6, = more important. 7, is —
homes, i|l bic im taglidjcn £et)cn gcu^onnenc @rjiel)ung ju -^aufe. 8, auf. 9, Use
this noun in the Sing. 10, unb in ben widen anbcrn ©efc^dft^ftdtten bet SWen*
fc^en. 11, Say ' that enables Englishmen as free men to do their work and their
duty *. 12, This — designated = This education gives also to human society
that instruction (Untertreifung, f.), which Schiller calls, etc. 3o(>ann (Sf)viftc)jf|
§ricbri(^toon@(6iller, geboven am 10. ^0^. 1759 j» SWavbac^, gcftovben am 9. 2Kai
1805 ju ilBeimar, i]\ nad^jl (5ictf|c ((Sic^e S. no, N. i) unftrcitig bic bcbeutcnbflc (Srs
fd)eiuung in ber beutfc^en Sitteratur. 5115 2) ic^ tcr gcic^nctc cr ftc^ fon?o!^l buvd^ feine ibcale,
fnbieftitfe (Hic^tung, mt and) burc^ I)inrei§enben ^d^unmg ed^t voctifd)er ©egeiilerung
aui, m{d)t im !Dvama i()rcn ^6t)e)?unft cvreic^tc. 9lber anci^ aU ©efc^ic^tfci^reiber unb a\6
V()i(cfopl)ifc^ec @(!^vift[leUcr i)at er jic^ bei fcincr Qfiation cinen unfievblic^cn Stamen
cin^cvbcn. 13, =and which consists in (S. 3, N. 2) action, etc. 14, in bcr
fittlic^en 9lnpf)rnng. 15, = and in all that (here follows the verb * consists ',
since this is the end of the relative clause introduced in Note 13), which (S. 3,
N. 7) educates (bilben) man truly (UH-i()v()aft) and fits (bcfdljigen) him for (^n) the
proper performance ( = fulfilment) of his duties in life. 16, = that * Studies
do not teach us the application of the same, but ', etc. 17, * to hold true ',
here = to prove true. 18, = in practical life. 19, of — itself, in 33e,^ng
auf bic ®eifie«bilbnng fetbfl. 20, «= interprets (evf Idvcn) and proves the
doctrine. 21, here fieftnre, f., with the art. 22, This conj. 'that*
is best omitted, since a repetition of subordinate clauses must, as far as pos-
sible, be avoided. 23, = practical life; 'rather than' seems here to be =
* and not *. 24, !I()dtigfcit, activity. 25, The English word * character *
is so varied in its application that it requires always the greatest discrimina-
tion to decide upon its translation, and in this case more than ever. After
careful consideration it is thought to be equivalent here to : * the personal
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6o. II5
dignity of a man'. 26, bie Sefcen^Bcfc&reihing be^fetben. 27, toc(^e baju
bienen, bie SWenfd^tjeit jictS »ou neuem ju fceleBeu.
Section 161.
OPINIONS AS TO ENGLISH EDUCATION.
II.
Goethe (S. 5, N. 2), in one of his conversations with Eckermann at
Weimar, once ^ observed : " It is very ^ strange, and I know not whether ^
it Hes in race, in climate, in * soil, or in their healthy ® education, but ^
certainly Englishmen seem to have a great advantage over most other
men. We see here in Weimar only a ' minimum of them, and ^ those,
probably, by no means the best specimens, and yet what splendid fellows
they are I And although they come here as seventeen-year-old ^ youths,
yet they by no means feel strange in this strange land ; on the contrary,
their entrance ^° and bearing ^^ in society is so confident ^^ and quiet,
that one would ^^ think they were everywhere the masters, and the whole
world belonged to them ^^"
" I should not like to affirm, for all that ^^," replied Eckermann ^^,
*'that the English gendemen in Weimar are cleverer, better educated,
and better hearted than our young men."
"That is not the point"," said Goethe; "their superiority does not
lie in such things ; neither ^^ does it lie in their birth and fortune ^^ ; it
lies precisely ^° in their having ^^ the courage to be what nature made
them. There ^^ is no halfness about ^^ them. They are conTplete^*
men. Sometimes complete fools also, that I heartily "^^ admit, but even
that is something, and has its weight."
Thus (App. § 14), in 2^ Goethe's eyes, the Englishmen fulfilled, to a
great extent, the injunction '^^ given by Lessing ^® to those who would
be men:
" Think wrongly, if you please, but think for yourselves ! " — S. Smiles,
" Self-Help."
1, = one day. 2, * Very ' is often rendered by the superlative of the
adv. I)oc^. 3, * whether it lies ' may be elegantly translated by omitting
the conjunction * whether ' and using the inversion. 4, im fieimatlii^en
Robert. 5, Ijeilfam. 6, Say ' but it seems to be certain that English-
men possess a great superiority over most other men '. 7, a minimum =
very few. 8, = and these (bie^) are probably by no means the best, and
yet (benno(^ aBer) they are (|tub e^) splendid fellows ! 9, a thirty-year-old
man, eiu breipigidfii'iget SWann. 10, Sluftreten, n. 11, S3ene:^men, n.
12, fid)cr. 13, Render * would ' by the Impf. Subj. of mcgen, since the
sentence is equivalent to 'that one would be inclined to think'. The
following verbs must be constructed according to App. §§ 29 and 30.
14. Supply ' alone ' after ' them '. 15, for all that, aBer boc|, to be placed
before *not'. 16, 3o:^ann ^Pcter ^cfevntann, geborcn 1792 gu SSinfen
in ber i)reuBif(^en «^rottinj <§anno»er, gejlorBen ben 3- ®ej. 1854 ju JiBeimar, war ttiete
Satjre a(g ©otfjeg $matfe!retdr tfjdtig unb ift ber ®e(t m. befannteften burc^ bic »on
if)m nacf) @ctl)eg Xobe »eroifentltc^ten ' ©efpvddje mit ©ot^e '. (Sr \mx mic^ ber
^erau0Cieber (editor) ijon @ott)eg' JJlad^gelajfenen 2Bev!en '. 17, (^a^e, f. 18, ou*
I 2
Il5 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6l,
bef!c^t fie ni(i^t in. 19, = wealth; Comp. S. lo, N. 9. 20, = simply.
21, The English Gerund preceded by a possessive adjective and a
preposition, must be translated by a regular subordinate clause with
a conjunction and a finite verb ; as —
His superiority lies in his having the (Seine Ubertegen^cit Bejle'^t bar in (S. 87,
courage to be what nature made N. 6), ba§ er ben 3Kut f)at, ba3 ju
him. fein, tt)a^ er won S^atur nwi ifl.
22, @^. 23, an. 24, = whole. 25, = willingly ; weight = value.
26, = according to the judgment of Gothe. 27, = advice ; by, tton ; to,
an; those = all such; who, bie ba. 28, ®ott^. @^t|raim fieffing, gcbcren ben
22. 3an. 1729 jn ^amen;^ (Dberlanji^), gcf^orben ben 15. gebr. 178 1 in Sraunfc{)i»eig,
l^at |id^ buvc^ feme dfl^e^ifc^sfritifd^en 2Bcvfe, tine auc^ burd) feine 2)ramen, beren 5orm,
@pra(i^e, a[Wett)obe unb Snftalt faft nnerieic^te ?Wiifter jtnb, einen unftciblic^en ^Kamen in
bet beutfc^en fiittevatnvgefc^i^te eilccrben. ®ein SBirfen a(g genialer ^vitifer, goifc^et
unb 3)ic^ter wax »on unevme^lid}em (Sinflu^ anf bie nad)j^e ©ntwideiung uuferet IHttes
tatur, bie mit i^m unb burc^ i^n i^ret ©lang^ctiobe entgegenfc^vitt.
Section 162.
A KOYAI, JUDGMENT.
A man and his wife named Lambrun had been many years in the
service of the unfortunate Queen Mary Stuart, and were sincerely attached
to her. The tragical death of that princess had such an effect on the
husband that he did not long survive her, and the ^ widow, Margaret
Lambrun, resolved to revenge, upon'^ Queen Elizabeth, the' death of
two persons so dear to her. She (S. 5, N. 2) therefore disguised*
herself in man's clothes, bought (S. 58, N. 8) a brace. ^ 0/ pistols, and
went^ to (S. 72, N. 4) London. Soon after, when the queen' appeared
in ^ public, Margaret endeavoured to " make her way through the crowd
in order to shoot her^°; but one of the pistols fell", and she was
immediately apprehended.
The^'^ queen, being informed of the circumstance", ordered" the
man to be brought before her, and said to him : " Well, Sir, who are
you ^° ? and why do you seek ^^ to kill me ? " — " Madam," replied Mar-
garet, " I am a woman ; I was a long time in the service of Queen
Mary Stuart, whom you put " to death unjustly ; her execution caused "
the death of my dear husband, who was sincerely attached to her ; and
my affection for both of them has excited '' me to revenge." — " And how do
you think I ought to deal ^^ with you I " asked Elizabeth. — " Do you speak
as a queen or as a judge ? " returned Margaret. — " As a queen." — " Then
you ought to pardon" me," was the answer. — "And what security^'
can you give me that you will not attempt ^"^ my life again ? " — " Madam,
a ^ pardon granted upon conditions ceases to be a favour '^\" — " Well
then," said the queen, " I pardon you, and trust to your gratitude for ^^
my safety." — P. Sadler.
1, = his. 2, an, with the Dat. of the def. art. The words * upon —
Elizabeth' must be placed before the supine. Comp. App. §1. S, We
lament the death of the two boys so dear to us, tvir bcunnnen ben 3^ob ber beiben
un« fo teuren ^\X9.U\u 4, to disguise oneself in man's clothes, fi^ al3 «Wann
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 162, I17
»erf(eibcn. 5, = a pair. 6, ftc^ BegeBen, insep. comp. str. v. refl. 7, Here
place the adverbs * soon after '. 8, offentlid). 9, to make one's way, jic^
eiueu SBeg Ba^nen. 10, to shoot a person, auf eiuen f^ie§en. 11, cutset
t§r. 12, Construe accord, to S. 55, N. i, and S. 4, N. 4, (man). 13. SSot#
faU, m. 14, tie^ fic ben 3Wann oov fic^ fu^ren. 15, Use the 2nd pers. pi.
(3^r) here and in the following passages, since that was the pronoun generally
used in addressing persons in olden times. 16, to seek to kill a person (or
to attempt a person's life), etncm m^ bcm SeBen trarf)ten. 17, to put a person
to death unjustly, einen xmgere(i)tevtt)eifc l^inric^ten taffen. 18, This caused
the death of our child, bie*? !ojiete unfercm ^inbc bag fieBctt. The insertion of
the adv. aud) after the verb ' caused ' would considerably improve the German
rendering. 19, to excite a person to revenge, einen gur Oia^e antreiBcn.
Use the Impf. 20, V)evfaT)ren. 21, Begnabigcn, v. tr. 22, ®uvgfd)aft, f.
23, a — conditions, eirtc BebingungSiveife SBegnabignng. 24, ©nabe, f. 25, Ijtn*
fiditlid^, followed by the Gen. The words * to (auf) your gratitude ' are best
placed at the end.
Section 163.
TACITUS.
I am glad to find ^, by your ( = thy) letter just received, that you are
reading Tacitus'^ with some relish. His style is rather quaint^ and
enigmatical, which (S. 3, N. 7) makes* it difficult to the student; but
then ° his pages ^ are filled with such admirable apothegms and maxims
of political wisdom, as "^ infer the deepest knowledge of human nature ;
and it is particularly necessary that any one intending to become a public
speaker should ^ be master of his works, as ^ there is neither an ancient
nor a modern author who affords such a selection of admirable quo-
tations. You should exercise yourself frequently in^" trying to make
translations of the " passages which most strike ^^ you, trying ^^ to invest "
the sense of (S. 25, N. 5) Tacitus in as good English as you can. This
will answer ^^ the double purpose of making yourself famihar with the
Latin author, and giving you the command of^^ your own language,
which no person will ever have " who ^^ does not study composition in
early life. — Sir Walter Scott, " Letters to his Son."
1, here evfefjen ; by, au6. 2, Use the def. art. accord, to S. 25, N. 5.
3, = unusual and unclear (bunfel). 4, to make difficult, evfc^ Uneven ; student =
pupil. 5, = on the other hand, anberevfeit^. 6, = writings, (Sci^riften ;
filled with such, fo »oU Won. 7, as infer = that they prove. 8, Say
* should thoroughly (gviinbli(^) know his works '. 9, Say * as there is (S. 82,
N. 7) no classical nor (nod^) modern author (©(^viftj^eKer) '. 10, in trying =
in the attempt, in bem SBerfud^c. 11, = such. 12, This passage struck
me most, biefe (SteHe ntac^te am weiften (SinbrucE auf ntid^. _ 13, trying = and
try. 14, irie'bevgeBen, sep. comp. str. v. tr. 15, This does not answer
my purpose, bie^ entfpri(^t nteinem 3tt)ec!e ntd)t. 16, uBer. 17, = obtain.
18, ioelc^ev {i^ nic^t fc^on in ber Sugenb in f^vifttic^en 5luffdtjen uBt.
Section 164.
HUMILITY,
T believe the first ^ test of a truly great man is his humility. I do not
mean by^ humility, doubt of his own power, or hesitation* in speaking °
Il8 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION ,164.
his opinions, but a right understanding of the relation between " what
he can do and say, and ^ the rest of the world's sayings and doings.
All great men not only know ^ their business ', but usually know ^° that "
they know it ; they are not only right in their main opinions ^"^j but they
usually know that they are right in them (S. 4, N. 5, B) ; only they
do not think much of themselves on " that account. Arnolfo ^* knows
he can build a good " dome at Florence ; Albert ^® Durer writes calmly "
to one who had found fault with his work : " It cannot be better done ; "
Sir Isaac Newton knows that he has worked ^' out a problem or two
that would have puzzled anybody ^' else : — only they do not expect their ^^
fellow-men therefore to fall down and worship them ; they ^^ have a curious
under-sense of powerlessness, feeling (S. 30, N. 4) that the greatness is''^
not in them, but through them ; that they could (App. § 33) not do or
be anything else than^^ what God made them. They see something
divine and God-made ^* in every other man, and are endlessly, nay '^^ in-
credibly merciful ^^. — Anonymous.
1, = best ; test, ^Prufjlein, m. 2, uutcr, which place at the head of the
period ; mean = understand. 3, an, with the Dat. 4, here Unentf(^loiTen-
fieit. 5, auS'fpi^ccfien. 6, »cu. 7, = and of that which the remaining
world can say and do. 8, = understand. 9, @ad)e, f. 10, tritfen,
after which insert the adv. aud^. 11, that they understand the same (to
agree with @ad^e). 12, ^au^tanfid^ten. 13, on that account, bcgtrcgcn,
which place after the Subj. ; to think much of oneself, einc gro^c 9)?ciming tteii
jic^ f)aben. 14, Slrnolfo bi Sambio, berut^mter SSaumcijler imb 58ilbf|auer ju
Slorcnj (i 232-1 300), fcaute ben !3)om St. Maria del fiore gn Slorenj imb bag Xabev-
naM JU (2t. ^>aolo in 9?om. 15, = stately. 16, SUbrcc^t 2)iirer, geboren
ben 20. 3Wai 147 1 ju ^lurnberg, gejiovben ben 6. Sl^nl 1528 ebenbafelbjl, ntu^ ju ben
^eworragenbj^en nub ttielfeitigften Mnfttern ge,^af|lt irerben, bie \t gelebt. (Sr war nic^t
a((ein au^ge^ei^neter ajialev, [onbern au^ jngleid^ ^upferfied^er (engraver on copper),
i^ormfc^neibcr (moulder), a3ilb^auer (sculptor), Slr^iteft unb (Sc^riftfieHer (author)
uber bie ^unfl. ©v h?ar ber (Svfinber ber ^l^fnnji, erfanb bag SDHttcl, bie J&djfc^uittc
niit jivei ^arben ju bvucfen, unb ttevtjcnfommnete bie @d)vittgie^evei (type-foundry),
bennvon itjm fiammt bie 5ovm ber beutfd^en Settevn. 17, gelajfen; one,
jemanb. 18, to work out a problem or two, *|Jrobleme Icfen. 19, anybody
else, jeber anbere, as Norn. 20, = that their fellow-men therefore (bcgt)alb)
must (fcf(en) fall down before them and worship (an'beten) them. The auxiliary
fcHen must be placed last, accord, to App. § 18. . 21, they — powerlessness.
This clause cannot be rendered in a literal way, but may be expressed thus :
* they recognise that they are, after all, only powerless ' ; after all, only, bcd^
nut, which place after the Subj. 22, is not = manifests itself not (fid^
cffenbaren). 23, a(g ivo^n ®ctt jie eifd)affcn. 24, ©ottevfc^affeueg. 25, ja
fcgar. 26, = forbearing, nac^fid^tig.
Section 165.
RUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHMENT.
I.
In the cheerless regions of ^ Arkangel, of which the aborigines say :
"God made Russia, but the devil made Arkangel," there are- (S. 82,
N. 7) more than two hundred of those banished ones — men and women,
all young, all ( = and) poor, most ^ of them sent without trial, few ^
amongst them knowing even of what they are accused. Victor Ivano-
u^
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6^. iiy
vitch * dines with his friend B., for instance, and ^ after a stroll along ^ the
boulevards they separate, ^ii-^. is arrested that ^ very evening, and when
Victor, astonished and horror-stricken ^, hastens ^ to inquire the cause,
he finds everybody^", even B.'s. own father, as^^ much in the dark as he
zs fmnself; all questions and petitions on^^ the subject receive ^^ vague
administrative answers; all friends and relatives are sj^tematically dis-
couraged and silenced ; eagerly they wait for " the numerous political
trials that^^ com'e~on"without intermission, hoping" to see the missing
one's (S. 67, N. 3) name on ^^ the list of criminalifor to see ^*^ his face once
more, let ^^ it be even in ^° the prisoner's doctej, put as ^^ they wait and ^^
watch, the prisoner ^^ is, without any trial, erTroute for Arkangel.
Arrived 2* there, the routine (App. § 15) is the same for all; whatever ^^
the crime alleged, the age or sex, the ^^ prisoner is taken to the police-
ward, — a 2^ dreary log-building, containing two sections, one for men, the
other for women. The solitary table and chair in the room, the four
walls, and even the ceiling, are covered ^^ with the names of ^^ youthful
predecessors, whose pencilled ^° jests and clever caricatures bear ^^ wit-
ness to the strength of confidence in themselves with which they began^^
their life in exile.
1, beg ©ou^evnententg Slrc^^aiiget. 2, most of them, nteijieng ; sent = sent
there ; without trial = without any trial, c§ne jegtic^eg a3ert)or. 3, Say liter.
' of whom even but (nur) few know '. 4, Here follows * for instance ' ;
witlr=in company of. 5, Say 'iinfe trennt ft^ »on i^m na^', etc. 6, auf.
7, no(^ an bemfelkn Slbenb. 8, aufg ^o^fte evf(^rc(fcu. 9, to hasten
to inquire the cause, |x(i^ eiligfl nac^ ber Uvfa^e ethmbiQen. 10, everybody =
that all. 11, Supply ' are ' (ftc^ befinben) before * as '. 12, iifcer bie @acl;c.
13, receive — answers = are vaguely (in mibejlimtnter StBeife, which place after
government) answered by (S. 106, N. 23) the government. 14, auf.
15, = that follow one another (auf eiuanbev folgcn). 16, = in the hope.
17, in. 18, ju fc^auen (App. § i) ; face, Slngeftd^t, n. 19, let it be =
be it even. 20, in — dock, »or ben (Sd)raufen beg @eri^t3. 21, = whilst.
22, and watch = and attentively watch (beivaci^en) everything. 23, Insert
the adv. fc^on after the subject ; en route for = on the way to. 24, 2)ovt
angc fommen ; ' routine ', here = treatment ; the words * the same ' are to be
placed at the end of the clause. 25, whatever — sex, ireld^eg a>erBvec^en3
ber ©efangeue auc^ angeHagt unb i»etd)e3 Slttevg unb @efc^led)tg er auc^ fei. 26, the —
ward =- yet (fo . . . bo(^) he is always taken ( = conducted) to (in) the police-
ward (^oUjeiluaci^e, f.). 27, a — women = that consists of { The new comer gazes on them as one in
a dream ; some are melancholy, and almost mad, others nervously
irritable, and the remainder have evidently tried to find solace in^^ drinjL/ . ^
They live (S. 1 16, N. 17) in " communities of twos and threes, have food, ■
a scanty provision of clothes, money ^°, and books in common, and con-
sider^" it their sacred duty to help each other in every emergency,
without ^^2 distinction of (S. 3, N. 2, and S. 10, N. 9) sex, rank, or age.
The noble by ^^ birth get sixteen shillings ^^ a month from Government
for their maintenance, and^^ commoners only ten, although many of
them are married, and ^^ sent into exile with young families ^\ J
1, Say 'Hereupon one demands (yevtangen) of him the soIen>n promise*.
2, not of any kind, feinevlei, adj. (indeclinable). 3, or try = and not try.^
The auxiliary verb of mood ' , with which begin the clause, and construe accord, to S. 4, N. 4
(man). 7, but — warned, aber juglei^ fiinbtgt man ifjm an. 8, that —
escape. This passage requires an altogether different construction in German ;
say ' they (ntan) would upon (bei) an attempt, to go beyond (ubevfcf)veiten, insep.
comp. str. V. tr.) the limits of the town, not allow him to escape, but rather
(t>ielmef)r) shoot him down like a dog (liter.— but him rather like a dog shoot
down, nie'bevfi^ie^en). 9. Say * should he however be caught (ein'faugen) alive,
(fo) they (man) would send him without further formality (^ovmalitdt, f.), upon
the simple order of the Ispravnik to the East of Siberia. 10, and —
realising = and well knowing (pres. p.). 11, to bid farewell, Sebeirofil
fagen. 12, materienc ^equemlid}feiten (Nom. pi.), which use with the def.
art. in the Dat. pi. 13, = former. 14, to walk out into the street,
in bie ©trape fjinan^'fc^reiten. 15, = outside. 16, Supply the pron.
* these ' before the verb take (fii^ren, i. e. lead) ; to = into. 17, to demand
news from home, cinen narf| 0lad^rid)ten au6 ber ^eimat fvac|en, 18, in drink,
tm S^rnnfc. 19, in — threes, je ^\m ober bret gufammen. 20, Supply
*as also* before 'money'; in comtnon, gemeinf^aftli^. 21, My parents
consider it their duty to help their neighbours in every emergency, meine
(Sltevn tjalten eg fiir tf)re ^flid^t, i()ven S^tac^barn in jeber 9fiot unb ©efafjr beijuftet)en.
22, Insert ' unb gtvav ' before ' without ', which will improve the rendering
very much. 23, ijon. 24, i sh. = i SWarf; a month, ntonatlid;, jeben
9JJonat, or af(c 9J?onate. 25, bod) bie ©iivgerli(f>en ; repeat ' SD^arf after 'ten'.
26, and sent = and are being sent (see S. 2, N. i), 27, = children.
'^X B R A R y"
O-P TSK
122 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l68.
f^ Section 168.
KUSSIAN POLITICAL PRISONERS IN BANISHIVLENT.
..^^^' .>A^W.^v^ IV. ^ ^
Daily a gendarme vijyts ' their lodgings, inspects * the premises when ^
and how he pleases^, ahd now * and then makes some mysterious entry ■■
in his note boold \ ^Should ^ any of their number carry a \^arm dmngfT'a
pair of newly-menddd boots, or a change of linen to some passing exile
lodged for the moment in the police-ward, it is just as l ikek as not
marked against him as a crime. It is a crime to ^ come and see a friend
off, or accompany"^ him a little on the way. In^ fact, should the Is-_i
pravnik feeP out of sorts — ttje^ effegfo of cards.*" and drink — he** vents n ^
^i?*^ his bad temper on the exile^lnd as*^ cards and drink are the only-^^
amusements in these dreary regions, crimes^' are often marked down
against the exiles in astonishing numbers, and " a report of them sent
^to the Governor of the provin ger^
V^AviWinter lasts eight months, a ^'^ period during which the surrounding ^^
, ^.v*^ country presents the appearance of a noiseless *^, lifeless, frozen marsh.
f'"^ No roads, no communication with the outer world, no means of ^® escape.
.* In course of time almost every exile is attacked*^ by nervous convul-
^-^^H(\^ sions, soon ^° followed by prolonged apathy and complete prostration.
Some of them contrive ^* to forge passports, and by a miracle, as ^ it
were, make their escape ; but the great majority of these victims of the
Third Section ^' either go mad, commit suicide, or die of ^* delirium
tremens. — James Allen.
1, visits = comes into. 2, = who inspects (unterfu'd^en) the houi-e.
3, Do as you please, t^un ©ie, Une eg %\)\\t\\ belicbt. 4, now and then, banii unb
n^ann, or »on 3eit ju 3eit, after which insert the adverbs aii(^ tvo()l; some = a;
to make an entry in a book, cine ©emcvfimg in ein 93uc^ eiutravjeii. 5, Arrange
this period in the following manner: * Should one of them to a for the moment
in the police-ward lodged (untevgcbradjt) and passing (buvc^reifenb) exile ever (j[e)
a warm dinner, a pair of ncwly-soled boots, or some clean linen (QBdfc^c, f.)
bring, then (fo) is (Passive) to him this very (S. i6i, N. 2) likely as a crime
ascribed {\\\x '^aft c^efcf^ricben). 6, He came and saw his friend off, er facjtc
fciiiem ahdfenbcu ^reiiiibc Sebnref)!. 7, Will you accompany me a little on
my way ? aBollen @ie niic^ auf mciuem 2Bev^c cine fleinc ©tvecfc begleitcn ? 8, = In
short, Jtur^. 9, to feel out of sorts, ubier ?aune fcin. Insert the adv. cinmal
after the subject. 10, = card-playing ; see S. 3, N. 2, and S 10, N. 9.
11, he — exiles, fo ntujTen \\)\\\ bic a^erbannten bafiir bii§en. 12, The adverbidl
circumstance of place * in — regions * is best placed immediately after the conj.
13, crimes — numbers = an astonishing number of crimes is often ascribed to
the exiles. Read App. § 5. 14, and — sent to = and reported (melben)
to. 15, a — which ^ during which time. 16, = whole. 17, See
S. 71, N. 2, which rule applies likewise to adjectives; 'frozen', here ju Qid
frftrtvrt. 18, ju, contracted with the art. 19, * to be attacked ', here
l^cimcjcfuc^t ivcvbcn. 20, = upon which soon follows a state (3iiilaub, m.) of
prolonged (baucrnb) apathy ((Stimivfitnn, m.) and complete (gdnjlic^) prostration
(.^>infdlligfcit bcr Sebcndfrdftc). 21, He contrived to forge a passport, eg i\\%i ungefdf)r 9200 (Sim\)oI)ner, tuelrf^e feit 18 13
buvd) engtifc^e 2)fiiTiondre jum 6f)i-i|lentum "befe^rt ftub. 2)ie ®ibel ift in bie @pva(^e
ber (^ingebovnen uberfe^t, unb au^ in ben ^ivc&en unb ©c^nten ivirb in ber Sanbe6fprad)e
geprebigt unb gele^rt. 2, = At the break of day (®eim !Iagegant)ruc^) we saw
Tahiti. 3, = appear, erfc^einen. The words ' to — Sea ' must be placed
after the rel. pron., and are followed by ' for ever ' (jiet^). 4, = view.
5, Use the active Voice of the verb with ' man ', which should commence the
clause. 6, Mower', here niebviger Betegen. 7, rolled past, an una
tioruberjogen. 8, Supply ' to us ' after ' themselves '. 9, itJufi. 10, =in
the middle. 11, in ber ^ud)t »on 3J?atatiai. 12, = we found ourselves
surrounded by (tton) canoes (93aumfa^n, m.). 13, g^reuben. 14, Say
' which the first sight of a fine country always produces (f)er»oi'rufen) within
us '. 15, = These conducted us. 16, be^ S^ejirBmiiTicndr^. 17, He
will meet me on the road, er tinvb mir ^atfcu>egg entge'genfommen. 18, to give
' a person a very fine reception, einen ^oc^jt freunblic^ beiviKfommnen. 19, vevi
124 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION l6g.
tocUen; construe this clause accord, to S. 55, N. i. 20, Inf. cinen ©v^ajiers
gvin^ mac^en. 21, =-from which we returned in the evening (abcnbd).
22," 2)er fu(turfaf)ige 2!eil bcr Snfel. 23, is — soil = consists nearly every-
where only of (ane) a narrow strip of low (nicbrig belegen) alluvial land (use the
Gen. without the art.). 24, round the base, ringg f)crum am %u^t. 25, Say
*and is protected*; from, »or. 26, there is = finds itsilf (ft(^ kfinben) ;
an expanse of water, cine au^gebc^ntc SBafCerpddic ; ' smooth *, here fajl fpiegelgtatt.
27, The literal rendering of this passage would not read well, say * which (to
agree with SBa|fcrjidrf>e) affords (App. § 5) perfect (vcKig) safety to the canoes of
the natives *. 28, = in which. 29, = which reaches down (^iium'tcrs
reicf)en) to (Ui ju) the beach consisting of coral-sand. — Use the attributive
const., S. 48, N. 6. 30, * covered ', here betrad^fen ; by, tnit. 31, bcr
gtinfrf^cn ben $!ro))en bctegencn ©egenben. 32, See S. 71, N. 2. 33, to
clear a spot (of trees, etc.), eine @te((e urbar ma^cn. 34, Sparngtourjcin*
35, bauen.
Section 170.
TAHITI.
II.
Even the brush-wood is * an imported fi uit-tree, namely ^ the guava *,
which grows in abundance here. In Brazil I have often admired the
varied^ beauty of the bananas (S. 71, N. 2), palms, and orange-trees
contrasted* together; and here we also have the bread-fruit^, con-
spicuous® from its large, glossy, and deeply digitated leaves. It is
admirable '^ to behold groves of a tree, sending ^ forth its branches with
the vigour of an English oak, loaded* with large and most nutritious
fruit ^°.
However ^^ seldom the usefulness of an object can account for the
pleasure of beholding it, in the case of these beautiful woods, the know-
ledge of their high productiveness, no doubt, enters largely into the feel-
ing of admiration. The '^'^ little winding paths, cool from the surrounding
shade, led to the scattered" houses, the owners of which everywhere
gave ^* us a cheerful ^^ and most hospitable reception.
V^ was pleased with nothing so much as with the inhabitants. There"
is a mildness in the expression of their countenances which at once
banishes the idea of^^ a savage, and an intelligence^* which shows that
they are ^° advancing in civilisation. The common people, when working,
keep "^^ the upper part of their bodies quite naked ; and " it is then that
the Tahitians are seen to advantage. They are very tall, broad-shouldered,
athletic, and well proportioned. It (S. 4, N. 4, man) has been remarked
that*^ it requires little habit to make a dark skin more pleasing and
natural to the eye of a European than his own colour.
1, = consists of. 2, ber ©uiavabaum, bcjfcii j.iomcranjenartigc (orange-like)
8:ruc^te in Sucfcr cingcniad^t cber auc^ '\\\ ©elce wciwanbelt verfvuibt tverbcn. 3, mans
jiigfv^ltig. 4, Say * which form such a great contrast *. 5, !i8rotbanui, m.
e, conspicuous, u^eld^cr . . . foglci^ anffaKt, i. e. strikes the eye ; from, bnvd^ ; its
deeply digitated leaves, fcine ticf eingcf(l)nittcncn, fingcvfovmigcn Splatter.
7, = splendid ; groves of a tree = a forest of trees. 8, = spreading out
their, etc. 9, = and are at the same time (babel) loaded. 10, Use
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 170. 135
this noun in the pi. 11, Arrange this period thus : ' Although the usefulness
of an object perhaps only seldom explains to us the pleasure, which we
experience at the sight of the same, yet (fo . . . bod)) our admiration at the
sight of these splendid groves (SBcilber) is no doubt considerably influenced by
( = through) our knowledge of (»on) their great fertility. 12, The — shade =
The narrow, winding (fi(^ f^Idngehib), shady and cool foot-paths. 13, gevs
fireut tiegenb. 14, gett)d^ren. 15, freimblic^, but here h?ot)Ilvonenb, in
order to avoid a repetition of the same term, since 'hospitable* must be turned
by gaftfreunbtid^ ; reception, 5lufnat)me, f. 16, Say ' Nothing gave (maiden) ■
me greater joy than just (gerabe) the inhabitants*. 17, Say ' The expression
of their faces (3f)r ®efid)tgaugbnicE) bears a mildness (©anftmut, f.), which ', etc.
18, = of savages. 19, SnteUigeuj, f. 20, are advancing - make progress.
21, =they have. It is a matter of course that the conj. *when* must
commence the period. 22, = and just then one sees the Tahitians (bte
S^aljitianer) to advantage ( = in the best light). 23, =that afters short
time a dark skin appears to the eye of a European more pleasing and more
natural than his own.
Section 111,
TAHITI.
III.
A white man bathing (S. 16, N. 4) by the side of a Tahitian was*
like a plant bleached (S. 7, N. 3, attrib.)by the gardener's art compared^
with a fine dark-green one growing vigorously ^ in the field. Most of
the men are tatooed, and the ornaments follow the curvature * of the
body so ^ gracefully, that they ^ have a very elegant effect. The most
common pattern, varying ^ in its details, is sbmewhat like ^^ the crown of
a palm-tree. It springs ^ from the central line of the back, and grace-
fully curls ^ round both sides. The simile may ^^ be a fanciful one, but
I" thought the body of a man thus ornamented ^^ was (App.^§ 29
rd 30) like ^^ the trunk of a noble tree embraced ^* by a delicate creeper.
Many of the elder'people '° had their feet covered with small figures,
So^^ placed as to resemble a sock. This fashion, however, is partly
gone^^ by, and has been succeeded ^^ by others. Here^^, although
fashion is far from immutable, every one must abide "^^ by that prevailing
at his youth. An old rtian has thus ^^ his age for ever stamped on his
body, and he cannot assume ^^ the airs of a young dandy. ^ The women
are tatooed in the same manner as the men, and^' very commonly on
their fingers. J
In^* returning to the boat, we witnessed^® a very pretty scene.
Numbers ^^ of children were playing on the beach, and had lighted
bonfires, which illuminated the placid sea and^^ surrounding trees;
others, in^^ circles, were singing Tahitian verses. We seated ourselves
on the sand, and "^^ joined their party. The songs were impromptu •'"',
and^^ I beUeve related to our arrival. One little girl sang a line^^j^^
which ^^ the rest took up in parts, forming ^* a very pretty chorus. TKe
whole scene made ^^ us unequivocally aware that ^^ we were seated on
the shore of an island in the far-famed South Sea. — Charles Darwin.
126 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 7 1.
1, = appeared. 2, = in (contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.)
comparison. 3, = in full vigour (.Kraft, f.). 4, .RlutDatur, f. 5, auf
einc fo anmutige SQBeife. 6, they have a = they are of. 7, varying —
details = the single parts of which often differ (ab'ircid)cn) from each other.
8, springs from, get)t . . . au3 ; from — back, ttom Stiirfgrat (spine). 9, to curl
round, fi^ um . . . I^erum'winbcn. 10, may — one = is perhaps fanciful (ptian?
tajlif^). 11, i^ ba(i)te bei mir felbj^. 12, Use the attribut. const.
13, n){e. 14, = which is embraced (uttif(!^(tn'gcn, insep. comp. str. v.) by
(S. 106, N. 23) a delicate (jart) creeper (@c^Unc\v^anje, f.). 15, =men.
16, = which were so arranged that they resembled (gleid^cn, to be like, str. v.
governing the Dat.) a sock. 17, = antiquated, veraltct. 18, verbrangt,
i. e. displaced. 19, Say * Although fashion here is far from (treit ta'ncxi
cntfevnt) being (S. i, N. 5) immutable. 20, to abide by a thing, bei cttt»a6
»cvbleiben. Use the attributive constr. in this clause. 21, 2luf biefe 2Bcifc,
which place at the head of the period. * Old ', here Beja^rt ; ' to stamp ', here
aug'prdgen. 22, to assume the airs of a dandy, ben @lu^ev fpiden.
Render* not' by 'not possibly', untnogtid^. 23, =but generally also.
24, = When we returned to the vessel. 25, Yesterday I witnessed a very
pretty scene, geftern bot ftc^ tnir ein fe^r t)ubfc^e8 Sc^aufpiet bar. 26, = Numerous
children. 27, unb bie in ber Sla^c ftctjenbcn ©dume. 28, = who formed
a circle (.Kreig, m.), sang verses in their mother-tongue (i. e. native language).
29, =and joined them (fid^ an'fcl^liepcn, sep. comp. str. v. refl., governing the
Dat.). 30, aug bem ©tegrcif. 31, =and related (jic!^ bejicfieu, insep. comp.
irreg. v. refl.), I believe (inverted), to (auf) our arrival. 32, the ' line' of
a verse is generally rendered by < (Stvo))t)c', f. 33, which — parts, h3elc6c
»cn ben iibrigen tttet)rjlimmtg aufgenommen tourbc. 34, = and formed.
35, made — aware, legte unjircifelfiafteg 3eugnig bawon ab. 36, = that we
found ourselves. 37, here »ielbefungeu, adj.
Section 172.
AUDUBON \ THE AMERICAN ORITETHOIjOGIST, RELATES
HOW NEARLY 2 A THOUSAND OF HIS ORIGINAL
DRAWINGS WERE DESTROYED.
I left the village ^Henderson, in Kentucky, situated^ on the banks
of the Ohio, where I * resided for several years, to proceed ^ to Phila-
delphia on business. I (S. 115, N. i) looked^ to my drawings before
my departure, placed them carefully in a wooden box, and gave ^ them
in charge of a relative, with ^ injunctions to see that no injury should
happen to them. My absence was of ( = lasted) several months ; and
when I returned, after » having enjoyed the pleasures of home for a few
days, I inquired ^° after my box, and " what I was pleased to call my
treasure. The box was produced ^^ and opened ; but ", reader, feel for
me — a pair 0/ Norway rats had taken possession of the whole, and
reared a young family among the gnawed " bits of paper, which, but '®
a month previous, had represented nearly a thousand inhabitants of"
the air ! The burning heat which ^^ instantly rushed through my brain
was too great without" affecting my whole nervous system. I slept
for (S. 166, N. 10) several nights, and the days passed like" days of
oblivion — until "^^ the animal powers being recalled into action, through
the strength of my constitution, I ^i took up my gun, my note-book and
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION lyz, 127
my pencils, and went forth to the woods as gaily as if nothing had
happened, l^"^ felt pleased that I might now make better drawings
than before ; and, ere a period not exceeding three years had elapsed,
my portfolio was again filled. — John Audubon.
1, So^tt Santeg ^lubuBon, ber 6evu()mtc amerifanifd^c Drnif^orogc (ober 95oge(#
funbige), geboven ben 4. ^ai 1780 in Souifiana, gefioifcen ben 27. Samiar 1851 ju
Sfle»jS)or!, befu^r bie @tr6me unb i^luffe beg 2Be|leng,um bie 3Scge( ju feeoba^ten unb ju
jei(^nen. 2, nearly a thousand, naf)e an taufenb. 3, Use the attributive
constr., and see S. 7. N. 3, and S. 48, N. 6. 4, =1 had resided for (feit).
5, veifen ; on business, in ®efd}dften. 6, to look to a thing, na^ etiva^ fet)en.
7, to give a thing in charge to a person, einem ttwa^ iibevge'bcn. 8, = with
the express command to protect (ben'»a{)ren) them from (ttor) any Qeber) injury.
9, =and had enjoyed. The pleasures of home, bie ?^reuben ber ^dngtict)!eit.
10, to inquire after a thing, nad) ettinig fragen. 11, = and after (nac^) my
treasure, as I was pleased to call its contents (h)ie i^ beffen 3uf|att gerne ju
bejet^nen pj!egte). 12, = brought. 13, = but have pity on (mit) me,
O reader ! 14, j^ernagt ; bits of paper, ^apierfe|en. 15, nod^ oor einem
SKonat. 16, ber Siifte, which is the poetic form. 17, = which instantly
took possession of my brain (®ct)irn, n.). To take possession of a thing, ft^
eiuer (ia^e bemdc^tigen. 18, urn ni^t aud^ ntein ganjeg 9flertten[^|iem ^u erfd)iittevn.
19, like — oblivion, im ganjUc^en 93ergeffen aKeg @efc!^e()enen. 20, =till my
vital powers (SeBenSfrdfte) were reanimated (tv)ieber angeregt tvaren, App. § 17)
through the strength of my constitution (S^latur, f.). 21, Say 'and I was
able (imftanbe fein) to take up (evgreifen) my gun (53uc^fe, f.), my sketch-book
and my pencils to (S. 19, N. 7) go therewith again as (fo) cheerfully into the
woods as if nothing had happened (at^ ob ni^t^ ttorgefaUen ivdre) '. 22, Say
* It gave me pleasure to think that I would now perhaps produce better
drawings than ever (|e) before; and even before (noc^ el)e) three years had
passed away, my portfolio was again filled with drawings.
Section 173.
THE BATTLE OFi KASSASSIW.
I.
Mahsamah, Monday, August 28, 1882.
At '^ seven this morning, guns were heard in the direction of Kassassin,
which is ^ four miles to our front. The troops were called * under arms,
the Cavalry, consisting of the Household Cavalry^ and 7th Dragoon
Guards, saddled up, and the Infantry fell ^ in in readiness to "^ march to
the assistance of the force there under General Graham. That officer,
however, sent a ^ message saying that the firing was in the enemy's camp,
and ^ was inexphcable, except upon the supposition that the Egyptians
were fighting ^° among themselves. -f Cy •'
At^^ eleven o'clock, however, the flags of the signallers at Kassassin
were in motion, and (S. 104, N. 19) the news came that the enemy
were approaching ^\ ■f>Jhe Cavalry again turned out ^^ and rode off" to
Kassassin. As the enemy approached. General Graham opened fire
with his two guns, and" the Egyptian artillery replied. The 19th
Hussars ^^ came on^® to the place from Mahuta, where General Willis
has his headquarters.
The enemy made no attack, but halted at " a considerable distance
128 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 73.
from the camp, and kept " up a continued shell-fire, but at a distance
altogether " out of range. Their conduct '® was, indeed, altogether
inexplicable. The Cavalry remained out all day, and the Infantry /lerg
were kept in readiness to march at ^° a moment's notice, but as the enemy
made ^^ no movement in advance, they were not called forward to the
front.
The heat was terrific "^"^ all day, the 2' sun beating down with almost
insupportable force upon the wide sand waste. It'^* had been hard
work for horses and men. No shade was obtainable ^^ and the hot
wind raised "^^ great dust storms, which penetrated everywhere and made
breathing difficult. The brigade of Guards (S. 36, N. 7, ^) fell in
under arms'^'* ready '^^ to march, but the Cavalry relumed and reported
that the enemy had fallen back ^°, after ^^ keeping the troops the whole
day out in the full force of the sun.
1, Bet. The very graphic account of the Battle of Kassassin given in
Sections 173-177 was written by the correspondent of the London ' Standard',
who was with the cavalry at Mahsamah. Kassassin (also called Kassassin Lock)
is four miles west from Mahsamah Station, which, only a few days previous to
this action, was captured from the Egyptians by General Drury Lowe. The
Egyptians had established a camp at that place, and, after the capture, the
Household Cavalry and the Dragoon Guards were stationed there, under the
command of General Drury Lowe, as a reserve to the small force that held
Kassassin Lock, an important fortified position occupied by General Graham.
The enemy, under the rebel-leader Arabi, held the strongly fortified camp of
Tel-el-Kebir, about twelve miles west from Kassassin. Arabi's stronghold
(Tel-el-Kebir) was stormed and captured by the English under their skilful
Commander-in-chief Sir Garnet Wolseley (now Lord Wolesley of Cairo), on
Wednesday, September 13, when the rebel-army was totally beaten, and the
Egyptian war brought to a successful issue. 2, Say * This (^ente) morning at
7 o'clock we (man) heard the thunder of cannons (conip. n.)', etc. 3, =is
situated ; to our front = before us. 4, to call under arms, \\\ ben SfBaffen rufen.
5, Nom. PI. ©arbefi'trajTiere ; the ist Dragoon Guards, ba3 erj^e !Dragoncr ©avbevegi;
went. 6, fell— readiness, |ie((te fidi in 9ieit) nnb ® (ieb. 7, urn ben bcrt untev ©enerat
®rat)am |lc^enben 3:ru^pen \\\ S^\x\\t jn eilen. 8, a — saying = a messenger with
the information (Oiac^rid^t, f.). 9, and — supposition, nnb ba§ man fi(f|
ba^felbe nuv bnrd) bie a^eimntnng evTfaven fonne. 10, The rebels fight among
themselves, bie (Sm^orer befampfen fi(^ nnter einanber. 11, = At 1 1 o'clock,
however, we (man) saw the flag-signals (S. 76, N. 22, A) at Kassassin.
12, ^eran'iurfen. Comp. 107, N. 13. 13, =got ready (fic^ fcrtig mac^en).
14, which was answered (einnebern) by the Egyptian artillery. 15, ^ufaren?
tccjiment, n. 16, on — place = here (t)id)ev). 17, at a = in. 18, to
keep up a continued shell-fire, cin ununtcrbrod)enc6 58ombarbcmcnt (pronounced as
in French) untei1)arten. 18, ivcldjc an^er bem 33evci(^c ber ©c^n§n.'>eite tag.
19, ^anblnncjSireife, f. ; indeed = really ; altogether, ganj. 20, at — notice =
any moment. 21, to make a movement in advance^ \?or'rnc!en. 22, = ex-
traordinary great. 23, = and the sun shone down, etc. ; * force ', here
©hit, f. 24, = Horses and men had had hard work (here einen fdnveven
@tanb (jaben). 25^ = to be found. 26, (StanbtrcU en anf treiben. 27, here
I)in'bringcn. 28, to fall in under arms, nnter SiUiffcn tieten. 29, =and
held itself ready to march (fi(i^ jnm 9lbmarfd) bereit tjaUen). 30, to fall back,
fid) i|iirn(fi\iet)en. See App. §§ 28 and 22. The auxiliary in this clause is best
omitted to avoid its repetition, the next sentence containing the same.
31, = after he (i.e. the enemy) had kept (jurnrt^alten, App. § 30) the troops
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 73, 129
the whole day at (bei) the great heat of the sun (comp. n. S. 76, N. 22 ; use n
as a connecting link, since fern, nouns ending in e in olden times used to take
ti as an inflection for the Gen., Dat., and Ace. Sing., as well as for the PI.) in
the field.
Section 174.
THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIIST.
II.
Ismailia^ Tuesday, August 29,
3 o'clock in the morning.
Scarcely had the Cavalry unsaddled, and^ horses and men begun to
eat, when the^ sound of artillery was heard (S. 4, N. 4, man) again at
Kassassin, and by* the heavy and continuous roar^ it was evident^ that
this time the attack was'^ in earnest.],/'' A gain the wearied men saddled
their no less weary horses and^ prepared to advance. The^ sun was still
beating down fiercely even at that late hour, and the hot withering ^° wind
was raising" the sand clouds so high that it was impossible to see what
was going ^2 on, but through the dust and haze numerous ^^ jets of smoke
from the guns were visible.
The cannonade increased^* in violence, and the Cavalry moved ^^ away
to the right, the '® Artillery following them, and pressed^'^ round towards
the flank of the enemy's Infantry. With^^ the movement of such masses
of men and horses the dust rose over the whole scene thicker than ever,
and it was impossible to obtain ^^ more than a general idea of what was
going on; while the sun set in^° a red glare over the sandy plain, v
The Cavalry pushed'^' still further to the right until^^ hidden from the
enemy by some low sand hills, and^^ then goaded their weary horses into
as fast a trot as the heavy sand and their weary condition would permit.
It was evident that it was the General's intention to repeat the tactics
of the previous fight, and that he meant 2* to get round the enemy's rear.
It was a striking proof of his confidence in'^^ his troops that (S. 66,
N. 15), with 2^ tired horses and night approaching, he should attempt this
manoeuvre against an enemy of unknown strength and with^'^ fresh horses.
Against any other enemy it would have been rash^^, but the result proved
that General Drury Lowe did not over-estimate the fighting powers ^^ of
his men.
1, Ismailia, then the head quarters of Sir Garnet Wolseley, is 2 1 miles east of
Kassassin, on the Suez Canal. In the morning, ntorgeng. 2, and = and
scarcely had; 'men*, here Oieiterj to begin to eat, mit bem (Sffen an'fangen.
3, the — artillery, 5lrti((criefalven. 4, = through, buvc^; heavy = loud.
5, ^anonenbotuier, m. 6, = clear. 7, = was meant in earnest (cruj^licf>,
adv.). See App § 17. 8, imb tiifleten jic^ junt SSorrucfeii. 9, Say
' Even at (ju) this late hour the sun sent down burning rays ', and insert
the adv. itoc| before * burning '. 10, werfengenb. 11, tveibcn. 12, to go
on, »or'get)en. 13, numerous — guns, ja()Ireic£|c au3 ben ^anoncu aufjieigenbc
Oiau(i>fau(en. 14, = became more and more violent (immcv with the compa-
rative form of the adj.). 15, to move away, ab'rciten ; to the right, nad^
ved}tg. 16, = whilst the A. followed them (i^r, to agree with ^avalleric in
the fem. Sing.) 17, * to press round ', here feitli^art^ ttor'briiigen ) towards,
VOL. IV. K
130 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 74.
fluf; *of — infantry' may be briefly expressed by * of the hostile Infantry*.
18, With — horses, 2)urd^ bic maffen^afte Xruvpenbeiregung. 19, * to obtain *,
here fic^ . . . mac^en ; of what was going on, won bcm ^erlaufe beS d^efcc^t^, which
place after the pron. jic^. 20, in — glare, mit blcnbcnb rotcm ©lanjc, which
place before the verb, which stands ? 21, ^(or'bvingcn. 22, until — enemy,
I)ig biefelbe beu S3licfcn be« ^einbeg . . . cntjogcn »ar. 23, Render 'and —
permit ' freely, and say *unb fporiiten baim i^rc cnnubctcu ^ferbc i^um titoglic^fl
fc^neaen %xaU an*. 24, geben!cn ; to — rear, bcm geinbe in ben gjucfen ju fallen.
The Impf. of the verb gebcnfen stands, of course, after fallen, accord, to App.
§ 19. 25, ivel^eg er gn feinen Xru^^^jen tjegtc. 26, = in spite of
the tired horses and the approaching (^eran'na^en) night. 27, = in the
possession of fresh horses. 28, unbefcnnen, i. e. imprudent. 29, fighting
powers, (Starfe, f. j ' men ', here = troops.
Section 175.
THE BATTLE OF KASSASSIW.
III.
Soon^ darkness came down rapidly upon us. The rattle and roar of^
combat on^ our left never ceased, and it was evident that the two thou-
sand Infantry* at Kassassin were hard pressed. Presently** the moonlight
streamed palely over the grey sand, but the clouds of dust obscured^ the
advancing horsemen, who sometimes trotted, sometimes'^ walked.
By about seven o'clock we had got in the rear of the firing^, and^
wheeled in that direction, advancing ^° very slowly to^^ allow the Artillery
to^-^ come up. We could see the flashes of^^ the enemy's artillery ^/e'a;;/
on the horizon like the flicker of incessant summer lightning^*. ^_^'
We slowly drew^^ nearer to the scene of conflict. It was almost dark",
but, unfortunately, we showed up^^ a black mass against the bright
moonlit sky and ground '^ and ^^ the sudden rush of shell through the
air, followed^'' by an explosion far in our rear, showed that the enemy
had at last discovered us. They'^^ were about fifteen hundred yards '^^
away, and^^ we saw nine flashes, one after another, at short intervals,
spurt out, no" longer like sheet lightning, but in angry jets of flame.
Almost simultaneously the sky above us seemed to" be torn in pieces as
by (=through) a mighty hurricane. Shells screamed ^^^ and burst ^*^, ond
shrapnel bullets " tore up the sand on either side of us. '
The brigade now moved '^^ to the right to ^^ disconcert their aim, and
the next salvo of shell missed us. We moved quickly forward, and the
gunners again saw us, and the shells burst over and around. Yet,
strangely ^°, but few were hit, though it seemed as if the storm" would
mow men and horses down by squadrons ^\
1, = Soon after (barauf) the darkness (iDnnTet, n.) of the night descended
(t)einie'bevf^eigcn) rapidly upon us. 2, =of the. 3, ju. 4, Snfan?
tcrillen. 5, = Now streamed the pale moonlight, etc. 6, = concealed;
liorsemen, Oieiterei, f. Sing. 7, j^uu^cilen and) im (S^vitt ba()invitt. 8, = enemy;
got = arrived. 9, nnb fd)ivcnftcn ber 0?id)tnni3 jn, an« bcr batS ^d}ic^cn fam.
10, = advanced (wotrVavt^veitcu) however only very slowly. 11, to allow =
to (S. 19, N. 7) give time to. 12, Inf. l)cran'fommen. 13, = of the
hostile artillery. 14, = sheet lightning, ai^cttevleuc^tcn, n. 15, to
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 75. I3I
draw near, fid) nal^ern. 16, The fact of its being dark soon after seven at
the end of August is explained when we remember that there is no twilight in
Egypt. 17, = we formed. 18, (Srbbcben, m. 19, unb ba^ i|e, f.). 9, = Under
their (beffen) cover (©d^u^, m.) formed the Life Guards (tie Oarbcfuraffierc) a
line of attack (eine ^Ingviff^linie). 10, = and upon a given command.
11, = opened . . . the ranks (Otei^en). 12, to pass the word, ben 93efe(>t
ergc'^en laffcn; down = all along, (angg. 13, 2)ie lange Sinte fprengte bavon.
14, = and disappeared. 15, away . . . went = followed. 16, to keep,
fid^ l^alten ; on, ^u, either flank = both flanks. 17, = Since we remained
(jurucf'bleibcn) behind all, (fo) we had the full effect of the shower of shot
(^ugelvegen, m.) 18, = heard. 19, to charge straight at the guns,
bie feinbUcf)e 5lrtif(crie fogteirfi an'gveifen. 20, = sabred down ; as they passed,
mif i^rcm 3ngC' 21, = and dashed (fprcngen) into the ranks of the flying
Infantry behind the same, which they (fie, f. Sing, to agree with bie SHeiterei) cut
down (nie'berme^etn). 22, bet ; men = regiment. 23, = with one
stroke ((Sdjtag, m.) at an end (ju (Snbe). 24, = followed. 25, = thun-
dered still. 26, einjelne Xeile. 27, bodies — plain = and numerous
bodies (^aufen) 0/* Cavalry were still here and there upon the moonlit plain
visible. 28, = and the enemy stood between us. (The verb must stand
last, since also this clause is a depending one, co-ordinated to the preceding
clause by the conjunction *and*.) 29, our way round, cincn ffieg
■feitirdrt^.
Section 177.
THE BATTLE OP KASSASSIN".
The Infantry there ^ had indeed had a hot time of it^ Hundreds of shells
had (S. 29, N. 3) burst in the confined^ space, and the shelter trenches*
afforded but an insufficient protection. On the left of the position ^ next
to the Canal, were® the Marine Artillery, then came the 46th, and next^
to them the 84th', the' slight earthworks sweeping round again in a
semi-circle almost to the Canal. The Mounted ^° Infantry were in front
under Captain Pigott, who" has received a wound, having been shot
through the thigh. >
The Egyptians came on with great bravery, and in spite of the " heavy
fire of our men", were rapidly gaining ground, and would soon have
rushed'* into the entrenchments, when the roar of our guns on" their left
rear, followed ^" by the rush of our Cavalry, proved " too much for them,
and from (S. 102, N. 4) that moment they thought only of flight. -
Our casualties are surprisingly " small considering '^ the fire to which
our men were exposed. Lieutenant Edwards, of the Mounted Infantry,
was^** shot in the arm, Surgeon-Major" Shaw, of the 46th, was^^ killed,
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 7 7. 1 33
and some ten or a dozen men, but, fortunately, the Remington bullet
wounds rather than kills ; the hospital was crowded ^' with wounded men.
About 10 o'clock the Cavalry came in^^ in high spirits over their bril-
liant achievement. Many, of course, are missing in the darkness, but
will, no doubt, turn up ^^ in the morning. Upon their "^^ return from the
pursuit they ^'^ were unable to find the guns over which they had charged,
but these ^* will doubtless be discovered at sunrise./ After learning from
them 2^ the events ^° of the charge, I^^ started to ride here to get off ^^ my
despatches, — a^^ distance of twenty- four miles. This solitary ride over
the dismal desert by moonlight was not^* the least exciting part of an
exciting day.
Late^^ as it was, I found at (auf) the different posts the men^^ busy at
work entrenching, and met troops also on^^ their march to reinforce
those at the front.
The enemy's force ^^ engaged wa-s estimated at 13,000. The Egyptians
fought well until our Cavalry and guns took ^^ them in the rear, and,
had *^ it not been for the gallantry of the defenders of Kassassin, would *^
have carried the positon before our reinforcements came upon the scene.
At "^^ the time I left, the losses were unknown, but were *^ supposed to
be about twenty killed and a hundred wounded.
As** I am writing, Sir Garnet Wolseley and*^ the entire army are.march-
ing to the front. — The Correspondent of the London " Standard." -^jL.
1, there, bottig, which is an attributive adj., to be placed before the noun
* Infantry '. 2, to have a hot time of it, citieti fci^iceren ©tanb 'i)aUn.
3, = narrow. 4, bie @^anjgrat)en. 5, =camp. 6, = stood.
7, next to them = finally. 8, Supply * regiment '. 9, = whilst the
insignificant entrenchments (SScrfc^anjungen) swept round in a semicircle almost
to (H^ ju) the canal. * To sweep round,' here [i^ ^inTcf)tdngeln, of which the
pron. ftc^ must be placed immediately after the subject, and the verb?
10, Berittcn, adj. 11, = who was wounded (S. 2, N. i) and had received a
shot through the thigh. 12, Nom. bag teb^afte @d;iepen. 13, = troops;
were rapidly gaining ground = advanced rapidly (fd)neU »ov'n?dvt3ru(Jen, sep. comp.
w. V. intr. Where must you place the verb ? and where the separable par-
ticle? 14, to rush into the entrenchments, in bic ®c^anjtrev!e bringen (str. v.).
15, on — rear, an i^ver Unfen %lax[h. 16, unb bev bavauf fofgenbe un'erlvartete
Slngviff unfever .^attaUeric. 17, = had not terrified them (einen in fevfeit bcluiefen, fo, etc. 41, = the enemy
would. 42, = When I rode away. 43, = were estimated at (auf)
*bout, etc. 44, = Whilst. 45, = with.
Section 178.
HOW TBCES DUKE OP WELLINGTON" WAS DECEIVED.
"I (S. 115, N. i) got famously taken in^ on that occasion," said the
Duke of Wellington once. " The troops had "^ taken to plundering a
good deal. It was necessary to ^ stop it, and I issued an order announc-
ing * that the ^ first man taken in the act should be hanged upon the spot.
One day, just as we were sitting^ down to dinner, three men^ were
brought to the door of the tent by the provost. They had been taken
in ^ the act of plundering, and I had nothing for it ' but to command that
they (S. 4, N. 4, man) should be taken away and hanged in some place
where they might be seen by the whole column in its march next day.
I had a good many guests with ^^ me on that day, and among the rest, I
think, Lord Nugent. They^^ seemed dreadfully shocked, and could not
eat their dinner. I did not eat myself, but, as I told them, I could not
indulge my feelings ^2; I must do my duty. WelH^, the dinner went off
rather gravely ; and next morning, sure enough ^*, three men in uniform
were seen hanging (S. 78, N. 14, B) from the branches of a tree close to
the high road. It was a terrible example, which produced ^^ the desired
effect, for there was no more plundering. Some months afterwards I
learned that one of my staff ^^ had taken counsel with Dr. Hume, and as
three men had (S. 29, N. 3) just died in the hospital, they had hung
them ^^ up and let the three culprits return to their regiments."
"Were you not very angry, Duke^^?"
" Well ^^ I suppose I was at first ; but ^® as I had no wish to take the
poor fellows' lives and only wanted the example, and as the example had
the desired effect (S. 27, N. 8), my anger soon died out", and I confess
to you that ^^ I am very glad now that the three lives were spared." —
Historical Anecdotes.
1, to be famously taken in, cjeTjcvig ongcfufjrt iverben ; once, tm9 Xa^yi.
2, = had begun to plunder ; a good deal, tu^tig. 3, to — it = to make an
end of this nuisance, biefcm Unn^efen ein @nbc ju madden. 4, announcing
that = according to which, iucnad^. 5, the — act = the first man (bcr crfiie)
whom one would take in the act. To take a person in the act, etncn auf
fvifd)ei* Xf)at crtappcn. 6, to sit down to dinner, jlc^ ju %\\^t fe^en. 7, Scnte.
8, in — plundering, fceim ^-Plunbcvn. 9, He has nothing for it, ti bleibt if)m
nid^tiJ anbcrcS ubvig; but, aI«S; in, an; might = could, Impf. Subj.; column =»
army ; in its march, vovbeimavfc^icrcnt), adj. qualifying * army '. 10, ki ; place
*I think* after 'and'; among the rest = among others. 11, = These
seemed to be very much shocked (crgriffen) at (won) the occuiTence. 12, to
indulge one's feelings, feincn ®efu()ten fveien Sanf (aijcn. 13, (5)nt ; went —
gravely, ging cin trenig evnjl^aft vcnftvUten. 14, auc^ nnrftici^, which place after
the subject, and construe the sentence in the Active Voice with the pron.
man ; men = soldiers. 15, = had. There was no more talking, c3 unutic
• nic^t mt\)K gefpvod;cu. 16, = one of my staff-officers ((Stafc«o|fijiere) ; to take
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 78. 1 35
counsel in a matter with a friend, etne ®a^e tnit cincm i^rcunbc Bef^tec^cn.
17, = these ; culprits = condemned men (cer SSecurteilte, Nom. Sing.). 18, aBareii
(Sure {(S\i\) ^o^eit nidjt fefjr erjurnt bariiber ? 19, ^m {a, anfangg \)ie((ei^t
wav i^'g. 20, = however (aBer), since I did not wish (icotten) the death of
the poor fellows, but (foubern) only the example (Here follows the verb). 21, ' to
die out', here erfievben, insep. comp. str. v. 22, To avoid a repetition of
subordinate clauses, say : * that I am very glad (feci)) now at (iiBcr) the pre-
servation (3iettung) of the 3 men (Seute).
Section 179.
A LETTER FROM DR. HEISTRY DANSON TO ^ MR. JOHN
PORSTER, ON'* CHARLES DICKENS'S ^ SCHOOL-LIFE.
I.
My impression is * that I was a schoolfellow of Dickens for nearly two
years. He left ° before me, I think about fifteen years of age. The school,
called (S. 7, N. 3, E) the Wellington Academy, was in the Hampstead
Road at the north-east corner of Granby Street. The school-house was
afterwards taken down ^ on account of the London and North-Western
Railway, v It was considered at the time'^ a very superior sort of school,
one of the best indeed ^ in that part of London ; but it was most shame-
fully mismanaged ', and the boys ^^ made but very litde progress. The
proprietor, Mr. Jones, was a Welshman ^M a- niost^^ ignorant fellow, and
a mere tyrant, whose chief employment was^^ to scourge the boys. Dickens
has ^* given a very lively account of this place in his paper entitled " Our
School," but it is very mythical in many respects, and^^ more espe-
cially in the compliment he pays in it to himself. I do not remember
that Dickens distinguished himself in any way^*', or carried off any prizes.
My belief is " that he did not learn Greek or Latin there, and you will
remember ^^ there is no allusion to the classics in any of Mi's, writings. He
was a handsome, curly-headed lad ^^ full of animation and animal spirits,
and ^° probably was connected with every mischievous prank in the school.
1, an. 2, iiBcr. 3, (S'^arle^ 2)i(fcn^, geBomi ben 7- 5eBr. 18 12 gu
^J^ovt^monf^, gefiorbcn ben 9. 3nni 1870 auf feinem Sanbfi^e bei Sonbcn, tegann feine
fc^tiftfteUerifc^e Xf)dtigfeit unter bem angenommenen Xiamen 33oj, iDeI(t)et itjn fd^neK
bevii^mt mac^te. (Sr begvunbete feinen Oluf al^ engUfd)er ^utttoi*i|^ bur(^ bic ' Sketches
of London' (1836), imb namentlic^ bur(^ bic 'Pickwick Papers' (1837), n)el(i^ea
unjiveitig bag beliebteftc, aBer aud) »ieneid)t bag Befte feinev jafilvei^en 3Berfe ij!. @r
gritnbete 1845 bic 3eihmg 'Daily News', [mme 1850 bic Beitfc^vift 'Household
Words *, tt^eli^c feit i860 ben %\ik ' All the year round ' fiifjvt. (tr i)efud)tc j^tDcimat,
im Sa'^rc 1842 unb 1868, bic SSeveinigten ©taaten »on S'lorb Slmerifa, oon \wo er bag
jiTjeite SWal bnrc^ feine ttietBefud}ten SSorlefungen aug feinen eigenen SSerfen eine reic^e
@rntc I)eimfitt)vte. a^on feinen f^iateven 2Ber!en finb 'Oliver Twist', 'Nicholas
Nickelby ', ' David Copperfield ', ' Dombey and Son ', ' Martin Chuzzlewit ',
unb ' A Christmas Carol ' bic Befannteften unb bejten. (S'g ntag intereffant fein, ^iec
gu feemerfen, baf feit bem S^obe beg Berufimtcn unb f)6c^jl Beliebten ^Bevfaffevg (b. % in 16
Sa^ren) »on feinen 9Bev!en 4,539,000 SBdnbe ttevlanft n?orben jinb. 4, = I re-
member still, that, etc. Place the advl. circumstance of time ' for — years '
before ' a — Dickens '. 5, Supply ' the school ' here ; before me = earlier
than I ; I think = and as I think. 6, to take down (of buildings), nie'bevj
teipcn, 7, bama(g ; 1 consider this a very superior sort of school, i^ fjaltc bieg
136 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 79.
fur cine gang vorjugtid^c @d^ute. 8, one — indeed = and was indeed (a\x^
tcixUid)) one of the best. 9, This institution is most shamefully mis-
managed, biefe Slnftalt tuiib ganj anf cvorbentlic^ fd}Uc^t werwaltet. 10, boys =
school-boys or pupils, (B^iikx ; to make little progress, geringe i^ortfc^vitte ntat^c n.
11, SBaHifer. 12, most = highly, f)6d)i!; ' fellow ', here = man ; 'mere',
here = real, n>a^r. 13, barin beftanb (comp. S. 87, N. 6); to scourge = to
chastise, jiic^tigcn. 14, Insert 'to us' after the auxiliary ; of, fiber; place =
institution ; ' paper ', here (Sd^vift, f. Place * in — School ' after ' to us '.
15, unb jtmr BefonberS in S3ejng auf bie gcMrben . . . aU) poor boys and to ask
the passers-by for (nm) alms (milbe @abcn). 14, = observed (bemerfen).
15, ' to be quite staggered ', here ganj verbliifft ba'jle^en ; by — demand = through
the impudent demand ; to explode with laughter, wor IHid^en fafl berften ; to take
to one's heels, f^nell ba»on taufen ; and — heels = and ran then quickly away.
16, = and we went very (ganjj) piously to church in Seymour St., to attend the
morning service (urn bent SJior^engotte^bienfle beijnn)of)nen). 17, Sd) mu^ leibcr
befennen. 18, =that the young D. not paid the least attention to the
service. To pay attention to a thing, einer ©ac^e Slnfmerffamfeit njibmen.
19, = would get cold. 20, =He behaved really so. That — us = that
we must (Impf.) esteem (fcf)a^en) ourselves lucky, not to be ejected from
church. — He was ejected from church, er ivurbc anS ber .^irc^e geworfcn.
Section 182.
SIR JOSEPH PAXTON\
Sir Joseph Paxton was acting as gardener to^ the Duke of Devonshire
when the Committee of the Exhibition of 1851 advertised for plans of a
building. The architects and engineers seem to have been very much at
fault" when Paxlon submitted his design, and its novelty and remarkable
suitability for the purposes intended, at once secured its adoption *. The
first sketch was made upon a piece of blotting-paper in the rooms of the
Midland Railway Company ^ at Derby ; and the first rough ^ sketch indi-
cated '^ the principal features of the building as accurately as the most
finished drawings which were afterwards prepared. The great ® idea of
the Crystal Palace was as palpable ^ on the blotting-paper as if it had
been set forth in all the glory of water-colour and gold-framing ^".
Was it a sudden idea, — an inspiration of genius ", — flashing upon the
mind of one ^'^ who, though no architect, must at least " have been some-
thing like a poet? — Not at all**. The architect of the Crystal Palace was
simply a man who cultivated opportunities ", — a laborious, painstaking *'
man, whose life had been a life of labour, of diligent self-improvement, of
assiduous cultivation of knowledge ". As ** Sir Joseph Paxton himself
has shown, in a lecture before the Society of Arts, the idea was slowly and
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 8 2, 1 39
patiently elaborated by experiments extending over many years ^^. The
Exhibition of 1851 merely afforded him ihe opportunity of putting
forward his idea ^° — the right thing at the right time — and the result was
what we have seen. — S. Smiles, " Self-Help."
1, Sofe^:^ ^arton, geB. ben 3. 5liig. 1803, gefl. ben 8. Snni 1865, n?urbc junac^fl
.tnnftgdrtiier beim ^erjog won 3)eyonff)ire, jeii^nete |t(^ jeboc^ balb bnvc^ feine genialen
©^opfuugen fo fe^r au^, ba^ ber drt6 brdngen, sep. comp. w. v. refl. 7, and — man =
they fight for (nm) the pass (2)uvd)gang, m*.) and struggle (fdttt^^fen) man against
man. 8, it — winds = it is like the meeting (Shieinanbevftofen) of two fierce
tides ((gtuvmfiiit, f.), like the conflict (3ufamttien|ite^en, n.) of two oceans
(SKettmeer, n.) which are moved (fovt'treiben, sep. comp. str. v.) by adverse
(entgegengefe^t) winds. 9, unric^tig beuten. Construe accord, to S. i6, N. 4 ;
142 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 84.
of her retiring ■= of this movement. 10, in some degree = almost.
11, there is, eg ift . . . tjortjautcn. Comp. S. 104, N. 19. 12, »or.
13, iud()ient), with Gen. 14, Stnljdiifler. 15, ntit SUifmcrffamteit
tterfolgen. 16, = defend, v. tr. 17, = hereupon, which place first
To utter a shriek, ciiien ©c^vei au^j^cpcn. 18, = fallen.
Section 185.
KEBECCA DESCRIBES THE SIEGE OF TOBQUUiSTOlSrE TO
THE WOUJS^DED IVANHOE.
III.
"Who is down?" cried Ivanhoe; "for^ our dear Lady's sake, tell me
who has fallen?"
" The Black Knight," answered Rebecca faintly ^ ; then instantly again
shouted with joyful eagerness ^ : " But * no — but no ! — the name of the
Lord of hosts be blessed^! — he is on foot^ again, and fights as if there
were twenty men's strength in his single arm ''. — His sword is broken —
he snatches* an axe from a yeoman— he presses^ Front-de-Boeuf with
blow on blow. — The giant stoops and totters Uke an oak under the steel
of the woodman ^° — he falls— he falls!"
"Front-de-Boeuf?" exclaimed Ivanhoe.
"Front-de-Boeuf!" answered tlie Jewess; "his men" rush to the
rescue ^'^j headed (S. 102, N. 3) by (i?on) the haughty Templar^'' — their
united force compels the champion^* to pause. — They drag Front-de-
Boeuf within the walls ^^"
"The assailants have won^^ the barriers, have they not?" said
Ivanhoe.
"They have — they have"!" exclaimed Rebecca — "and they press"
the besieged hard upon the outer wall; some plant ladders ^^ some swarm
like bees (S. 3, N. 2) and endeavour to ascend upon the shoulders of
each other ^^ — down go '^^ stones, beams, and trunks of trees upon their
heads, and as fast as they bear the wounded to the rear ^2, fresh men 2'
supply their places in the assault. — Great God, hast thou given men thine
own image '^S that (S. 183, N. 6) it should be thus cruelly defaced '^^ by'^'^
the hands of their brethren ?"
1, =for the sake of (um . . . UnHen) the holy Virgin. 2, tnit fd^ira^er
©timmc. 3, then — eagerness = but cried immediately (glcid^ baraiif ) with
joyful surprise. 4, 5)o(f>. 5, gepriefen. 6, to be on foot, auf
bcu ^Beinen fein. 7, as — arm = as if (al« ot>) his arm possessed (Impf. Subj.
App. 33) the strength of 20 men. 8, to snatch a thing from a person,
eiiiem ctwaS cntrei'pen, insep. comp. str. v. tr. ; a yeoman, ein Jreifaffe, m. Comp.
App. § 5 ; * axe ', here = battle-axe, (StieiKirt, f. 9, * to press ', here n>eitfr
juvurf'bidugen, sep. comp. w. v. tr. ; with blow on blow, mit icbem ©c^Uigc.
10, = wood-cutter. 11, fieutc. 12, He rushed to my rescue, ct cilte
tiiir ju Jpulfe. 13, 2)cr Scmvcltjevr iwar 33rian be 33ci<5i®iiilbcrt. Comp. S. 183,
N.I. 14, =hcro; to pause = to stop fighting, wit bcm jjfc^ten iiniquljaltcn.
15, * within the walls ' may be briefly rendered by Ijinein. 16, = taken,
cin'nctjmen, scp. comp. irreg. v. tr. ; turn 'barriers' by 93erfcf)anjnngcn ; have
they not ? nid)t uwljv? 17, 3a — ja 1 18, here bebrangcn ; hard, l)cftig;
upon, auf, with Dat. 19, to plant ladders, Seitcni on tic SWaucc jicllen.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 185. 1 43
20, = of the others. 21, down go, eg iretbcn . . . l^evmebergetwovfen. Comp. S.
104, N. 19. 22, and — rear = and as soon as (fo ixne) the wounded are carried
away (fjinireg'trageu). Comp. S. 2, N. i. 23, = other combatants (©tveitcr).
He supplied my place in the assault of the castle, ev nai^m weinc ©telle be; ter
^I'ftiirmung be^ S^toiTe^ iwiebei* etn. 24, Say 'hast thou created men (S. 134,
N. 9) after thy own image (33ilb, n.)'. 25, eutfteKen, insep. comp. w. v. ;
Use the Pres. Subj. of the Passive voice, and comp. App. §§29 and 35. 26, by
= through, tuvd^ ; the hands = the hand.
Section 186.
EEBECCA DESCBIBES THE SIEGE OF TOKQUILSTOWE TO
THE WOUNDED IVANHOE.
IV.
^ "Think not of that (S. 4, N. 5, ^)," said Ivanhoe; " this is^ no time
for such thoughts. Who yield ? Who push their way '^ ? "
" The ladders are thrown down," replied Rebecca shuddering ; " the
soldiers lie groveUing ^ under them like crushed reptiles. The besieged
have the better *."
" Saint George, strike ^ for us ! " exclaimed the Knight ; " do the false
yeomen give way^?"
" No !" exclaimed Rebecca, " they bear"^ themselves right yeomanly —
the Black Knight approaches the postern with his huge axe — the thun-
dering blows which he deals ^ you may '-^ hear them above all the din ^° and
shouts of the battle. — Stones and beams are hailed down ^^ on the bold
champion — he regards them no more than if they were ^^ thistle-down^^ or
feathers ! "
" By Saint George," said Ivanhoe, raising (S. i t i, N. 6) himself joyfully
on his couch, "methought^* there was (S. 82, N. 7, and App. § 33) but
one man in England , that ^^ might do such a deed!"
"The postern gate shakes^"," continued Rebecca; "it crashes— it is
splintered by^^ his blows — they rush in — the outwork is won^^ — O God,
they hurl the defenders from the battlements — they throw them into the
moat. — O men, if ye ^^ be indeed men, spare them that can resist no
longer ! "
" The bridge — the bridge which communicates with the castle — have
they won ^^ that pass ? " exclaimed Ivanhoe.
"No," replied Rebecca, "the Templar has destroyed the plank on
which they crossed ^^ — few ^^ of the defenders escaped with him into the
castle — the shrieks and cries ''^^ which you hear tell the fate of the
others. — Alas ! I see it is still more difficult to look upon '^* victory
(S. 3, N. 2) than upon battle." — Sir Walter Scott, "Ivanhoe."
1, =we have ; for, jit. 2, to push one's way, wor\rartS bvingen. 3, auf
bem S3aud)e. 4, to have the better, bic DBer^aub ^aben. 5, - fight.
6, juvi'id'ireic^en. 7, * to bear oneself, here fid) fatten; right yeomanly ■=
like true (ed)t) yeomen. 8, to deal blows, ©treic^c fufjren. 9, =can;
See S. 92, N. 5, and App. § 14 ; above, iiber . . . f)tuaug. 10, (Setofe, n.
11, = thrown down. 12, than — were = than he would regard (ljead)ten).
13, S)iftehwae. 14, =1 thought; see S. 64, N. 11 ; but = only. 15, ber
144 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 86.
ciner folc^en Xrjat faT)ig trare ! 16, h^acfedi. 17, tton, 18, = taken,
ein'net)mcn, sep. comp. irreg.v.tr. 19, i^r; to spare a man, eine3 SWcnfc^eu f^onen;
render * them' by the Gen. of the demonstr. pron. ; that — longer = who can
defend themselves no longer. 20, crfdm^ft; that pass, biefen 2)ur^gang.
21, to cross on a plank, uber eine $(aufc fc^reitcn. 22, =only few ; escaped =
have escaped (cutfom'men, insep. comp. irreg. v., S. 29, N. 3). 23, ba^ lautc
@d>ieicu mib Mi^en; you = thou; tell, »evrat. 24, *to look upon a
thing *, here etttJO^ mi au'fe^en, v. tr.
Section 187.
THE FAVOURITE HARES \
I.
In the year 1774, being (S. 55, N. i) much indisposed both in mind
and body '\ incapable of diverting myself either ' with company or books,
and yet in a condition * that made some diversion necessary ^, I was glad
of anything that would engage my attention ®, without fatiguing it.
The children of a neighbour of mine had a leveret given them for a
play-thing "^ ; it was at that time about three months old. Understanding
better how to tease the poor creature than to feed it, and soon becoming
weary of their charge^, they readily consented" that their father, who
saw it pining ^° and growing leaner every day, should offer ^* it to my
acceptance. I was willing enough to take the prisoner under my pro-
tection, perceiving that (S. 66, N. 15), in the management '^ of such an
animal, and in the attempt to tame it, I should find just that sort of
employment which my case required ^^ It was soon known among the
neighbours that I was pleased " with the present, and the consequence
of it was, that^"^ in a short time I had as many leverets offered to
me as would have stocked a paddock ^^ I undertook the care" of
three, which it is necessary that I should here distinguish by the names I
gave them ^* : Puss, Tiny, and Bess. Notwithstanding the two feminine
appellatives, I must inform ^' you they were all males.
1, !t)ie ill biffev unb ben brci barauf fofgenben Slbfci^nitten gcgeBcnc tntctclfantc (Bx^h^t
lung ijl ben er(icf> ^evvfittct fein. 3, incapable — either = and could
neither divert myself (fief) jcrjlveueu) ; with, burd^, which repeat before books ;
or = nor. 4, mid^ aber babei fo befanb. 5, that — necessary = that
some diversion was necessary. 6, I shall be glad of anything that will
engage my attention, ic^ \revbe gcvn aUeS ergvcifcn, it?a5 meine 9lufmerffamfeit fcffeln
fann. 7, gum ©vif^f"/ which place after the auxiliary * had*; given them,
gefc^enft etT)a(ten. 8, to become weary of one's charge, fcine^ @4>"&ii"^^^
iibevbrujTig luevben. 9, I readily consented, ic^ tjattc uid)t« bagegcn. 10, fic^
ab'jef)vcn. 11, should offer = offered it. We offered it to his acceptance,
\m bcteu eg it}m jum ©cfc^euf an. 12, = treatment. 13, I hope he will
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 8 7. 1 45
find just that sort of employment which his case requires, t^ fioffe, cr Unvb c;embe
bie fur feiueu Buj^anb ^>affeube ^efc^dftiguiig fiubeu. 14, My father will be
greatly pleased with the picture, ba^ ^^ilD ivivb meinem SSater grope ^reubc ntacfjeii.
15, Read App. § 21. In order to avoid a repetition of the conjunction baf,
it is advisable to construe the clause ' that — me' =there were (eg muben, S. 104,
N. 19) offered to me in a short time so many leverets. * To offer', here jum
©efc^enf aubieten. 16, as — paddock, ba^ i^ eincn SfBilbpar! bamit :^dttc
aueirujien fonnen. 17, ^jiege. 18, which — them = the names of which
I must mention (an'fu(}ven) here, in order to distinguish them from one another ;
I called them. 19, Bemerfen; you = to the reader; they = the little animals
(for which use the diminutive).
Section 188.
THE FAVOURITE HARES.
Immediately commencing carpenter, I built * them houses to sleep in.
Each leveret had a separate apartment, so contrived^ that it could be
kept perfectly sweet and clean •\ In the daytime * the animals had the
range ^ of the hall, and at night ^ retired each to his own bed, never
intruding into that of another '^.
Puss grew presently familiar, would leap ^ into my lap, raise himself^
upon his hinder feet, and bite the hair from my temples. He would
suffer ^° me to take him up, and to carry him about in my arms, and has
more than once fallen fast asleep upon my knees. He was ill three days,
during which time I nursed him, kept him apart from his fellows, that ^^
they might not molest him (for, like many other wild animals, they per-
secute ^^ one of their own species that is sick), and by constant care ^^
and with a variety of herbs, restored him to perfect health ^*. No crea-
ture could be more grateful than (S. 104, N. 19) my patient after his
recovery, a sentiment which he most significantly expressed by licking ^^
my hand, first the back of it^*', then the palm, then every finger
separately ^'^, then^^ between all f/ie fingers, as if (S. 27, N. 7) anxious to
leave no part of it unsaluted ; a ceremony ^* which he never performed
but once again ^° upon a similar occasion.
1, I became at once a carpenter and made, etc. 2, eiu'rtdjten ; see S. 7,
N. 3, B. 3, rein unb fauber. 4, 2)eg S^agcg. 5, We had the range of
the whole house, irir fonnten im ganjeu ecf evreicljen. 10, Supply the adv.
' forward ' after this noun. 11, Say ' And so (fomit) I may (biivfen)
perhaps (irct)!) say of " Puss " that he was quite tamed'. 12, = his
natural shyness was conquered. 13, ufeevtjauVt ; visible = clear. 14, = which
(S. 66, N. 15) on account of want of (an) room I cannot enumerate here.
15, * to be shut up', here fi(^ aii^fd)licplid^ befinben ; with, feci. 16, Uchci^.
17, in — attention = and during his sickness I nursed him with equal (c^leic^)
attention. 18, Supply * at (nac^) me ' here. 19, Supply * also ' here ;
in, auf. 20, = amusing. 21, =such a grave air (SRicuc, f.). 22, = solemn
dignity.
Section 190.
THE FAVOURITE HARES.
IV.
Bess> who died soon after he was full grown \ and whose death wa?
occasioned by his being turned (S. 161, N. 21, and S. 87, N. 6) into his
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 190. 1 47
box, which had been washed, while it was yet damp^, was a hare of great
humour and drollery ^ Puss was tamed by gentle usage; Tiny was not
to be tamed at all; and Bess had a* courage and confidence that made
him tame from the beginning ^ I always admitted them into the parlour
after supper, when (S. 131, N. 4), the® carpet affording their feet a firm
hold, they would frisk, and bound, and play a thousand gambols, in "^
which Bess, being remarkably strong and fearless, was always superior to
the rest. One evening, the cat being in the room, it had the hardiness
to pat Bess upon the cheek, an indignity which ^ he resented by drum-
ming upon her (S. 43, N. 9, B) back with such violence that the cat was
happy to escape from wider his paws, and ® hide herself.
I describe the animals as having had each a character of his own ^^
Such they were in fact ^^, and their countenances were so expressive of
that character, that, when I looked only on the face of either, I imme-
diately knew which it was ^\ — William Cowper, " The Gentleman's
Magazine, 1784."
1, voHig au^gett)a(^fen fein. 2, which — damp = which after having been
washed [m^ tev Oieinigung) was yet damp. 3, = was a very facetious and
droll hare. 4, = so much. 5, = that he became tame from the
very (glei(^ im) beginning. 6, Place the clause ' the — hold ' after * they —
gambols ' : To play gambols poffievli^e guftf^viinge mac^en. 7, in which =
in (bet) which games. 8, an indignity which = which offence. 9, Say
* and to be able to hide herself '. 10, as — own = as if each of the same had
had (Pluperf. Subj.) his own character. 11, =That was however (aba auc^)
really the case. 12, that — was = that from (au^) the face of each I could
at once distinguish (evfcnuen) who it ( = he) was.
Section 191. ^
PBIlSrCE BISMAUCK'S HOME'.
After crossing the threshold I found myself in a small, plain apart-
ment — ^the reception-room— in the centre of which stands a simple little
poUshed table with four legs. This is a relic of historical significance. A
brass plate let into the square top^ bears the following inscription: "At
this table the preliminaries of peace between Germany and France were
signed, February 26th, 187 1, at Versailles, No. 14 Rue de Provence." In
the centre of the table is^ a round piece ^ green cloth, and on it are
visible a number of spots* caused by (S. 185, N. 26) the drippings^ from
the candles used on the momentous occasion of the negotiations between
the Chancellor and Jules Favre^ The table was the property of the
lady in whose house the Chancellor was quartered ^ and of whom he
bought it. In the same room stands a gigantic wardrobe richly sculp-
tured ^ and a second wardrobe (S. 5, N. 2), according to Castellan (S. 10,
N. 2) Hackmack's explanation, was made from ® the wood of a linden tree,
in the shade of which Prince Bismarck, when a ^° merry student at Got-
tingen, had frequently reposed. The adjoining room is the Prince's
study. A bookcase contains a small hbrary " for immediate use and for
reference; among its books being a French account of ^=^ the peace nego-
L 2
148 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 19 1.
tiations of 187 1. The writing-desk occupies the centre of the room. A
polished fire-screen, highly ^^ ornamented and of Asiatic origin, is a
present from the Chinese Embassy in Berlin. On the mantel-piece
stands a bronze statuette, about three feet high, representing the Grand
Elector — a present from the Emperor. A slip of paper attached to the
Marshal's baton in the Elector's outstretched hand, bears the Imperial
autograph^*: "To^^ Prince Bismarck — Christmas, 1880, — W." On the
wall, behind the statuette, hangs, in a richly gilt frame, a painting by^*
Hunten, representing the attack of dragoons of the guard on French
infantry at Mars-la-Tour ; the Chancellor's two sons, Herbert and
William, being ^^ in the midst of the fight. — The Correspondent of the
London " Daily News."
1, here ^aiigeiuvic^tung. 2, here Xi\^ ; the plate was let into the table,
bic ^(atte lv»ar in beu %\\6^ T){ueingete9t. 3, =lies. 4, and — spots =
and upon the same one sees still some spots. 5, bag Secfen; render
* from the ' by the Gen. of the def. art., and turn * used — negotiations ' by
* during the momentous negotiations'. 6, 3ute6 ^a^tre, gebovcn ben 21.
S)?drj 1809 ju ?^on, tnaci^tc fic^ guevfl aU Oiebner unb gciranbter 9lbwofat eincn Seamen,
bef^dftiQte fic^ jebcd) fpdter awd^ mit bcr ^olitif, \vo er f^etg jur bcntpfratifc^en ^artei
Qctjortc. ^ad^ ber gcferuarrettolution «on 1848 itjurbe cr ©enevalfcfretdr im a)nnifteriuni
beg Snncrn, bann aJJitglieb ber Sflationalvevfammlung, in ber er a(g ©egner beg gum
^vdftbenten getrdtjlten $rinjen Subting Sflapoteon auftvat. 3m 3at)rc 1858 in ben
gefe^gebenben ^ovper ge\rd()It, unirbe cr nad| bcm ©tur;^e beg ^aifevtcid^g unb ber
(S'rfldrung ber Oiepublif SWitgtieb ber Oiegievung ber 9Iationa(vcvteibigung unb 9}tiui|ter
beg 9lupern, atg n)dd)er er tm 3a'f)re 1871 j^u 3Sevfai((eg unb granffurt a/3)? mit bem
©urfien ©igmard uberben ^rieben untert)anbelte. Sim 2. 5lugu|l 1871 jcg cr fid& \&c(i)
vom ^oUtifc^en £eben gururf unb jlarb am 19. Sannar 1880. 7, =lived (S. 116,
N. 17). 8, richly sculptured, mit reid>et 93ilb()auerarBeit vergiert, which use
attributively, as explained in S. 7, N. 3, j4); 'wardrobe*, here ffianbfd^ranf.
9, aug. 10, when a = as. 11, Supply * intended * (kj^immt) here,
and place the words * intended for (ju, contracted with the def. art.) — refer-
ence ' before * library *. 12, fiber. 13, fjod^fl tiuiftterifc^ ; and — origin =
and made (verfertigcn) in Asia, all to be placed before * screen *, 14, trdcjt
bic vom Jlaifer cigen()dnbig gefc^riebcnen SBcrte. 15, 2)cm. 16, vcu.
17, = are, fic^ befinben.
Sec/tofi 192.
ROYAL BENEVOLENCE.
Frederick the Great, King of Prussia ^ once rang the belP of his
cabinet; but as nobody answered ^ he opened the door of the ante-
chamber, and there found his page fast asleep * upon a chair °. He went
up to awake him, but, coming nearer, he observed a paper in his pocket,
upon which something was written". This excited his curiosity. He
pulled it out, and found that it was a letter from the page's mother, the
contents of which were nearly as follows^: ** She returned her son many
thanks* for the money he had saved out of his salary and sent to
her, which had proved a very timely assistance ". God would certainly
reward him for it, and if he continued to serve God and his king faith-
fully and conscientiously, he could not fail of success *° and prosperity in
this world "." Upon reading (S. 55, N. i) this, the king stepped softly into
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 1 92. I49
his closet, fetched a rouleau ^^ 0/ ducats, and put it with the letter Into the
#page's pocket (S. 43, N. 9, B). He then rang again till the page awoke
and came into his closet. " You have^^ been asleep, I suppose ?" said the
king. The page could not deny it, stammered out an excuse ^*, put, in
his embarrassment, his hand into his pocket, and felt the rouleau 0/
ducats. He immediately pulled it out, turned ^^ pale, and looked at the
king with tears in his eyes. "What is the matter with you?" said the
king. " Oh ! " replied the page, " somebody has contrived ^° my ruin : I
know nothing of this money." " What God bestows "," resumed the
king, "He bestows in sleep. Send the money to your mother (App. § 5),
give my respects to her ^^, and inform her that I will take care ^® of both
her and you." — W. Buck.
1, ^riebrtc^ htt ©ro^c, ^onig V)on ^prcufen, hjuvbc am 24. Sauuar 1712 \\x
58erlin get^oven unb tt>at bcr So'fjn beg ^onigg r^riebric^ 2BiU)etm I, ber ben ben ^unfteii
imb 2BijTenf(i)aften evgegeBen Siingling oft tV)vannifd^ unb fjavt betjanbelte unb i^xi fettift gegen
feine Jfleigung im 3af)re 1733 mit bet ^rinjeffin (SUfabet^i (S^vi|iine »on ^vaunf^weig;
S3e»ern »ermd()lte. Slac^ bem ^obc feineg SSaterg Bejlieg et am 31. SWai 1740 ben
^fcuf ifc^en X()von, anf bem cv Balb ®elegeul)eit fanb, feine bebeutenben S^atente al^ @taatg;s
maun unb i^elb^ert ju Bet()attgen. 5)ie @efd^i(^te nennt x^n rco'^t mit (Kec^t ben grofteit
Siiriien, ^elb^errnunb ©taat^mann feiner 3eit, unb ats er am 17. 5lugufl 1786 anf feinem
Snftfc^loffe ju (San^fouci ^ubUfanern gum ^rdfibenten bet
a3eveinigten @taaten getral)tt. @(eid^ nad) feiner ^aljl gur i^i'i^rung beg (Staatgruberg
crfotgte ber 2lugbruc^ feneg ^d^ benhxmrbigen SSiirger!riegeg feiteng ber Union unb ber
fi6) em)3orenben Siibjfaaten, todd^tx fiinf 3af)re lang mit moi'berifc^er 3But bag Sanb
gerviittete unb enblidi mit ber gdnglic^en Stbfd)aftung ber laftattcrei unb ber ©eftegung ber
©iibfiaaten enbetc. ,^aum irar er jebod) im SWdrg 1865 gum g\reiten* SD'^ate burc^ un^
getjcure (5timmenme"f)rt)eit »on ber Union gum ^rdfibenten ern?d^lt tt>orben, unb fcium
jraren bie @treithdfte ber ©iibj^aaten auf immer gebrod;en unb »erni(i^tet, a(g ber gefeiertc
©taatgmann am 14. Slprit 1865 bet ®e(egen!)eit einer XtjeateryorjleUung im i^orb'f^en
S^^eater gu 2Caf()ington ber ru(^lofen ^anb eineg »on ber bemofratifd^en ^artei angereigten
SD^^orberg, beg te it)rem guten 2)?anne
cinige SSorjietiungen uber fein langeg Slugbleiben. The words ' einige — $lugbteiben '
must stand at the end of the period. 6, = She told him in a kind, but
(bod|) determined tone. 7, bie ^Jotitif, always used in the Sing. ; into, gu.
8, to keep late hours, fpdt nac!^ -i^aufe fommen. App. § 28 and 30. To drink
at the rum shops, bie 2Bivtgt)dufer befud)en. 9, aufbleiben. 10, = could
not sleep. 11, = I will tell you. 12, = well, then, I will be glad.
13, Liter. = comest thou however not. 14, ing ^^aug taffen. 15, Say
* Now, when it (9llg eg nun) struck ten that night, Mrs. Lincoln with her chil-
dren went to bed, as she had promised. 16, an, with Ace. 17, el)e ;
an — raised = a window was opened up-stairs (oben). 18, Unftnn. 19, @g
ift . . . gefommen. 20, for the Presidency = President. Comp. S. 27, N. 4.
158 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 1 99.
21, = go again and sleep there where you have been drinking ! 22, = and
the window was closed with a slam (triebcr jufletrorfen). 23, to rule = ruler.
24, ^citlamtit ;£)tSradt, tJorb ^eacott^iftelb, geboven in l^onbou am 21. S)c#
icntberi8o4,9ejiovbcn am 19. 9l^ri(i88i aiif femem Saubfi^e ^u^^enben, auggcjeic^netet
£itterat, fcevuljmtcv ©taat^mann, gldnjcnbcr 9iebner unb tangid^rigcr %\x\jxzx ber fonfervos
tiueu Cartel, flc'^t bci fcincn beitjunbernben ganb^Uutcn fe^t nod^ in fo fnf(^em Slnbcnfen,
bap eg bem S^erfaffcr ber Mrjc trcgen crfanbt fein moge, auf feinc gtdnjenbcn ©rfolgc
toeitcrni(^t cinjnge^en. 25, in 33ejng auf; use the attributive construction,
as explained in S. 7, N. 3, A, and S. 48, N. 6. 26, bei bem. 27, on —
were = which were ornamented with. 28, na(^ aufge^obener Xafet. 29, here
iic^ an'eignen. 30, an bag ge|^. 31, 9lnneriong«crfuci, m. 32, It — that,
gceilic^. 33, = and made an energetic (titc^tig) attack upon (auf).
Section 200.
THE POWER OP MUSIC.
On one occasion when young Chopin ^ had been travelling for several
days in the slow fashion of German diligences, he was delighted and
surprised, on stopping at a small post-house, to discover a grand piano-
forte in one of the rooms ^ and still more surprised to find it in tune ' —
thanks, probably, to the musical taste of the postmaster's family. He sat
down instantly and began to improvise in * his peculiarly happy manner.
One by one the travellers were attracted by the unwonted sweet sounds.
One of them even allowed ^ his beloved pipe to go out in his ecstasy,
and the postmaster, his wife, and his two daughters joined the group of
listeners. Unmindful of his audience, of the journey, the lapse of time^
and everything but the music, Chopin continued to play, and his com-
panions '' to listen in rapt attention, when they were suddenly roused by
a stentorian^ voice, which made the windows rattle, calling out': " The
horses are ready, gentlemen I " The postmaster roared out an anathema^**
against the disturber — the postillion — and the passengers cast angry
glances at him. Chopin started from his seat, but was instantly sur-
rounded by his audience, who entreated him to continue. " But we
have been here for some time," said Chopin, consulting his watch, " and
are due in Posen already"." " Stay and play, noble young artist," cried
the postmaster, " I will find you courier's horses if you will only remain
a little longer." "Do be persuaded ^^" added the postmaster's wife,
almost threatening the artist with an embrace ". What could he do but
resume his place at the instrument ? When at last he paused, the ser-
vant appeared with wine ; the host's daughter served the artist first, and
then the travellers, upon which the postmaster proposed a cheer for^* the
musician, in which all joined ^°. The ladies in their gratitude filled the
carriage pockets with the best eatables and wine the house contained ;
and when at last the artist rose to go ^^ his gigantic host seized him in
his arms and triumphantly bore him to " the carriage 1 Long " years
afterwards Chopin would recall (S. loi, N. 22) this little incident with
pleasure, and declare that the plaudits of the press had never given him
more delight than the homage '^^ of these simple music-loving Germans. —
Manchester Tit-Bits.
GERMAN COMPOSITION* SECTION 200. 1 59
1, ^^rebcrtc ?5^tattfo{g (S^^o^in, ber Berii'^nttc^famemvtuofeunb^om^omfi, bcffett
ntelot)ieenrei(^e aTcafurfag, SBa^cr, ITiottunto^, ^a((aben, ^43'olonaifen unb (Stuben feiiien
SfJamen uUxali befannt gemaci^t i)abm, hjuvbe im Satire 1810 ju 3e(ajoiratDola Bei SCar^
fc^au geBoren, unb jlarb am 17. DftoBer 1849 in ^avi^, \vo cr jid) feit bem Sal^re 1831
niebcrgelaffen tjattc. On one occasion, einfi. 2, he — rooms --and was
stopping at (»or) a small post-house, he was delighted and surprised to discover
a grand pianoforte (^tuget, m.) in one of the rooms. 3, to — tune = when
he found it in good tune. 4, ouf; peculiarly = peculiar ; happy = charming.
5, laffen. 6, 3eiti)ertauf, m. 7, Say ' whilst his travelling-companions
listened to him', etc. 8, = mighty. 9, = through which even the
windows rattled (evflirten), and which cried. 10, einen %[nd) au^fto^en.
11, I am due in London already, id) foKte bevcit^ in Sonbon fein. The words
* said — watch ' are best placed after the quotation. 12, fid) iiberreben
lajfen. 13, bte in Ujxtvx ^ntjucfen ben Mnjiler fafl nntarmt l^citte. 14, to
propose a cheer for a person, ein ^^oc^ auf einen au^bvtngcn. 15, here ein?
ftimmen. 16, here jur 5lbmfc. 17, in . . . I;inein. 18, ^Ud) »ielc.
19, bie @f;venBejeu9ungen.
Section 201.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES\
I.
" Well, Robert, where have you been walking ^ this afternoon ?" said a
tutor to one of his pupils, at the close ' of a holiday.
Robert. — I have been to Millthorp-Heath, and so round by * the wind-
mill upon Camp-Mount, and home through the meadows by the river
side.
Tutor. — Well, that is a pleasant round ".
Robert. — I thought^ it very dull, sir; I scarcely met with a single
person. I would much rather have gone ^ along the turnpike-road.
Tutor. — To be sure, if seeing men and horses is your object ^ you
are, indeed, better entertained on the high-road. But did you not see
William (S. 48, N. 2)?
Robert. — We set out together^ ; but he lagged behind in the lane,
and so ^° I walked on and left him.
Tutor. — That was a pity. He would have been company for you.
Robert. — Oh, he is so tedious, always stopping to look at this thing
or that! I would rather walk alone ^^. I dare say he is not come
yet.
Tutor. — Here he comes. Well, William, where have you been ?
William. — Oh, the pleasantest walk^M \ ^^nt ^11 over Millthorp-
Heath, and so up to the mill at the top of the hill, and then down among
the green meadows by the side of the river home again.
Tutor. — Why, that is just the round Robert has been taking, and he
complains of iis dulness and prefers the high-road.
William. — I wonder at that. 1 am sure I hardly took a step that did
.not delight me; and I have brought home my handkerchief full of
curiosities ^^
l6o GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 201.
Tutor.— Suppose", then, you give us an account of what amused
you so much. I fancy it will ^^ be as new to Robert as to me.
William. — I will do it readily. The lane leading to the heath, you
know, is close ^® and sandy, so I did not mind it much, but made the
best of my way ". However, I spied a curious thing enough '^ in the
hedge. It was an old crab-tree, out of which grew a bunch of some-
thing green ^^, quite different from the tree itself. Here is a branch
of it.
Tutor. — Ah I this is "mistletoe, a plant of great fame ^° for the use
made of it by the Druids of old ^^ in their religious rites and incantations.
It bears '^^ a very slimy, white berry, of which bird-lime may be made,
whence *' its Latin name " viscum." It is one of those plants which do
not grow in the ground by a root of their own ^*, but fix themselves upon
other plants ; whence ^^ they have been humourously ^^ styled " parasit-
ical," as being hangers on, or dependents. It was the mistletoe of the
oak that the Druids particularly honoured.
1, obcr ©:l)en imb nicfet @ef)en. 2, walking, aufbcincm (^vajtergangc. Use the
2nd pers. sing, when the tutor addresses the boy, but the 3rd pers. pi. when
the boy addresses the tutor. 3, am Slbcub. 4, and — by = t)anu fcci . . .
voriiber. Camp-Mount, ber Sagcrbetg; Millthorp-Heath, tie SDHflt^orper Jpcibe.
5, =tourorwalk. 6, = 1 have found. 7, Use the Pluperfect Subj.
accord, to App. § 32 ; along — road, bie (SfiauiTcc. 8, = if you want to see
men and horses. — I am better entertained there, ic^ njevbe mic| bort bcffer amii;
fieren. 9, = We went away from home together. 10, = therefore; and
left him = and troubled no more about him (fid^ iim ciiieu f ummern). 11, 3(^
getje oicl liebev aKein. I dare say, h?c^(, adv., to be placed after the auxiliary.
12, =0h, it was a splendid walk! All over = through the \Thole of; and so =
then ; and then = and from there; among = through. 13, = curious things.
14, 9lun. 15, = It will certainly. 16, einge).>fcvc£|t. 17, so — way = and
therefore I left almost everything unnoticed there and went on as fast as pos-
sible. 18, " something most curious, 19, a — green = a green plant. •
20, = a well (al(gcmeiu) known plant. 21, = the old Druids ; in, bci.
22, = has. 23, luib ba^er. 24, which — own, ivelcbe nic^t in bcr @rbe
lt>urjc(n. 25, \veg()alb. 26, fd;erjl)afteilT)eifc j parasitical, ^avafiten;
as — dependents, ba3 i^eif t ©c^marofeer ober Slbtjaugliucjc.
Section 202.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OB, EYES AND NO EYES.
II.
William. — A little further on I saw a green woodpecker * fly to a tree,
and run up the trunk like a cat.
Tutor. — That was ' to seek /^r insects which live in the bark of trees.
For that purpose the woodpeckers bore holes into the bark with their
strong bills, whereby they do ' a great deal of damage to the trees.
William. — What beautiful birds they are * I
Tutor. — Yes ; the woodpecker has, from its colour and size, been
called the English parrot (S. 4, N. 4, man).
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 203. t6l
William. — When I got upon the heath, how charming it was** I The
air was so fresh, and the prospect on every side ^ so free and unbounded 1
The heath was all covered with gay flowers, many of which I had never
observed before. There were'^ at least three different kinds (S. 36,
N. 7 A) of heath (I have them in my handkerchief here) and gorse, and
broom, and bell-flowers ; and many others of all colours, of which I will
beg you presently to tell me the names ^.
Tutor. — That I will do readily.
William. — I saw, too, several birds that were new to me. There was
a pretty grayish one, of the size of a lark, that was hopping about some
great stones ; and when he flew he showed a great deal of white above
his tail ^.
Tutor. — That was a wheat-ear ^°. They are reckoned very delicious
birds to eat ^^ and frequent the open downs in ^^ Sussex, and some other
counties, in great number.
William. — There was a flock of lapwings upon a marshy part of the
heath ^^ that amused me much, As I came near them, some of them
kept flying round and round ", just over my head, and crying, " Pewit,"
"Pewit," so distinctly, one might almost fancy they spoke ^^ I thought
I should have caught ^® one of them, for he flew as if one of his wings
was broken (App. § 33), and often tumbled close to the ground; but as
I came near, he always contrived ^"^ to get away.
Tutor. — Ha, ha! you were finely taken in, then^M This was all an
artifice of the bird's, to entice you away from its nest, for the lapwings
build upon the bare ground, and their nests would easily be observed,
did they not draw ofl"^' the attention of intruders, by their loud cries and
counterfeit lameness.
William. — I wish I had known that^", for the bird led me a long
chase ^^ often over shoes in water, i However, this was the cause [bat)on,
5. 161, N. 21] of my falling in with^^ an old man and a boy, who were
cutting ^^ and piling up turf for fuel. I had a great deal of talk with
them about the manner of preparing the turf, and the price it sells at ^*.
They gave me, too, a creature I nevbv saw before — a young viper, which
they had just killed. I have seen several common snakes, but this is
thicker in proportion, and of a darker colour than they are.
1, @runfpe(^t, m. ; to, auf. 2, = That he did. 3, jufugen. 4, = They
(ds) are really charming birds ! 5, = But upon the heath it was charming !
6, nad) alien ©eiten :^in ; all = quite. 7, de waxm bort. 8, beven ^amtn id)
tttir nod^ oon 3{)nen evHtteu tvill. 0, and — tail, unb Beim gliegen uber bent
@d)it)at^e \m^ befiebert wax. 10, ®tc{n)?acfev, m. ; or 3Ceipe{(^en, n. 11, They —
eat = These birds are very much valued (fi^d^en) on account of their flesh.
12, = and live in the downs of. 13, = In the marshy part of the heath I
saw a flock (@c^ar) 0/* lapwings. 14, round and round, imttter im ^reifc
Ijeium. 15, one — spoke, baf ic^ faft Ira^nte, fte fpved^en ju tjoreit. 16, = I
should be able to catch. 17, getang c6 if)m immev. 18, bann Bift bu f^cii
angefut)rt tuorben ! 19, did — off", fui^ten fte uid^t . . . ba»on abjulcnfen, in-
truders = unbidden guests. 20, 2)ag ()dtte i^ »orf)cr mjTen foflen. 21, = for
the bird caused (yeranlaffen) me to run a long time after it (t)intev einem Ijeijagen).
22, of — with = that I met. 23, jledjen, str. v. 24, about — at,
iihix bie SuBereituug^iveife unb bie SSerfauf^pveife be^ Slorfeg.
vol. IV. M
j6% GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 203;
Section 203.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES.
III.
Tutor. — True. Vipers frequent ^ those turfy, boggy grounds ^ pretty
much, and I have known several turf-cutters bitten by them.
William. — They are very venomous, are they not ?
Tutor. — Enough so^ to make their wounds painful and dangerous,
though they seldom prove fatal.
William. — Well, I then took my course * up to the windmill on the
mount. I climbed up the steps of the mill, in order to get a better view
of the country round ^ What an extensive prospect 1 I counted fifteen
church steeples ; I saw several gentlemen's houses ' peeping out from
the midst of green woods and plantations'^; and I could trace the wind-
ings^ of the river all along the low grounds, till it was lost behind a ridge
of hills ^. But I will tell you what I mean to do ^°, if you will give
me leave.
Tutor.— \Vhat is that"?
William. — I will go again and take with me Carey's county map *^
by which I shall probably be able to make out most of the places.
Tutor. — You shall have it; and I will go with you, and take my
pocket spying-glass.
William. — I shall be very glad of that. Well, a thought struck me,
that, as the hill is called Camp-Mount, there might probably be some
remains of ditches and mounds " with which I have read that camps
were surrounded. And I really believe I discovered something of that
sort " running one side of the mount.
Tutor. — Very likely you might ^^ I know antiquaries have described
such remains as existing there, which some suppose to be Roman, others
Danish ^^ We will examine them when we go.
William.— From the hill I went straight down to the meadows below,
and walked on the side of a brook that runs " into the river. It ^* was
all bordered with reeds and tall flowering-plants (S. i6, N. lo), quite
different from those I had seen on the heath. As I was getting down**
the bank to reach one of them, I heard something plunge into the water
near me. It was a large water-rat, and I saw it swim over to the other
side, and go '^^ into its hole. There were '^^ a great many large dragon-
flies all about the stream. I caught one of the finest, and have him here
in a leaf. But how I longed to catch a bird that I saw hovering '^^ over
the water, and every now and then darting into it 1 It was all over a
mixture of the most beautiful green and blue, with some orange colour ^.
It was somewhat less than a thrush, and had a large head and bill, and
a short tail.
1, =live in. 2, (5^egenbcn. 3, = venomous enough. 4, = there-
upon I went. 5, I had a fine view of the country round, \^ founte bie
Umcje(\enb gut uBevHicfen. 6, I)errfc^aftlic^c J&aufer. 7, ?parfaulaudchu(fcn, m.
10, = will do. Supply * baju ' after * leave*. U, SBae beun ? 12, i8e*
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 203. 1 63
givf^farte ; by which = by (mit) the help of which ; * to make out ', here Bejltmmcn,
w. V. tr. ; places, Dvtfcf)aften. 13, Well — mounds. This passage may be
construed thus : ' Now, since (!I)a nun) the hill is called Camp-Mount, a thought
struck me that there are (ft^ befinben) probably some remains of ditches and
mounds ((SrbitaK, m) '. I have read = as I have read. 14, ettttag terartigeg ;
running one side = on the one side. 15, =That is quite (gerne) possible.
16, to be — Danish, baf jte rcmifd)en, anbere aber, bap fte bdnif^en Urf^jvungg jtnb.
17, ftc^ ergtepen. 18, = The brook ; bordered = overgrown, Betoaci^fen.
19, ^inunterjieigen ; to reach - to pluck. 20, = creep. Read S. 78, N. 14, B.
21, (§e loaren bort, after which place the words 'all — stream', am S3ad^c.
22, uml)evfl:iegen ; every — then, bann unb \mxxn ; * to dart ', here {)inunterfd)ief en ;
into it = into the same. 23, It — colour = His plumage (©ejiteber) con-
sisted of (aug) a mixture of the finest green and blue with a small addition
(3ufa^, m.) of orange colour (Drangengelb).
Section 204.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OB EYES AND NO EYES.
IV.
Tutor. — I can tell you what that bird was — a kingfisher, the cele-
brated halcyon of the ancients, about which so many tales are told. It
lives on^ fish, which it catches in the manner you saw. It builds in holes
on the banks, and is a shy, retired ^ bird, never to be seen far from the
stream it inhabits.
William. — I must try to get another sight of him, for I never saw
(S. 48, N. 2) a bird that pleased me so much. Well, I followed this little
brook till it entered^ the river, and then took* the path that runs along
the bank. On the opposite side, I observed several little birds running
along the bank, and making a piping noise ^ They were ® brown and
white, and about as big as a snipe.
Tutor. — I suppose they [eg] were sand-pipers '^; one of the numerous
family of birds (S. 36, N. 7, A) that get their living^ by wading among
the shallows and picking up worms and insects.
William. — There were a great many swallows, too, sporting ® above
the surface of the water, that entertained me with their motions. Some-
times^^ they dashed down into the stream"; sometimes they pursued
one another so quickly, that the eye could scarcely follow them. In one
place, where a steep sand-bank rose high above the river, I observed
many of them go in and out of holes with which the bank was bored
full^^
Tutor. — Those [©aS] were sand-martins", the smallest of our species
of swallows. They are of a mouse-colour above, and white beneath.
They ^* make their nests, and bring up their young, in these holes, which
run a great depth, and by their situation are secure from all plunderers.
William. — A little further I saw a man in a boat, who was catching
eels in an odd way ^^ He had a long pole with broad iron prongs ^^ at
the end ; just like Neptune's trident ^^ only there were five prongs instead
of three. This he pushed straight down into the mud, in the deepest
parts of the river, and fetched up the eels sticking between the prongs.
Tutor. — I know the method. It is called the spearing of eels ^\
M 2
164 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 204.
William. — While I was looking at him, a heron came flying over my
head, with his large flagging wings. He alighted ^^ at the next turn of
the river, and I crept softly behind the bank to watch his motions. He
had waded into the water as far as his long legs would allow him "^^ and
was standing there motionless with his neck drawn in, looking ^^ intently
on the stream. Presently he darted his long bill as quick as lightning
into the water, and drew out a fish, which he swallowed. I saw him
catch another in the same manner. He then took alarm ^^ at some noise I
made, and flew away slowly to a wood at some distance, where he
settled.
1, ijon ; in — saw, auf bie »on bit Beobac^tetc SCBetfe. 2, btc ©infamfcit ticBenb ;
never — inhabits = which goes never far away (fi(i^ cntfernen) from the stream
(©elttdffer, n.) where it has its nest. 3, ftc^ ergiepen, str. v. refl. 4, Betvetcii,
str. V. tr. 5, running — noise, am Ufer entlan^ Ijupftn inib ^feifen. 6, = looked;
and = and were. 7, ©tranbtdufer. 8, * to get one's living*, here ftc^ feinc
9fiat)run9 ttcvfc^affen. Read S. 87, N. 6 ; among the shallows, an ben feic^tcn @te((cn ;
to wade, um^cv'it?atcn ; and picking up = in order to pick up. 9, ' to sport ',
here feiii ^pid tveikn ; that = and. 10, balb. 11, = water. 12, I —
full = I observed that many of them crept into the holes that were in great
number (SDJengc, f.) bored (t)iiiciu'bof)ren) into the bank, but then (baim aber)
came out again. 13, Ufevfc^tralben. 14, Commence this period with
* In these holes — plunderers* ; to make a nest, cin JJleft bauen ; to bring up the
young, bie 3ungen gvop jie^en. 15, auf \i>unbfr(ict)e 2Beife. 16, 3iiife, f.
17, 2)rei^acf, m. 18, bag Slalftec^en. 19, fic^ auf bie Srbe niebevlafTen.
20, Insert the grammatical object eg before 'him'. 21, =and looked in-
tently (mit gefpannter Slufmerffamfeit) down upon the water {anf . . . l^eiuiebcr).
22, to take alarm at something, 'Dmd) tttoaS in gurd^t gefe^t iuecben.
Section 205.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES.
Tutor. — Probably his nest was there, for herons build upon the loftiest
tree they can find, and sometimes in society together, like rooks. Form-
erly, when these birds were valued for the amusement of hawking \ many
gentlemen had their heronries ^ and a few are still remaining.
William.— I think (S. 64, N. 11) they are the largest wild birds
we have.
Tutor. — They are of great length and spread of wing', but their
bodies are comparatively small.
William. — I then turned homeward, across the meadows, where I
stopped awhile, to look at* a large flock of starlings, which kept flying
about at no great distance. I could not tell at first what to make of
tliem ", for they rose altogether from the ground as thick as a swarm of
bees, and formed themselves into a kind ** of black cloud, hovering over
the field. After taking a short round '^, they settled again, but presently
rose in the same manner. I dare say * there were hundreds of them.
Tutor. — Perhaps so'; for in the fenny counties their flocks are so
numerous '° as to break down whole acres of reeds, by settling on them ".
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 305. 1 65
This disposition ^^ of starlings to fly in close swarms was remarked even
by Homer, who compares the foe (S. 48, N. 6) flying from one of his
heroes to a cloud of starlings retiring dismayed at the approach of
the hawk.
William. — After I had left the meadows, I crossed*^ the corn-fields
in the way to our house, and passed close by a deep marl-pit. Looking
into it, I saw, on one of the sides, a cluster of what " I took to be shells ;
and upon going down, I picked up a clod of marl ^^, which was quite
full of them ; but how sea-shells can get there, I cannot imagine.
Tutor. — I do not wonder at your surprise, since many philosophers
have been much perplexed to account for the same appearance ^^ It is
not uncommon to find ^^ great quantities of shells and relics of marine
animals, even in the bowels of high mountains, very remote from
the sea.
William. — I got " to the high field next to our house just as the sun
was setting, and I stood looking at it till it was quite lost ^'. What a
glorious sight ! The clouds were tinged with purple, crimson, and
yellow of all shades and hues, and the clear sky varied from blue to a
fine green at the horizon. But how large the sun appears just as it sets !
I think it seems twice as big as when it is over-head.
1, for — hawking = on account of the amusement which they afforded
through hawking (bte ^alfeuiagb). 2, €?ei()er|!anb, m. 3, They — wirtg =
They have very large, long wings. 4, = to observe ; to keep flying about,
um()evjiie9en ; at — distance, in nur gertnger (Eiitfernung »on mir. 5» = I could
not recognise them at first. * To rise ', here ftc^ in bie Suft cni^iorfc^linngen ;
thick, bid)t. 6, a kind, gteid^fam; hovering — field, dU [it nUx bcm g^elbe :^in
unb f)er fi^ltteBten. 7, = After they had been flying about /or a short time.
8, * I dare say ' may be briefly rendered by the adv. gelvif . Read S. 104, N. 19.
8, ^ag ifl tcic^t wcgli(^. 10, = they exist (ttor^anben fein) in such masses ; as
to = that they. 11, = when they settle upon the same (to agree with 'reeds').
12, = peculiarity. 13, = I went through the corn-fields home again.
14, a — what, einc jufanttttcngeBaHte SPtaffe, ireld^e. 15, Nom. ein ^Iutn))en (m.)
SD^erget; of them = of shells. 16, since — appearance, ba fd^on i)iele ^Jlatuv*
forfiter fid) uber bic @r!(dmng biefer @rf(^einung ben .^opf ^txhxo^m l^aben. 17, = that
one finds. 18, gclangen ; to, auf ; high field, ^Inl^o^e, f. 19, = till it had
entirely disappeared at the (am) horizon.
Section 206.
THE TWO SCHOOLBOYS, OR EYES AND NO EYES.
VI.
Tutor. — It does so^ ; and you may probably have observed the same
apparent enlargement of the moon at its rising ^
William. — I have^; but pray what is the reason of this?
Tutor. — It is an optical deception, depending upon principles which I
cannot well explain to you, till you know more of that branch ^science.
But what a number of new ideas this afternoon's walk has aff"orded you.
I do not wonder that you found it amusing ^, and it has been very in-
structive too. Did you see (S. 48, N. 2) nothing of all these sights,
Robert?
l65 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 206,
Robert. — I saw some of them, but I did not take particular notice
of them.
Tutor. — Why not ?
Robert. — I do not know. I did not care about them ; and I made
the best of my way home ^
Tutor. — That would have been (App. § 33) right, if you had been
sent on a message^; but as you only walked for amusement', it would
have been wiser to have sought out as many sources of it as possible '.
But as it is ® : one man walks through the world with the eyes open, and
another with them shut, and^° upon this difference depends all the" supe-
riority the one acquires above the other. I have known sailors ^^ who
have been in all the quarters of the world, and could tell you nothing
but" the signs of the tippling houses they frequented^* in dif-
ferent ports, and the price and quality of the liquor. On the other
hand^'', a Franklin could not even cross the Channel without making
some observation useful to mankind ^^ While many a vacant, thought-
less youth is whirled throughout Europe", without gaining ^^ a single
idea worth crossing a street for ^^ the observing eye and inquiring mind
find matter of improvement and delight ^^ in every ramble in town or
country. Do you then, William, continue to make use of your eyes ; and
you, Robert, learn that eyes were given you to use. — Dr. Aikin.
1, = Quite right. 2, of — rising, kirn Slufgangc beg aWonfceg. 3, = Yes.
4, = interesting. 5, and — home = and went home as quickly as possible.
e, if — message, l^dtte man bic^ au0gefd>icft, urn eiue SSeforgung ju cevri^ten. 7, to
walk for amusement, eiuen (Epajiergang madden. 8, to — possible, ^dttejl bu
benfetben fo »iet \xi\i tnoglic!^ au^^^ubeuten gefucfit. 9, @3 ifl aber nun einmal fo ; one
man, bcr eine ; another, ber anbeve. 10, and just (gcrabc). 11, = the great.
12, (Sd^ijfet. 13, and — but, benno(f> aber von nic^t^ anberem ju erjdfjicn n?u^ten,
<3iS& toon. 14, =- visited. 15, Slnbererfeit^ f)ingegen. 16, Use the attribu-
tive construction. 17, ganj @uvo)ja burc^jiiegt. 18, ftd^ an'eigncn.
19, worth — for = for (tvegen) which it would have been worth while to go over
the street. 20, jur.. S3eie^vung unb jutti ©enujfc. The words * in every
ramble ' must be placeJPafter * mind ',
Section 207.
THE KING AND THE MILLER.
I.
In the reign ^ of Frederick the Great (see S. 192, N. i), king of Prussia,
there was^ a mill near Potsdam which obstructed the view from the
windows of the palace of Sans Souci. Annoyed by this drawback to his
favourite residence ^ the king sent * to the owner of the mill inquiring
the nrj ye for which he would sell it. "For no Drice ." was the reply of
the sturdy Prussian ; and in a moment of anger the monarch gave orders*
that the mill should be pulled down. " The king may do this," said the
miller, quietly folding his arms; "but there are (S. 82, N. 7) laws in
Prussia, and he will find them out'". Forthwith he commenced a law-
suit against the monarch, the issue of which was ^ that the court gave a
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 207. 167
decision against His Majesty, compelling him * to rebuild the mill, and
in addition ^ to pay a large sum of money as a compensation for the
injury he had done". The king felt mortified (S. 87, N. 6) at having
been worsted by one of his subjects, but had the magnanimity to say,
addressing " his courtiers : " I am glad to find that there are just laws
and upright judges in my kingdom who are bold enough to decide
against me when they think I am in the wrong." Many years after-
wards (App. § 14), a descendant of the honest miller, who had in due
course of time succeeded to the hereditary possession of the property ^^,
found himself involved in pecuniary difficulties that had become
insurmountable.
1, = At (gu) the time of the reign. See S. 53, N. 9. 2, there — Potsdam =
stood near (bet) Potsdam a mill. 3, 2)ev feinem SieHinggfd^lolTe I)ievbuvc^
cmadjffube S^iac^teil werbrop ben Jlontg fe:§r. 4, = and he sent. 5, = the
order. 6, = and he will soon convince himself of it. 7, the — was,
ivelc&er bamtt cnbete. 8, = and compelled him. 9, and in addition, imb uoc^
obenbrein ; sum — compensation, (Sntfd)dbigunQgfuntmc, f. 10, Supply ' to the
miller'. 11, =to. 12, Liter. = who in course of time and through
inheritance had come into the possession of the mill.
Section 208.
THE KING- AND THE MILLER.
II.
In his distress he wrote to Frederick William IV, who was at that time
king of Prussia, reminding him of the refusal experienced by Frederick the
Great at the hands ^ of his ancestor the miller, and stating ^ that ^ if His
Majesty now wished to obtain possession of the property, he would, in
his present embarrassed circumstances, most wiUingly dispose of the mill.
The king immediately wrote, with his own hand *, the following reply :
" My Dear Neighbour,
I cannot allow you to sell the mill. It must remain in the pos-
session of your family as long as one of your descendants survives ^, for
the building belongs ^ to the history of Prussia, and is a standing"^ memo-
rial of the integrity of our judges and the impartiality of our laws. I am
sorry, however, to hear that you are in straitened circumstances, and
therefore send you six thousand dollars * to pay off your debts, and hope
the sum will be sufficient for the purpose. Consider me ^ always
Your affectionate^" neighbour,
Frederick William."
The mill still stands, and is occupied by the ^^ descendants of the reso-
lute miller who had the fortitude to thwart the despotic monarch in his
desire ^2 to improve the prospect from the windows of his palace. —
Chambers's " Short Stories."
1, reminding — hands = reminded him of the refusal (abfc^tagtgc Slntirort)
which Fred, the Gr. had received at the hands (feiteu^). 2, = stated.
3, = that he would in his present embarrassed circumstances most willingly
sell the mill, if, etc. ' To obtain possession of the property ', here ba^ 33e::
ft^tf)um fdujiic^ evivevben, 4, with — hand, eigenfjdnbig, adj., which use after
l68 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 2o8.
'following*. 5, no(!^ am Ccben fein. 6, an'gcf)oren. 7, Btcibenb, adj.; to,
on. 8, %\)o((cnl), adj.
11, = and is still in the possession of the. 12, to thwart — desire = to
oppose (jic^ txmx @ac^e ioiberfe^eu) the desire of the despotic king.
Section 209.
. A PKIEND IN NEED (S. 3, N. 2).
I.
One wet wintry night, when a gentleman was hurrying along^ one of the
crowded thoroughfares of London, his attention was arrested by a lean,
hungry-looking dog which rushed past him. He observed that it had a
collar 2 round its neck, to which a basket was attached. If it was (App.
§ 36) a dog that ran on errands ^ he thought that surely its owner would
feed it better, and its ribs would not look so spare. Thinking that there
was some mystery connected with the animal*, he resolved to follow it ".
After a ^ time it turned up a narrow lane into a stable-yard, where some
coachmen and hostlers were loitering about. It then got up on its hind-
legs, and began walking about in circles'^. The bystanders, surprised
at this strange proceeding, formed round in a ring and looked on. It
walked five times round, standing ^ erect, and looking fixedly before it
like a soldier on duty ^, evidently doing its utmost^" to make the company
laugh. After taking a short rest, it began its performance " again, but
this time on its fore-feet, pretending to stand ^^ on its (S. 43, N. 9) head.
Tiring, of this ^^, it lay down in the middle of the ring, feigning to be
dead ^*, and going through all the convulsions of a dying dog, breathing
heavily, panting, suffering the lower jaw to fall ^^, and then turning over
motionless. It did this so well, that a woman in the crowd exclaimed :
" Poor beast 1 " and drew her hand across her eyes ^^ Having lain still
a minute, with its eyes closed, it got up and shook itself, to show that
the performance " was over. It then went round begging on its hind-
legs, standing ^^ a little while before each of the spectators, and earnestly
watching ^® to see whether they put their hands into their pockets or not.
The basket round its neck had a slit in the lid, into which the coppers
might be dropped.
1, to hurry along, burci^ei'tert, insep. comp. w. v. Place 'one — night' after
'gentleman'; wet = rainy; thoroughfares = streets. 2, here J&al^banb, n. ;
round its neck, urn. 3, to run on errands, 33efor9unQcu auS'rid^teu ; and —
spare = and it would not look so dreadfully lean. 4, = Since the matter
appeared very mysterious (vdtfelljalft) to him. 5, =the animal. 6, fuvj ;
turned up = ran into ; into = which led to. 7, im .crtc9eiit)cit
fccfinbcn. 4, ^avtie, f. ; to put up to auction, to public sale, juv JBecjleicieiinig
tviiu^ei!, untcr ben Js>^"nn«t Iningcn, or jum cffcntlid^cn a^evfauf ftcllen. 6, bee
Peijibietcnbe ; to, an. 6, I)cvum'bve{)cn ; considering = and considered (ubcrs
le'cjen, insep. comp. w. v.). 7, »onflatten QeT)cn. 8, = of all the per-
sons present (bic *^lmvcfenbcn) ; toward, a\i\. 8, Finish first the clause ' who
refrained from bidding against me *, and then commence the otlier, and use
this construction in all cases where it can possibly be employed.
10, We are anxious. to buy the property, mx mod^teii tai 58cfiUtum genie fauftii.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 211. 171
11, to knock down an article to the last bidder, cinen Slvtifel bem jitte^t SBietcnbett
gu'f^lagen. 12, to get home, na^ ^aufe fcl)affen; 13, (SvlDdguug, f.
14, = but since I had not yet any experience in such matters, I determined,
etc. 15, so, after == and when. 16, =that I sat up. 17, =and
turned over (buv^blat'tern, insep. comp. w. v.). 18, Siefc^aberei (f.) fiir ©ticker.
19, =to become a Christian Minister (©etftli^cr). 20, Supply 'of vanity'
here. 21, = the ; of, ju, contracted with the Dat. of the def. art.
22, = a pleasure (®enuf , m.) 23, = of India.
Section 212.
THE GREEN VAULTS IN DRESDEN*.
Dresden, May ii, 1845.
We were fortunate in seeing the Green Vaults or " Das griine Gewolbe,"
a collection of jewels and costly articles \ unsurpassed in Europe (S. 7,
N. 3, A). Admittance is only granted to six persons at a time, who pay
a fee ^ of two thalers. The customary way is to employ a " valet de
place ^," who goes round from one hotel to another, until he has col-
lected the required number, when ^ he brings them together and conducts
them to the keeper who has charge of the treasures. The first hall into
which we were ushered contained works in bronzed They were all
small, and chosen with regard to their artistical value. The next room
contained statues, and vases ornamented with reliefs, in ivoryY The
most remarkable work was the fall of Lucifer and his angels, containing
ninety-two figures in all ^, carved out of a single piece 0/ ivory sixteen
inches high ! It was the work of an Italian monk, and cost him many
years of hard labour ''.
However costly the contents of these halls (S. 27, N. 7), they were
only an introduction to those which followed. Each one exceeded the
other in splendour and costliness. The walls were covered to the ceiling
with rows of goblets, vases, etc., of pohshed jasper, agate, and lapis
lazuH. We saw two goblets, each prized at six thousand thalers, made
of gold and precious stones; also the ereat pearl called the Spanish
Dwarf, nearly as large as a pullet's egg f globes and vases cut entirely
out of />^^ mountain crystal; magnificent Nuremberg watches and clocks,
and a great number of figures made ingeniously of rough ^ pearls and
diamonds. The seventh hall contains the coronation robes of Augustus II,
king of Poland, and many costly specimens of carving in wood^. A
cherry-stone is shown in a glass case, which has one hundred and twenty-
five faces, all perfectly finished, carved upon it ^°. The next room we
entered sent back a glare of splendour ^^ that perfectly dazzled us. It
was all gold, diamond, ruby, and sapphire. Every case sent out a glow
and a glitter that it seemed like a cage of imprisoned lightnings ^\
Wherever the eye turned it was met by a blaze of broken rainbows.
They were there by hundreds ^^, and every gem was a iortune. We here
saw the largest known onyx, nearly seven inches long, and four inches
broad ! One of the most remarkable works is the throne and court of
Aurungzebe, the Indian king, by Dinglinger, a celebrated goldsmith of
the last century. It contains one hundred and thirty-two figures, all
172 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 212.
of enamelled gold, and each one most perfectly and elaborately finished.
It was purchased by Prince Augustus for fifty-eight thousand thalers,
which was not an exorbitant sum, considering that the making of it occu-
pied Dinglinger and thirteen workmen for seven years 1
It is almost impossible to estimate the value of the treasures these
halls contain. That of gold and jewels alone must be many millions of
dollars, and the amount of labour expended' on these toys of royalty is
incredible. — Bayaed Taylor, " Views Afoot."
1, Jtcfllic^Fetten. 2, (5intritt5getb, n. 3, Generally one engages a * valet
de place ' (eiu ScfinBebientev, Nom.). 4, = and then. 5, 58rci^cfv-id>en.
e, im CDanjen. 7, hard labour, augeflrenfltc Slrbcit. 8, here ungci'd^liifcn.
9, ^o^fcf)ni^evcicn. 10, which — it = upon which are carved 1 2 5 faces,
which are all perfectly finished (aii^c\cbi(bet). 11, triet>evftra()ltc »on eiiicm
]^crr(td)en ©(au^c ; * perfectly ', here formlic^. 12, 9lu« iebem ^aftcii ciflra^ltc
fo tticl ®(anj uub 8id)t, ba^ e« f(^ien, eg cutfitomten it;m taufenb 58li^e. 13, = There
were (@^ wnxtn bort) hundreds of gems.
Section 213.
THE DEATH OF LITTLE ITELL.
She was dead. No sleep (S. 27, N. 7) so beautiful and calm, so free
from trace ^ of pain, so fair to look upon. She seemed^ a creature fresh
from the hand of God, and waiting for the breath of life ; not one who
had lived and suffered death. Her couch was dressed with here and
there some winterberries and green leaves, gathered in a spot she had
been used to favour. " When I die, put near me something ' that has
loved the light, and had the sky above it always." These were her
words.
She was dead. Dear (S. 10, N. 2), gentle, patient, noble Nell was
dead. Her litde bird— a poor, slight thing*, the pressure of the finger
would have crushed — was stirring nimbly in its cage; and the strong
heart of its child-mistress '^ was mute and motionless for ever I Where
were the traces of her early cares, her sufferings and fatigues? All gone*.
Sorrow was dead, indeed in her*^; but peace and perfect happiness were
born^ — imaged in her tranquil beauty and (S. 10, N. 9) profound
repose.
And still her former self lay there, unaltered in this change '. Yes, the
old fireside ° had smiled upon that same sweet face ; it had passed like
a dream through haunts of misery and care — at the door of the poor
schoolmaster on the summer evening, before the furnace-fire upon the
cold wet night, at the still bedside of the dying boy", there had been
the same mild and loving look. So shall we know the angels in their
majesty after death. — Charles Dickens, " The Old Curiosity Shop."
1, «=from the traces. 2, = seemed to be a creature (Jtveatur, f.). Fresh —
iGod, erfl fccbcii auS ber .^^anb ®ottc5 ()evvori3Ci3aii(icn, which use attributively before
* creature '; breath, Dttm, m. 3, bann gebct mir tt\va& mit. 4, cin urmfcj
ligeg flcineg iDiiifl. 5, finblidje ^errin, Nom. 6, 9lllc« itar vcrfc^uniiibcii.
7, war in i^r erflorBcn ; were born, waven bafuv rviebet in ij|t crjlanben ; imaged in,
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 2 1 3. 1 73
imc e3 . . . Be^eugtc; her tranquil beauty = her tranquil beautiful face (9lntlt^,
n.). 8, Liter. = And still (beuticd)) lay her former self in this change (SSeviraubs
lung) unaltered there. 9, bei- I)du3(id)e ^ert) ; ' to smile upon ', here aiif
it\ioaav ber 33egninbcr be^ brittifi^en Oiei^c^ in Snbicn. 2, @^ crijUeren nod).
3, ) ; to calculate, berec^nen (aiif) ; read S. 87, N. 6. 3, = to.
4, Insert here the adv. noc^. 5, = possibility ; of, Won, followed by the plural.
6, = put up, auffteffen. 7, = had been filled. 8, The Emperor is said
to be dead, ber ^aifer foK tot fein. 9, against — charged = who were (iuateu)
accused (befc^ulbigen) of such a deed. 10, = which were carried away by
(S. io6, N. 23) the wind in great number (3Wenge, f.}. 11, =and he ex-
claimed involuntarily (umtjiUtiirlicI)).
Section 220.
THE BURNING OF MOSCOW.
IV.
The equinoctial gales rose higher and higher^ upon the third night,
and extended the flames, with which there was no longer any human
VOL. IV. N
178 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 220.
power of contending ^ At the dead' hour of midnight, the Kremlin
itself was found to be on fire. A soldier of the Russian police, charged
with being incendiary *, was turned over '^ to the summary ' vengeance of
the Imperial Guard. Bonaparte was then, at length, persuaded, by the
entreaties of all around him, to relinquish his quarters in the Kremlin, to
which, as the visible mark of his conquest, he had seemed to cling with
the tenacity of a lion holding a fragment of his prey. He encountered both
difficulty and danger in retiring from the palace, and, before he could gain
the city gate, he had to traverse with his suite streets arched with fire ^ and
in which the very air they breathed was suffocating. At length he gained
the open country, and took up his abode in a palace of the Czar's called
Petrowsky, about a French league from the city. As he looked back on
the fire, which, under the influence of the autumnal wind, swelled and
surged round the Kremlin, like an infernal ocean around a sable Pande-
monium ^ he could not suppress the ominous expression : " This bodes
us great misfortune I"
The fire continued to triumph unopposed, and consumed in a few days
what it had cost centuries to raise. "Palaces and temples," says a
Russian author, " monuments of art, and miracles of luxury, the remains
of ages which had passed away, and those which had been the creation of
yesterday ; the tombs of ancestors, and the nursery-cradles ® of the present
generation, were indiscriminately destroyed. Nothing was left of Moscow
save the remembrance of the city, and the deep resolution to avenge
its fall."
The fire raged till the 19th of September with unabated violence, and
then began to slacken for want of fuel. It is said four-fifths of this great
city were laid in ruins. — Sir Walter Scott.
1, immcv j^drfer itevben ; upon = during, with which commence the period.
2, there was no longer ... of contending = could no longer contend.
3, = quiet. 4, This man is charged with being incendiary, man befc^ulbigt
biefcn 3Wann ber ©ranbj^iftung. 5, uberc\e'bcn, with Dat. 6, here = im-
mediate, fofovtii^, adj. 7, uBer bcnen »ou beibcn (Seiteu eiu ^fUf'^ntecr cmpcrfci^hig.
8, urn cin fc^warjc^ ^anbdmonium (ein 2)dmonentempel; bag Oieic^ U6 ©atan^).
8, bie ©ebuvtsjidttfii, N. Pi.
Sech'on 221.
CHBISTMAS IN QEBMANY.
I.
Frankfort-on-the-Maine, Jan. 2, 1845.
We have lately ^ witnessed the most beautiful and interesting of all
German festivals — Christmas — which is celebrated in a style truly
characteristic of the ^ people. About the commencement of December/
the Christmarkt, or fair, was opened in the Romerberg', and has
continued to the present time. The booths, decorated with green
boughs, were filled with toys of various kinds, among which, during
the first days, the figure of St. Nicholas was conspicuous. There were *
bunches of wax candles to illuminate '' the Christmas tree, gingerbread
with printed mottoes in poetry ", beautiful litde earthenware, basket-work,.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 221, 1 79
and a wilderness"^ ^playthings. The sixth of December, being Nicholas
day^*, the booths were lighted up, and the square was filled with boys,
running from on-e stand to another, all shouting and talking together in
the most joyous confusion ^ Nurses were going around, carrying the
smaller children in their arms, and parents bought presents decorated
with sprigs of pine and carried them away.
Many of the tables had bundles ^rods with gilded bands, which were
to be used that evening by the persons who represented St. Nicholas.
In the family with whom we reside, one of our German friends dressed
himself^ very grotesquely with a mask, fur robe, and long tapering cap.
He came in with a bunch o/rodiS^ a sack, and a broom for^° sceptre.
After we all had received our share of the beating, he threw the contents
of his bag on the table, and while we were scrambling for the nuts and
apples, gave us many smart raps over the fingers. In many families
the children are made to say " : "I thank you ^2, Herr Nicholas," and the
rods are hung up in the room until Christmas, to keep them in good
behaviour ^^ This" was only a forerunner of the " Christkindchen's "
coming. The Nicholas is the punishing spirit, and the " Christkindchen "
the rewarding one.
1, furjlic^. 2, Render * of the ' by the Dat. of the def. art., and use the
attributive construction for ' truly — people *. 3, aiif bem Otomerbcrge, a-
large square (^la^, m.) in the City. 4, ©g ivaven bort. 5, gur dxi
leu^tung. 6, = verses. 7, = great number, 2)?enge, f. 8, = excitement.
9, fi^ oerftetben. 10, at^. 11, la^t man bic ^inber fagcn. 12, (tud^.
13, urn bie Rkmtn barau ju erinnern, fic!^ gut ju betragen. 14, 2)cv @t. (S. 103,
N. 33) ^fiicclau^tag ; forerunner, SScifeier, f.
Section 222.
CHRISTMAS TN GERMANY.
II.
When this time was over, we all began preparing secretly our presents
for Christmas. Every day there was^ a consultation about the things
which should be obtained '^, It was so arranged that we should inter-
change presents, but nobody must^ know beforehand what he would
receive. What pleasure there was in all these secret purchases and pre-
parations 1 Scarcely anything was thought or spoken of but Christmas,
and every day the consultations became more numerous and secret. The
trees were bought some time before-hand, but as we Americans were to
witness the festival for the first time, we were not allowed to see them
prepared, in order that the effect might be as great as possible. The
market in the Romerberg Square grew constantly larger and more bril-
liant. Every night it was illuminated with lamps and thronged with
people. Quite a forest sprang up in the street before our door. The old
stone house opposite, with the traces of so many centuries on its dark
face, seemed to stand in the midst of a garden. It was a pleasure to go
out every evening and see the children rushing to and fro, shouting and
selecting toys from the booths and talking all the time of the Christmas
N 2
l8o GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 22^.
that was so near (S. 48, N. 6). The poor people went with* their little
presents hid under their cloaks, lest their children might see them ; every
heart was glad, and every countenance wore a smile of secret pleasure.
Finally, the day before Christmas arrived. The streets were so full,
I ' could scarcely make my way through *, and the sale of trees went on ^
more rapidly than ever. These were * usually branches of pine or fir,
set upright ' in a little miniature garden of moss. When the lamps were
lighted at night, our street had the appearance of an illuminated garden.
We were prohibited from entering the rooms upstairs in which the grand
ceremony was to take place, being obliged ^° to take our seats in those
arranged for the guests, and to await with impatience the hour when the
" Christkindchen " should call us.
1, flatt'finben. 2, = procured, on'fc^affen. 3, =but that nobody
should. 4, went with = had. 5, =that I, 6, to make one's
way through, ftd} einen Seg buv(^ bie SKcnc^e batjncn. 7, wonftatten gc^en.
S, bejle^eii (au^), 9, welc^e . . . ^iueingejleUt tonxm, 10, = and were obliged.
Sech'on 223.
CHBISTMAS IN GEBMAITSr.
III.
Several relatives of the family came (S. 104, N. 19), and, what was more
agreeable, they brought with them five or six children. I was anxious to
see how they would view the ceremony \ Finally, in the midst of an
interesting conversation, we heard the bell ringing at the head of '^ the
stairs. We all started up, and made for' the door. I ran up the steps
with the children at my heels, and at the top met * a blaze of dazzling
light, coming from the open door. In each room stood a great table, on
which presents were arranged, amid flowers and wreaths. From ^ the
centre rose the beautiful" Christmas tree, covered with wax tapers to the
very top, which made the room nearly as light as day ^, while every bough
was hung with sweetmeats and gilded nuts. The children ran shouting
around the table, hundng^ their presents, while the older persons had
theirs pointed out to them. I had a little library of German authors as
niy share; and many of the others received quite valuable gifts.
But how beautiful was the heartfelt joy that shone on every counte-
nance I As each one discovered his presents, he embraced the givers, and
it was a scene of unmingled joy ^ It is a glorious feast, this Christmas
time 1 What a chorus from happy hearts went up on that evening to
Heaven I Full of poetry and feeling, and glad associations, it is here
anticipated with delight, and leaves a pleasant memory behind it. We
may laugh at such simple festivals at home, and prefer to shake our-
selves loose from every shackle • that bears the rust of the past, but we
should certainly be happier if some of these beautiful old customs were
better honoured. They renew the bond of feeling^" between families and
friends, and strengthen their kindly sympathy ; even life-long associates
require occasions of this kind to freshen the tie that binds them together",
— Bayard Taylor, " Views Afoot."
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 223. 181
1, \m jte fi(^ Bei bent i^efle Beuel^mctt iwurben. 2, at the head of, cBen auf.
3, = ran towards. 4, = found. 5, = In ; rose = stood. 6, as —
day, tagegf|ef( ; *to make', here evleu^ten. 7, =and searched for (nac^).
8, = em^jfangen. 9, Use this noun in the pi., geffedi ; bears = bear.
10, = love ; to — together, urn ta^ jie »«Bini)ent)e S3ant) fe{i« ju fc^uvjeu.
Section 224.
NEW-YEAR'S EVE (S. 152, N. i) IN GERMANY.
New- Year's Eve is also favoured with a peculiar celebration ^ in Ger-
many. Everybody remains up and makes himself merry until midnight.
The Christmas trees are again lighted, and while the tapers are burning
out, the family play for ^ articles which they have purchased and hung on
the boughs. It is so arranged that each one shall win as much as he
gives, and the change ^ of articles creates much amusement. One of
the ladies rejoiced in the possession of a red silk handkerchief and a
cake of soap, while a cup and saucer and a pair of scissors fell to my lot.
As midnight drew near, the noise became louder in the streets, and com-
panies of people, some of them * singing in chorus, passed by on their
way to the Zeil \ Finally, it struck a quarter to twelve, the windows
were opened, and every one waited anxiously for the clock to strike
twelve. At the first sound, such a cry arose as one may imagine when
thirty or forty thousand persons all set their lungs going ^ at once.
Everybody in the house, in the street, over the whole city, shouted :
"Prost Neujahr^!"
In families, all the members embrace each other, with wishes of hap-
piness for the new year. Then the windows are thrown open, and they
cry to their neighbours or those passing by.
After we had exchanged congratulations, three of us set out for the
Zeil. The streets were full of people, shouting to one another and
to those standing at the open windows. We failed not to cry: " Prost
Neujahr!" wherever we saw a damsel at the window, and the words
came back to us more musically than w(p sent them. Along the Zeil
the spectacle was most singular. The great wide street was filled with
companies of men, marching up and down, while from the mass rang up
one deafening, unending shout, that seemed to pierce the black sky
above. The whole scene looked stranger and wilder in the flickering
light of the swinging lamps ^ and I could not help thinking it must re-
semble a night in Paris, during the French Revolution. — Bayard Taylor,
*' Views Afoot."
1, is — celebration = is celebrated in (auf) a peculiar way. 2, v.m.
3, 3!aufc^ or Slu^taufc^, m. 4, = of whom some were. 5, bie 3eil is
one of the principal streets in Frankfort a/M. 6, to set going, in
S3eli?egung f€^en. 7, Properly : -profit ^Jleuja'^r ! A happy New- Year to
you ! 8, Before the introduction of gas, the lamps hung in the middle
of the street on ropes which were attached to the houses on both sides of the
street.
l8:i GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 22$,
Section 225.
THE TWO HOBBERS.
I.
We often condemn in others what we practise ourselves.
(Alexander the Great in his tent. A man with a fierce countenance,
chained and fettered, brought before him.)
Alexander. — What, art thou the Thracian robber, of whose exploits I
have heard so much ?
Robber. — I am a Thracian, and a soldier.
Alexander. — A soldier ? — a thief, a plunderer, an assassin ! the pest
of the country I I could honour thy courage, but I must detest and
punish thy crimes.
Robber. — What have I done of which you can complain* ?
Alexander. — Hast thou not set at defiance my authority, violated the
public peace, and passed thy life ^ in injuring the persons ' and proper-
ties of thy fellow-subjects*?
Robber. — Alexander I I am your captive. I must hear what you
please to say, and endure what you please to inflict. But my soul is
unconquered ; and if I reply at all ^ to your reproaches, I will reply like
a free man.
Alexander. — Speak freely. Far be it from me to take ® the advantage
of my power, to silence those with whom I deign to converse !
Robber. — I must then answer your question by another. How have
you passed your life ?
Alexander. — Like a hero. Ask Fame"^, and she will tell you. Among
the brave, I have been the bravest ; among sovereigns, the noblest ;
among conquerors, the mightiest.
1, fid) u^tx ettva^ betlagen. Use the 2nd person Plural when the robber ad-
dresses Alexander. 2, unb beiu Seben bamit jugcbra^t. 3, -= the personal
safety. 4, bciner S'iebenmcnfdjen. 5, ubert)auvt. 6, = to use.
7, * Fame,' here gama, tie ©ottin beg SfiuT)ntc«. Fame, or Fama, was a poetical
deity, represented as having wings and blowing a trumpet, A temple was
dedicated to her by the Romans.
Section 226.
THE TWO ROBBERS.
II.
Robber. — And does not Fame speak of me too ? Was there (S. 82,
N. 7) ever a bolder captain of a more valiant band ? Was there ever —
but I scorn to boast. You yourself know that I have not been easily
subdued.
Alexander. — Still, what are you but a robber, a base, dishonest
robber *?
Robber. — And what is a conqueror ? Have not you, too, gone about
the earth ^ like an evil genius, blasting "^ the fair fruits of peace and in-
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 226, 183
dustry, plundering, ravaging, killing ' without law, without justice, merely
to gratify an insatiable lust for dominion ? All that I have done to a
single district with a hundred followers, you have done to whole nations
with a hundred thousand. If I have stripped individuals*, you (S. 27,
N. 8) have ruined kings and princes. If I have burned a few hamlets,
you have desolated the most flourishing kingdoms and cities of the earth.
What is then the difference ^, but that, as you were born a king, and I a
private man ^ you have been able to become a mightier robber than I ?
Alexander. — But if I have taken like a king, I have given like a king.
If I have subverted empires, I have founded greater. I have cherished^
arts, commerce, and philosophy.
Robber. — I, too, have freely given to the poor, what I took from the
rich. I have established order and discipline among the most ferocious
of mankind^, and have stretched out my protecting arm over the oppressed.
I know, indeed, litde of the philosophy you talk of; but I believe neither
you nor I will ever atone to the world for the mischiefs we have done.
Alexander. — Leave me ! — Take off his chains, and use him well.
Are we, then, so much like ? — Alexander and a Robber ? — Let me re-
flect ^. — Dr. AiKiN.
1, *to go about the earth' here ubtx bic (Svbc '^er'jie'^en, conjugated with fein.
2, =to (um . . . gu) blast, »enitci^ten. 3, = Have you not plundered, ravaged
and killed. 4, = robbed common citizens. 5, 93ejlet)t benn gl\3ifd}en uu3
beibeti ein anbcrer Unterfcfjieb aU ber, ba9 ; followed by * you have — than I ', ac-
cording to S. 211, N. 9. 6, = common citizen, 7, here = protected.
8, =of all men, 9, 3c^ wili bariiber nac^benfen.
Seazon 227.
A TOUCHING SCENE AT SEA.
I.
Two weeks ago^ on board an English steamer, a little ragged boy,
aged nine years, was discovered on the fourth day of the voyage ou/
from Liverpool to New York, and carried before the first mate, whose
duty it was to deal with such cases. When questioned as to his object
in being stowed away ^, and who brought him on board, the boy, who had
a beautiful sunny face, and eyes that looked hke the very mirrors of truth,
replied that his stepfather did it, because he could not afford ^ to keep
him, nor to pay his passage ou/ to Halifax, where he had an aunt who *
was well off, and to whose house he was going. The mate did not
believe the story, in spite of the winning face and truthful ^ accents of
the boy. He had seen too much of stow-aways ^ to be easily deceived
by them, he said ; and it was his firm conviction that the boy had been
brought on board and provided with food by the sailors. The little
fellow was very roughly handled in consequence. Day by day he was
questioned and re-questioned, but always with the same result. He did
not know a sailor on board, and his father alone had secreted him, and
given him the food which he ate. At '^ last the mate, wearied by the
boy's persistence in the same story, and perhaps a Httle anxious to
184 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 22y,
inculpate the sailors, seized him one day by the collar, and dragging
him to the fore^ told him that (S. 211, N. 9) unless he would tell
the truth in ten minutes from that time, he would hang him from the
yard-arm.
1, 9Sot \)ierjc'^n 5!agen, after which place predicate and subject [one dis-
covered], since, as a rule, only one part of the adjuncts to the predicate
should be placed before it. 2, as — away = irarimt er aiif^ @d»iff gef^muggelt
fci (App. §§ 28 and 30). 3, I cannot afford to keep you, mcine 9)?ittel ges
jiatten mir nictit, bicf) ju ema'firen. 4, The relative clause * who — off' may be
avoided by using the adjective * iro^I^abcnb ' befiore * aunt '. 5, here gtaubs
irurbtg ; accents, (Spra(i^e. 6, * the stow-away ' may perhaps be rendered
by bee @ingef(I)muggeite. 7, It will easily be seen that, on account of the
length of this period and of the many dependent clauses contained therein,
it requires an altogether different form of construction in German. The
author will, however, refrain from indicating the form to be used, the student
being by this time expected to have attained sufficient skill and practice for
dealing with such cases. 8, auf3 SSorberteil be^ @d^ife5.
Seawn 228.
A TOUCHING SCENE AT SEA.
II.
He then made him sit down under it on the deck. All around him
were the passengers and sailors of the watch, and in front of him stood
the inexorable mate, with his chronometer in his hand, and the other
officers of the ship by his side. It was the finest sight, said our informant S
that he ever beheld — to see the pale, proud, sorrowful face of that noble
boy, his head erect, his beautiful eyes bright through the tears that
suffused them. When eight minutes had fled'^, the mate told him he
had but two minutes to live, and advised him to speak the truth and save
his life ; but he replied with the utmost simplicity and sincerity by asking
(S. Ill, N, 6) the mate if he might pray. The mate said nothing, but
nodded his head, turned as pale as a ghost ^ and shook wi/A trembling
hke a reed with * the wind. And there, all eyes turned on him, the brave
and noble Httle fellow, this poor waif, whom society owned not, and
whose own stepfather could not care for him — there he knelt, wiih
clasped hands, and eyes turned up to heaven, while he repeated ^ audibly
the Lord's Prayer, and prayed the Lord Jesus to take him to heaven.
There then occurred (S. 104, N. 19) a scene as at Pentecost. Sobs
broke' from the strong hard hearts, as the mate sprang forward to
the boy, and kissed and blessed him, and told him how sincerely he
believed his story, and how glad he was that he had been willing
enough to face death '^ and to sacrifice his fife for the truth of his
word. — Rev. E. Davies.
1, Place * said — informant (here ®ewaT)r«Tttaittt, m.)* after * that — beheld *.
2, = were over. 3, as — ghost, gciOciblcid^. 4, = in. 5, = said;
audibly = aloud. 6, (Sin (2c^lud)jcu eutrang fid), followed by the Dat. 7, to
face death, bem S^obe in3 JJlntli^ fc^auen, or bem %^\>i tro|j'bicteu.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 22g» 1 85
Seaion 229.
AN ORATION ON THE POWER OP HABIT.
I.
I will now speak of a habit which I believe ^ is, more than any other,
debasing, degrading, and embruting to man 2, both ^ physically, intellec-
tually, and morally. I am not going to give you an address *Ju/l of my
favourite theme [temperance], but I must speak of it ^ I must speak of
it before this assembly, for I shall never see you again till we meet on
that day when we shall see things as they are ^ Let me then speak of
one habit which, in its power, and '^ influence, and ^ fascination, seems to
rear its head like a Goliath or Saul above all its kindred agencies of
demorahzation ; I allude to^ the habit of using intoxicating liquors as a
beverage, until that habit becomes a fascination ^^ You will allow me
to give " my opinions upon these points freely. I consider drunkenness
not merely to be a moral evil, but also a physical evil, and ^^ it depends a
great deal more upon the temperament, and the constitution, and dispo-
sition of the young man, whether if he falls into the drinking usages of
society, it becomes a habit or not, than it does upon his strength of mind
or firmness of purpose ".
Take a young man, and he shall be full of fire" and poetry. He
shall be ^^ of a nervous temperament and generous heart ; fond of society,
and open and manly in everything he does. Every one loves him.
That is the man most liable to become intemperate.
1, = as I believe. 2, is ... to man, auf ben Si)?enfc[)cn irirft. 3, ' both %
l^ier unb giuar. 4, to give an address to a person, eiuem cine Otebc fjalteii ; of,
uber. 5, {^ tnu^ baefelfcc aBec irenigfteug beru^ren (allude to). 6, Render
* for — are' Liter. = for we shall see one another only (S. 109, N. 5) on that
day, when (iro) we shall see (fc^aueu) the thmgs in their true form (©eftalt, f.).
7, = in its, 8, = and its. 9> = I mean; of using —
beverage = of drinking intoxicating liquors. 10, until — fascination, h\6
biefe ®ewo()tt()eit fineu gauberfjaften Oieij auf ben ^m]^tn au^ubt. 11, = express.
12, Say 'and when a young man once follows the general habit of taking in-
toxicating liquors, it depends, etc' 13, his — purpose, feinc ©eijle^jober
3Bi((en^fraft. 14, = who is full of (ttoUer) fire. 15, The student will
do well to omit the words ' He shall be ' and join this period to the pre-
ceding one.
• SeC^W7l 230.
AN ORATION" ON THE POWER OP HABIT.
n.
He enters ^ into the outer circle of the whirlpool, and throws care to
the winds ^. There he thinks to stay, but he gets nearer and nearer
to the fatal gulf, until he is swept into the vortex before he dreamed of
danger. This thing, habit ^, comes gradually. Many a man who has
acquired * a habit of drinking, but does not exactly proceed to excess ^,
is rescued simply by possessing certain physical qualities which his poor
unfortunate friend had not. You say : " I am not so foolish as to become
a drunkard 1" So He thought once. You say; "I can leave it off® when
1 85 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 23O.
I like," as if He at first had not had (App. § 33) the power to leave it off
when he liked. You say : " I have too sound an intellect to become
a drunkard," as if He were bom without an intellect. You say : " I have
too much pride in myself, too much self-respect," as if He were not once
as proud as you." The way men acquire this habit, is by looking on
those "^ who proceed to excess as naturally inferior to themselves. The
difference between you and the drunkard is just this, that you could leave
off* the habit, but won't; he would ^ with all his heart and soul, but
cannot. I tell you, young men ^°, that while the power of a bad habit
is stripping you of nerve [pi.], and (S. 10, N. 9) energy, and freshness of
feeling ^^, it does not destroy your responsibility. You are accountable
to God for every power, and talent, and influence with which you have
been endowed.
1, = approaches. 2, to throw care to the winds, ftd^ feinc ©orgen tnad^cn.
3, = What one calls habit. 4, to acquire a habit, in cine ©cwo^n^eit »erfa((en.
5, ber biefelbc jeboc^ eigentli(^ nt(^t ubertieibt. 6, to leave off, auf^oren. 7, = by
considering (^alten) those ; to proceed to excess, fi^ bem Ubcvmap ergcBen ; as —
themselves = as (fur) being worse than themselves. 8, here oufgeben.
9, =- and that he would give it up. 10, Commence the period with ' Young
men *, 11, ©cfutjl^fiifc^e, f.
Section 231.
AW ORATION ON THE POWER OP HABIT.
HI.
If you say : " Should I find the practice by experience to be injurious,
I will give it up," surely that is not common sense ^. You might as well
say : ** I will put my hand into the nest of the ratdesnake, and when I
find out that he has stuck his fangs into me **, I will draw it out and get
cured."
I remember riding from^ Buffalo to the Niagara Falls, and said to a
gentleman: "What river is that, Sir?" "That," he said, "is Niagara
River V "Well, it is a beautiful stream," said I, "bright, and fair, and
glossy; how far off are the rapids''?" "Only a mile or two," was the
reply. " Is it possible that (S. 66, N. 15) only a mile or two from us we
shall find the water in the turbulence which it must show when near the
falls?" "You will find it so, Sir." And so I^id find it; and that first
sight of the Niagara I shall never forget. Now, launch your boat on
that Niagara river; it is bright, smooth, beautiful, and glossy. There
is a ripple at the bow •*, and the silvery wake '^ you leave behind adds to
your enjoyment. Down the stream you glide ; oars, sails, and helm
are in proper trim, and you set out^ on your pleasure excursion*.
Suddenly some one cries out from the bank: "Young men, ahoy^°!"
" What is it " !" — " The rapids are below you *^ !" — " Ha, ha I we have
heard of the rapids, but we are not so foolish as to get there ". If we
go [=If it goes) loo fast, then up with the helm'*, then set the mast in
the socket '^ hoist the sail, and speed to land ". Then on '^, boys ;
don't be alarmed — there's no danger 1"
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 23 1. 1 87
1, = reasonable. 2, stuck — me = bitten me. 3, riding from = that
I during a journey from ; change * and said to ' into ' asked '. 4, Use the
def. art. 5, bie @tromfd)ne((en. 6, ©ag Staffer frdufelt fid) am Sug be^ 93ootcg.
7, ^teliDaffer, n. 8, ' to set out on ', here an'treten, v. tr. 9, SSevgniigung^tour.
10, Df)oi! of which pronounce every vowel separately and slowly in the
German way. 11, SBa^ giebt^. 12, are below you, [tub bort unten ni(^t
iveit won euc^ ! 13, as — there, fo treit ju fafiren. 14, baun frfjneU bag
©teuerruber I)tnetn. 15, bann ricf)ten tvir ben 3iJJail auf. 16, unb eiten an3
Sanb ! 17, 2)a:§er nur immev wcrivart^.
Section 232.
AN ORATION ON THE POWER OF HABIT.
IV.
"Young men, ahoy, there I" — " What is it?" — "The rapids are below
you!" — "Ha, ha! we will laugh and quaff; all things delight us. What
care we for the future ? No man ever saw it. * Sufficient for the day is
the evil thereof \' We will enjoy life while we may^; we will catch
pleasure as it flies. This is enjoyment; time enough^ to steer out of
danger when we are driving swiftly with the current." — " Young men,
ahoy!" — "What is it?" — "Beware! Beware! The rapids are below
you!" — Now you see water foaming* all around you. — See how fast you
pass that point! — Up with the helm! — Now turn ^ ! — Pull hard^ —
quick ! — quick ! — pull for your lives ! — pull till "^ the blood starts from the
nostrils, and the veins stand like whipcord upon the brow ! Set the mast
in the socket ! hoist the sail ! Ah, ah ! — it is too late 1 Shrieking,
cursing, howling, blaspheming, over you go ^ ! — Thousands go over the
rapids of Intemperance^ every year, through the power of evil habit,
crying out all the while ^° : "When I find out that it is injuring me, I
will give it up!" The power of evil habit, I repeat, is fascinating^^, is
deceptive ; and man may go on arguing and coming to conclusions
while on the way down to destruction ^^. — J. B. Gough.
1, (S^ ift cjenitg, bap etn jeglidier Sag feinc eigenc ^piage fjaBe! 2, fo fange
xck e6 nod) fonnen. 3, e6 Meibt utig nod) 3eit genug. 4, fd)aiimeubes?
SBaffer. 5, ' to turn ', here um'fef)ren. 6, Pull, Oiubett ; ' hard ', here
au^ Sei^egfraften. 7, Supply the pron. eud& here ; starts -= streams ; from
the nostrils, au^ bev 9lafe. 8, fiurjt it)r in ben Stbgrnnb t)innnter ! 9, %x\mh
fud)t, f., seems to be the right expression here, although the dictionaries
translate the word by Unntd^igfcit, f., and 3So((erei, f. 10, unb rufeu immer.
11, here beftridenb ; is==and. 12, and — destruction = and often we are
still occupied with arguing a matter (eine @ad)c gvunbfid) ju evovtern) in order
to come (gefangen) to a definite conclusion, when we are (fid^ befinben) already
on the way to destruction (SScvberben, n.).
Section 233.
A CURIOUS STORY ^
I.
We heard a curious story ^ at Tristan'* about two Germans who had
settled nearly two years before on Inaccessible Island '. Once a year,
1 88 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 233.
about the month ^December, the Tristan men go* to the two outlying
islands to pick up the few seals which are still to be found there. On
two of these occasions they had seen the Germans, and within a few
months smoke had risen from the island, which they attributed '^ to their
having fired (S. 161, N. 21) some of the brushwood; but as they had
seen or heard nothing of them since, they thought the probability was
that they had perished. Captain Nares * wished to visit the other islands,
and to ascertain the fate of the two men was an additional object in
doing so''.
Next morning we were close under Inaccessible Island, the second in
size of the little group of three. The ship was surrounded by multitudes
of penguins ^, and as few of us had any previous personal acquaintance
with this eccentric form of Ufe ^ we followed their movements with great
interest. The penguin as a rule swims under water, rising now and then
and resting on the surface, like one of the ordinary water-birds, but more
frequently with its body entirely covered, and only Ufting its head from
time to time to breathe.
The structure of Inaccessible Island is very much the same as Tristan,
only the pre-eminent feature ^® of the latter, the snowy cone, is wanting.
A wall of volcanic rocks, about the same height as the cliff at Tristan,
and which one is inclined to believe to have been at one time con-
tinuous with it, entirely surrounds Inaccessible Island, falling for the
most part sheer" into the sea, and it seems that it slopes sufficiently
to allow a tolerably easy ascent to the plateau on the top at one point
only.
1, This story is taken from Mr. W. J. J. Spry's most interesting account
of 'The Cruise of the Challenger'. The Tristan d'Acunha group of islands
(bic ©vfvifc^miQSinfeln), so named from the Portuguese navigator who discovered
it early in the i6th century, lies in mid-ocean, about 1300 miles south of
St. Helena and 1500 miles west of the Cape of Good Hope, nearly on a line
between the Cape of Good Hope and Cape Horn ; it is thus probably the
most isolated and remote of all the abodes of men. The group consists of
the larger Island of Tristan and two smaller islands — Inaccessible Island, about
18 miles south-west from Tristan, and Nightingale Island, twenty miles south
of the main island. Tristan only is permanently inhabited, the other two are
visited from time to time by sealers. In the year 1829 Tristan was inhabited
by 27 families ; in 1836 it possessed a population of 42 ; in 1852 the population
had risen to 85, and in 1867 this number was only exceeded by one. 2, 9luf
ber Snfet 2^iiftan, which place at the head of the period ; about, fiber, with Ace.
3, 1 he author finds that the best German maps use the English name of * In-
accessible Island' unaltered. This is also the case with * Nightingale Island*.
4, fal)ven; *to go', when used in the sense of 'travelling, riding (in a
carriage), driving, sailing, etc.', is mostly rendered by vrifcii (gener-
ally used for greater distances) or by fabrcii. When used in the
sense of * riding on horseback,' it is rendered by vritcii. 5, = which
they attributed to the circumstance. 6, Captain Nares was the commander
of ' The Challenger* at that time. 7, and — so = and as he was anxious
(begierig) to ascertain (erfovfci^cn) the fate of the two men, the voyage [there,
lDal)in] was at once determined upon. 8, fcer ^influin, pi. c. 9, with —
life, mit biefer cigentumlic^en 33o0e(art. 10, = the characteristic peculiarity,
11, = straight.
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 234.
\VB-^ A R^
Section 234. f -qniveRSITY
A OUBIOUS STORY.
II.
There is a shallow bay in which the ship anchored in fifteen fathoms
on the east side of the island ; and there, as in Tristan, a narrow belt of
low ground, extending for about a mile along the shore, is interposed
between the cliff and the sea. A pretty waterfall tossed itself down,
about the middle of the bay, over the cliff from the plateau above. A
little way down it was nearly lost in spray, like the Staubbach of
Schaffhausen, and collected itself again into a rivulet ^ where it regained
the rock at the lower level. A hut built of stones and clay, and roofed
with spars and thatch, lay in a litde hollow ^ near the waterfall, and the
two Germans, in excellent health and spirits, but enraptured at the sight
of the ship and longing for a passage anywhere out of the island, were *
down on the beach, waiting for the first boat. Their story is a curious
one *, and as Captain Nares agreed ° to take them to the Cape, we had
ample time to get an account of their adventures, and to supplement
from their experience such crude notions of the nature of the place as we
could gather during our short stay ^
Frederick and Gustav Stoltenhoff are sons of a dyer in Aix-la-Chapelle
(Qlac^en). Frederick, the elder, was employed in a merchant's office in
Aix-la-Chapelle at the time of the Franco-German war (1870). He was
called on to serve in the German army, where he attained the rank of a
lieutenant, and took part in the siege of Metz and Thionville. At the
end of the campaign he was discharged, and returned home to find his
old situation filled up.
1, gefiaftctc itc^ iebod^ ivieber gu cincm Ifcincn Sac^c. 2, SSerticfung, f,
3, = stood. Consult S. 5, N. 2. 4, =very (()oc^ft) curious. 5, = granted
them their request. 6, Let the student endeavour to construe this pas-
sage by means of the attributive construction, which will prove excellent
practice,
Sectzofi 235,
A CURIOUS STORY.
III.
In the meantime, his younger brother, Gustav, who was a sailor and
had already made several trips, had joined^ on the ist of August, 1870,
at Greenock, as an ordinary seaman, the English ship " Beacon Light,"
bound for Rangoon. On the way out^ the cargo, which consisted of
coal, caught fire* when they were from* six to seven hundred miles
north-west of Tristan d' Acunha, and for (S. 166, N. 10) three days all
hands ^ were doing their utmost to extinguish the fire. On the third day,
the hatches, which had been battened down, to exclude the air, blew up^
the main hatch carrying overboard'^ the second mate who had been
190 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 2^$.
Standing on it at the time of the explosion. The boats had been pro-
visioned beforehand, ready to leave the ship. Two of the crew were
drowned through one of the boats being swamped ^ and the survivors, to
the number of sixteen, were stowed in the long-boat. Up to this time
the ship had been nearing Tristan with a fair wind at the rate of six
knots an hour ^^ so that they had now only about three hundred miles
to go. They abandoned the ship on Friday ; on Saturday afternoon they
sighted Tristan, and on the following day a boat came off to their assistance
and towed them ashore.
The shipwrecked crew remained for eighteen days at Tristan d' Acunha,
during which time they were treated with all kindness and hospitality.
They were relieved by the ill-fated " Northfleet," bound for Aden with
coal, and Gustav Stoltenhoff found his way back to Aix-la-Chapelle.
1, to join a ship, fi(fe einem ©ci^iffc »crf)euern. 2, = On the voyage thither
(bovtt)in). 3, to catch fire, in 93ranb geraten. 4, = about, uncjefd^r.
5, 'all hands', here = all sailors, bic gaivjc 3}?amif(^aft, aUt SWatvofen, al(c ©djiff^leute.
e, in bic Suft fprcnflen ; the hatches, btc Sufen ; the main hatch, bte gro^c Sufe.
7, ■-= and the main hatch carried overboard (uber S3orb [(^lenbern). 8, = through
the sinking of one of the boats. 9, * at the rate of, referring to the
rapidity of motion, is rendered by 'mit tinet <2cl)llfUiflfeit »ou', but when
referring to price, is generally rendered by * i^iim ?)>reifc UOIl*. 10, an
hour, in tet (Stiiiibf, pet ^tiuibe, or hie (Stiiitbe. He receives 20 marks
a week, cr crt;dlt 20 SWarf bie SBot^e (or u^oc^enttic^).
Seawn 236.
A CURIOUS STORY.
IV.
During his stay at Tristan he heard that a large number of seals were
to be had among the islands ^ and he seems to have been greatly pleased
with the Tristaners and to have formed a project of returning there.
When he got home, his brother had just got back from the war and
was unemployed ; he infected him with his notion ^^ and the two agreed '
to join in a venture to Tristan to see what they could (App. § 33) make *
by seal-hunting and barter.
They accordingly sailed for"^ St. Helena in August 187 1, and on the
6th of November left St. Helena for Tristan in an American whaler
bound on a cruise " in the South Atlantic. The captain of the whaler,
who had been often at Tristan d' Acunha, had some doubt of the re-
ception which the young men would get^ if they went as permanent
settlers' there, and he spoke so strongly of the advantages of Inaccessible
Island, on account of the greater productiveness of the soil, and of its
being the centre • of the seal-fishing, that they changed their plans and
were landed on the west side of Inaccessible Island on the 27th of
November 187 1, — early in summer. A quarter of an hour after, the
whaler departed, leaving them the only inhabitants of one of the most
remote spots on the face of the earth. They do not seem, however, to
have been in the least depressed by their isolation.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 2^6, I91
The same day the younger brother clambered up to the plateau with
the help of the tussock grass ^°, in search of goats or pigs, and remained
there all night, and on the following day the two set to work to build
themselves a hut for shelter. They had reached the end of their voyage
by no means unprovided, and the inventory of their belongings " is
curious.
1, in ber ©egenb ber3-nfe(n. 2, =he persuaded (gelmnnen, str. v. tr.) his
brother for his plan. 3, uBemn'fommen ; to join — to Tristan = to under-
take the adventurous voyage to Tristan. 4, =earn. 5, =to. 6, The
vessel is bound on a cruise in the Atlantic, ba^ ©c^iff ijl baju befiimmt, im attan*
tifc^en Djean utnl^erjufreujen. 7, had — get = doubted (jireifelte baran) that
the young men would be kindly (freunbfi^) received (aufnefjmen). Use the
active voice with * man '. 8, He went there as a permanent settler, cr
lic^ jtc^ bort baucrub nieber. 9, = and of its central (jjentral) position for seal-
fishing, 10, ba3 Sujfocfgrag. 11, here ^a^jfetigfeitett; Nom. Pi.
Section 237.
A CURIOUS STORY.
V.
They had an old whale-boat ^ which they had bought at St. Helena,
with mast, sails, and oars, three spars for a roof, a door, and a glazed
window ; a wheel-barrow, two spades and a shovel, two pickaxes, a saw,
a hammer, two chisels, two or three gimlets, and some nails ; a kettle,
a frying-pan, two sauce-pans, knives and forks, and some crockery j two
blankets each, and empty covers ^ which they afterwards filled with sea-
birds' down. They had a lamp, a bottle of oil, and six dozen boxes of
Bryant and May's matches.
For internal use^ they had two hundred pounds ^ flour, two hundred
pounds o/ncQj one hundred pounds ^biscuits, twenty pounds ^coffee,
ten pounds ^tea, thirty pounds f?/" sugar, three pounds ^ table- salt, a
little pepper, eight pounds 0/ tobacco, five bottles 0/ gin, six bottles
^Cape wine*, six bottles ^vinegar, and some Epsom salts. A barrel
^coarse salt was provided for curing seal-skins, and forty empty casks
were intended for oil. Their arms and ammunition consisted of a short
English rifle, an old German fowling-piece, two and a half pounds of
powder, two hundred bullets, and four sheath-knives ^ The captain of
the whaler gave them some seed potatoes, and they had a collection of
the ordinary garden seeds.
When they had been four days on the island, they had a visit from
a party of men from Tristan, who had come on their annual sealing
excursion. They were ten days on Inaccessible, and were very friendly
in their intercourse with the new comers.
1, the whale-boat, bag Beim ffiallfifc^fang gcBraui^ti^c 93oot. We have not
a compound noun to render the English term. Say ' They had an old boat,
which had been used (benit^t) for whale-fishing and which they had bought in
(S. 46, N. 6) the Island o/'St. Helena. 2, here Uber^ug, m., pi. liberjitge.
3, gur i^re forperlic^en 33ebiirfnif[e. 4, ^aplrein, m. 5, Sagbmejfer, m.
19:1 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 238.
Section 238.
A CURIOUS STORY.
VI.
They told them that the north side of the island was better suited for
a settlement, and transported all their goods (S. 236, N. 11) thither in
one of their boats. Being familiar with the place, they showed them
generally their way about and the different passes by which the plateau
might be reached, and they taught them how to build ^ to withstand the
violent winds, and how to thatch with tussock-grass. Immediately after
they left, the brothers set about building a house and clearing some
ground ^ for potatoes and other vegetables. They killed nineteen seals,
and prepared the skins, but they were unable to make any ' quantity of oil.
Towards the end of the sealing season iheir boat got damaged in the
surf, and they were obliged to cut it in two *, patch up the best half of it,
and use it as best they could ' in smooth weather, close to shore.
They went from time to time to the upper plateau and shot goats and
pigs. When they first arrived, they counted a flock of twenty-three goats ;
three of these were killed during the summer of 1871-1872 by the
Tristan people (S. i57,N. 4), and six by themselves; the remaining
fourteen remained over the winter of 1872. The flesh of the goats they
found extremely delicate. Pigs were much more numerous, but their
flesh was not so palatable, from their feeding ^ principally on sea-birds ;
that of the boars was especially rank. They found the pigs very valuable,
however, in yielding an abundant supply of lard^, which they used for
frying their potatoes.
1, =how they must (Imp. Subj.) build. 2, to clear the ground ( = Iand),
eine @tvc(fe fiauteg urbar mac^cu. 3, here crjielen; any =a large. 4, to cut
in two, entjiuei'fd^neiben, sep. comp. irr. v, 5, =as well as possible. 6, from
their feeding = as they lived ; on, voii. 7, in — lard = on account of their
lard ((Sd^matj, n.).
Section 239.
A CURIOUS STORY.
VII.
In the month of April 1872, a singular misfortune befell them. While
burning some of the brushwood below to make a clearing, the tussock-
grass in the gully \ by which they had been in the habit ^ of ascending
the cliff, caught fire, and as it had been only by its assistance that they,
had been able to scramble up to the plateau, their only hunting-ground was
now inaccessible from the strip of beach on which their hut and garden
stood, which was closed in on either side by a headland jutting into the
sea. While their half-boat remained seaworthy, they were able to paddle
round in fine weather to the west side of the island, where there was an
access to the top ; but the *' sea-cart," as they called it, was washed off
the beach and broken up in June, and after that the only way they had
of reaching the plateau was by swimming round the headland — a risky
feat, even in the finest weather, in these wild regions.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 239 193
In winter it was found to be impossible to reach the terrace, and as
their supply of food was low, they experienced considerable privations
during their first winter. Their daily allowance of food was reduced to
a quantity just sufficient to maintain life, and in August they were little
better than skeletons ^
Help was, however, near. Early in August a multitude of penguins
landed * hard by their hut, — stupid ^ animals, which will scarcely get out
of one's way, and are easily knocked down with a stick ^, and with fleshy
breasts, wholesome enough, though with a rather fishy taste ; and in the
end of August the females began to lay large blue eggs, sufficiently delicate
in flavour.
1, SSertiefung, f. 2, I was in the habit of ascending the mountain every
day, ic^ Vflcgte td^lid^ ben 53evg gu evfteigen. 3, = unb tm Slugujl it^aren fte fajl gu
bavum, ob ba« ^awi 9lct()fd^i(b obcr bic cnglifdje
a3ant bctt ©ifgbavou tragcn trirb ! 7, = struggle, Jtamj^f, m. 8, to go
to the wall, ben h'lvjeren jiet;en. 9, (J« umvbc pjfentlic^ angejcigt.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 345. 197
Section 245.
MORGAN PRUSSIAN
I.
Morgan, the gay and handsome son of a low Irish farmer, tired of
home, went to take the chances of the world, and seek his fortune. By
what means he traversed England, or made his way to France, is not
told. But he at length crossed France, and, probably without much
knowledge or much care whether he was moving to the north or the south
pole, found himself in the Prussian territory. This was in the day of
Frederick William I. (17 13-1740), famous for his tall regiment of guards.
He had but one ambition, that of inspecting twice a day a regiment of a
thousand grenadiers, not one of whom was less than six feet and a half
high. Morgan was an Irish giant, and was instantly seized by the Prus-
sian recruiting sergeants, who forced him to "volunteer" into the tall
battalion. This turn of fate was totally out of the Irishman's calculation >
and the prospect of carrying a musket till his dying day on the Potsdam
parade ^, after having made up his mind to live by his wits and rove the
world, more than once tempted him to think of leaving his musket and
honour behind him, and fairly trying his chance for escape. But the
attempt was always found impracticable; the frontier was too closely
watched, and Morgan still marched up and down the Potsdam parade
with a disconsolate heart, when one evening a Turkish recruit was
brought in ; for the king looked to nothing but the thews and sinews of
a man, and the Turk was full seven feet high.
"How much did his majesty give for catching that heathen.?" said
Morgan to his corporal. "Four hundred dollars V' was the answer.
Morgan burst out into an exclamation of astonishment at this waste of royal
treasure upon a Turk. " Why, they cannot be got for less," replied the
corporal. " What a pity my five brothers cannot hear of it!" said Mor-
gan, "I am a dwarf to any one of them, and the sound of half the
money would bring them all over immediately." As the discovery of a
tall recruit was the well-known road to favoritism, five were worth at
least a pair of colours to the corporal *. The conversation was immediately
carried to the sergeant, and from him, through the gradation of officers, to
the colonel, who took the first opportunity of mentioning it to the king.
The colonel was instantly ordered to question Morgan ; but he at once
lost all recollection of the subject. " He had no brothers ; he had made
the regiment his father, and mother, and relations, and there he hoped to
live and die." But he was urged still more strongly, and at length con-
fessed that he had brothers, even above the regimental standard, but
that nothing on earth could stir them from their spades.
1, SDJorgan ber %xm%%. 2, auf bem ^avabe^^la^ gu ^Pot^bant. 3. %^\ix,
4, five — corporal, fp n?urben funf bevfelbeu bem »^ov).>cvat iveuigften^ eine ^'^^w
tic^gfteKe eintvagen.
198 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 24^.
Section 246.
MOBGAN FBUSSIA.
II.
After some time the king inquired for the five recruits, and was indig-
nant when he was told of the impossibility of enlisting them. " Send the
fellow himself," he exclaimed, "and let him bring them back." The
order was given ; but Morgan was broken-hearted " at the idea of so
long an absence from the regiment." He applied to the colonel to have
the order revoked, or at least given to some one else. But this was out
of the question, for the king's word was always irrevocable ; and Mor-
gan, with a disconsolate face, prepared to set out upon his mission. But
a new difficulty struck him. " How was he to make his brothers come,
unless he showed them the recruiting money?" This objection was at
last obviated by the advance of a sum equal to about three hundred
pounds sterling, as a first instalment for the purchase of his family. Like
a loyal grenadier the Irishman was now ready to attempt anything for
his colonel or his king, and Morgan began his journey. But, as he was
stepping out of the gates of Potsdam, another difficulty occurred ; and
he returned to tell the colonel that of all people existing the Irish were
the most apt to doubt a traveller's story, they being in the habit of a
good deal of exercise in that style themselves^; and that when he should
go back to his own country, and tell them of the capital treatment and
sure promotion that a soldier met with in the guards, the probability was,
that they would laugh in his face. As to the money, " there were some
who would not scruple to say that he stole it, or tricked some one out of
it. But, undoubtedly, when they saw him walking back only as a
common soldier, he was sure they would not believe a syllable, let him
say what he would about rising in the service."
The objection was intelligible enough, and the colonel represented it
to the king, who, doubly outrageous at the delay, swore a grenadier's
oath, ordered Morgan to be made a sub-lieutenant, and, with sword and
epaulets, sent him instantly across the Rhine to convince his five bro-
thers of the rapidity of Prussian promotion. Morgan flew to his home
in the county ^Carlow, delighted the firesides for many a mile round with
his having outwitted a king and a whole battalion of grenadiers, laid out
his recruiting money on land, and became a man of estate at the expense
of the Prussian treasury.
One ceremony remains to be recorded. Once a year, on the anniver-
sary of the day on which he left Potsdam and its giants behind, he
climbed a hill within a short distance of his house, turned himself in the
direction of Prussia, and, with the most contemptuous gesture which he
could contrive, bade good-bye to his majesty. The ruse was long a
great source of amusement, and its hero, like other heroes, bore through
life the name earned by his exploit — Morgan Prussia. — King George
THE Fourth.
1, they being — themselves, ba au(i^ fic im ®vjaf;ten »ott beraJci^eu ®ef(i^i^tcu
eim grope 5«ticjfeit bcfdpen.
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 247. I99
Section 247,
THE TERRIBIjE WINTER OP 1784.
About the middle of the month of April, in the year 1784, three
hundred thousand miserable beings, dying from cold and hunger, groaned
in Paris alone — in that Paris where, in spite of the boast that scarcely
another city contained so many rich people, nothing had been prepared
to prevent the poor from perishing of cold and wretchedness.
For the last four months, the same leaden sky had driven the poor
from the villages into the town, as it sent the wolves from the woods
into the villages.
No more bread. No more wood.
No more bread for those who felt this cold — and no more wood to bake
it. All the provisions which had been collected, Paris had devoured in
a month. The Provost, short-sighted and incapable, did not know how
to procure for Paris, which was under his care, the wood which might
have been collected in the neighbourhood. When it froze, he said the
frost prevented the horses from bringing it; when it thawed, he pleaded want
of horses and conveyances. Louis XVL, ever good and humane, always
ready to attend to the physical wants of his people, although he over-
looked their social ones, began by contributing a sum of 200,000 francs
for horses and carts, and insisting on their immediate use. Still the
demand continued greater than the supply.
At first no one was allowed to carry away from the public timber-yard
more than a cart-load of wood; then that was limited to half the
quantity. Soon long strings of people might be seen waiting outside the
timber-yards, as they were afterwards seen at the bakers' shops. The
king gave away the whole of his private income in charity. He procured
3,000,000 francs by a grant and applied it to the relief of the sufferers,
declaring that every other need must give way before that of cold and
famine. The queen, on her part, gave 500 louis from her purse. The
convents, the hospitals, and the public buildings were thrown open as
places of asylum for the poor, who came in crowds for the sake of the
fires that were kept there.
They kept hoping for a thaw, but heaven seemed inflexible. Every
evening the same copper-coloured sky disappointed their hopes; and
the stars shone bright and clear as funeral torches through the long,
cold nights, which hardened again and again the snow that fell during
the day. All day long, thousands of workmen, with spades and shovels,
cleared away the snow from before the houses, so that on each side
of the streets, already too narrow for the traffic, rose a high, thick wall,
blocking up the way. Soon these masses of snow and ice became so
large that the shops were obscured by them, and they were obliged to
allow it to remain where it fell.
Paris could do no more. She gave in, and allowed the winter to
do its worst. December, January, February, and March passed thus,
200 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 247.
although now and then a few days' thaw changed the streets, whose
sewers were blocked up, into running streams. Horses were drowned,
and carriages destroyed, in the streets, some of which could only be
traversed in boats. People went to the markets to see the fisherwomen
serving their customers with immense leathern boots on, inside which
their trousers were pushed, and with their petticoats tucked round their
waists, all laughing, gesticulating, and splashing each other as they stood
in the water.
These thaws, however, were but transitory ; the frost returned, harder
and more obstinate than ever, and recourse was had to sledges, pushed
along by skaters, or drawn by roughshod horses along the causeways,
which were like polished mirrors. The Seine, frozen many feet deep, had
become the place of rendezvous for all idlers, who assembled there to skate
or slide, until, warmed by exercise, they ran to the nearest fire, lest the
perspiration should freeze upon them. All trembled for the time when,
the water communications being stopped, and the roads impassable,
provisions could no longer be sent in, and began to fear that Paris would
perish from want.
The king, in this extremity, called a council. They decided to implore
all bishops, abbds, and monks to leave Paris and retire to their dioceses
or convents ; and ail those magistrates and officials who, preferring the
opera to their duties, had crowded to Paris, to return to their homes;
for all these people used large quantities of wood in their hotels, and
consumed no small amount of food. There were still the country
gentlemen, who were also to be entreated to leave. But M. Lenoir,
lieutenant of police, observed to the king that, as none of these people
were criminals, and could not therefore be compelled to leave Paris in
a day, they would probably be so long thinking about it, that the thaw
would come before their departure, which would then be more hurtful
than useful.
All this care and pity of the king and queen, however, excited the
ingenious gratitude of the people, who raised monuments to them, as
ephemeral as the feelings which prompted them. Obelisks and pillars
of snow and ice, engraved with their names, were to be seen all over
Paris.
At the end of March the thaw began, but by fits and starts, constant
returns of frost prolonging the miseries of the people. Indeed, in the
beginning of April it appeared to set in harder than ever, and the half-
thawed streets, frozen again, became so slippery and dangerous, that
nothing was seen but broken limbs and accidents of all kinds. The
snow prevented the carriages from being heard, and the police had
enough to do, through the reckless driving of the aristocracy, to preserve
from the wheels those who were spared by cold and hunger. — After
Alexander Dumas, " The Queen's Necklace."
GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 248. 201
Section 248.
A STORY WORTH READINa.
I.
Soon after the promulgation of Methodism^ in England it spread with
great rapidity over the counties of Devon and Cornwall, and especially
among the miners and lower orders. For a long period after its intro-
duction the clergy and higher classes of society in the west of England
manifested a dislike to the new doctrines which can scarcely be imagined
in these days of modern toleration. It was thought by many young
gentlemen good sport to break the windows and nail up the doors of a
Methodist chapel ^. The robbery of a Wesleyan preacher ^, as a spree,
by two young gentlemen, became the subject of an investigation, and the
frolicsome young men had to pay very dearly for their practical joke.
Among the uninstructed local preachers was one known by the name
of " The Old Gardener." This old man was no common character- —
indeed he was quite original, and by far the most popular preacher
among the disciples of John Wesley in the vicinity.
He kept a small nursery garden about two miles from the town of
St. A , working hard at his occupation of gardener by day, and
praying and preaching to his fellow-sinners, as he called them, in the
evening. He lived in the poorest manner, giving away all the surplus of
his earnings in charity, distributing Bibles, and promoting to the utmost
of his ability the extension of Methodism. His complexion was a sort
of dirty, dark, iron grey, and his whole appearance lean and grotesque.
Although extremely ignorant, he possessed no small degree of cunning ;
of this the following incident affords ample evidence : —
" The Old Gardener " was once subjected to a burglary and attempt at
robbery. He lived with his wife in a small and somewhat dilapidated
cottage, not far from the high road. Three young " squires," who all
despised and hated Methodism, having heard that the old man had been
recently making a collection to build a Methodist chapel, thought it
would be a good frolic to rob him temporarily of the proceeds of this
collection. The result of the frolic is best related in the words of one
of the actors : —
" We set out," said he, " upon our expedition with blackened faces,
upon a dark night, a little before twelve o'clock. We had dined late,
and all of us had Dutch as well as Cornish courage ; yet I confess, when
it came to the point *, I felt myself a coward. I began to reflect that it
was but a dastardly frolic to frighten the poor old man and his wife in
the dead of night."
" The clock struck twelve. * Now comes the watching time of the
night,' exclaimed Tom."
" ' Don't let us frighten the poor couple out of their wits,' said I."
" ' No,' said Ryder, ' we will be gentle robbers — gentle as Robin
Hood and Little John.' "
" I said that I would rather return than proceed. * Recollect/ said I,
202 GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 248.
* the old fellow is an old soldier, as well as a saint, and fears nothing
human.' "
" ' Nonsense,' exclaimed Ryder, ' here goes ^' He pressed the feeble
door of the cottage in which the old man resided ; it immediately gave
way and flew open. We entered and found ourselves in a sort of
kitchen. To our great surprise there was a light shining from an inner
room. This made us all hesitate."
1, Nom. bic fie'^rc ber SWet^obiflen. 2, of a — chapel, einer ben SWetl^obiflctt
Qet)orenben .^apellc. 3, cineg toe«te^if(^eu ^rebiger^. 4, aU c« »)itfU(^
erujl icurbe. 5, fomm nuv !
Se^zon 249.
A STORY WORTH READING.
II.
" ' Who is out there at this time of the night ?* exclaimed a hoarse voice
from within. I knew it to be the unmistakable voice of *The Old
Gardener.' "
" 'Give us your money, and no harm shall befal you,' said Tom, *but
we must have your money.' "
" * The Lord will be my defence,' rejoined * The Old Gardener.*
' You shall have no money from me ; all in the house is the Lord's —
take it if you dare.' "
"'We must and will have it,' said we, as we entered the inner room,
after taking the precaution of fastening the chamber-door as we
entered."
" We soon wished we had suffered it to remain open, as you will see."
" Now, consider us face to face with ' The Old Gardener,' and a pretty
sight was presented. Three ruffians (ourselves) with white waggoners'
frocks and blackened faces ; before us ' The Old Gardener,' sitting on
the side of his bed. He wore a red worsted nightcap, a checked shirt,
and a flannel jacket ; his iron grey face, fringed with a grizzly beard,
looking as cool and undismayed as if he had been in the pulpit
preaching."
"A table was by the side of the bed, and immediately in front of him,
on a large deal table, was an open Bible, close to which we observed, to
our horror, a heap of gunpowder, large enough to blow up a castle. A
candle was burning on the table, and the old fellow had a steel in one
hand and a large flint in the other. We were all three paralysed. The
wild, iron-faced, determined look of * The Old Gardener,' the candle,
flint and steel, and the great heap of powder, absolutely froze our blood,
and made cowards of us all. The gardener saw the impression he had
made."
" 'What 1 do you want to rob and murder?' exclaimed he ; 'I think you
had better join with me in prayer, miserable sinners that you all are !
Repent, and you may be saved. You will soon be in another world.' "
" Ryder first recovered his speech."
GERMAN COMPOSITION. SECTION 249. 203
" * Please to hear me, Mr. Gardener. I feel that we have been wrong,
and if we may depart we will make reparation, and give you all the
money we have in our pockets.' "
" We laid our purses on the table before him."
" * The Lord has delivered you into my hands. It was so revealed to
me in a dream. We shall all soon be in another world. Pray, let us pray.' "
"And down he fell upon his knees, close to the table, with the candle
burning, and the ugly flint and steel in his hand. He prayed and prayed.
At last he appeared exhausted. He stopped and eyed the purses, and
then emptied one of them out on the table. He appeared surprised,
and, I thought, gratified at the largeness of its contents.'*
" We now thought we should have leave to retire ; but, to our dismay,
' The Old Gardener ' said :
" * Now, we will praise God by singing the looth Psalm.' "
" This was agony to us all. After the Psalm, the old man took up the
second purse, and while he was examining its contents, Ryder, who was
close behind Tom and myself, whispered softly :
" * I have unfastened the door, and when you hear me move, make a
rush.' "
" * The Old Gardener,' then, pouring out the contents of the second
purse, exclaimed:
" < Why, there is almost enough to build our new house of God. Let
me see what the third contains.' "
" He took up the third purse."
" 'Now,' whispered Ryder, ' make a rush.' "
" We did so ; and at the same moment heard the old fellow ham-
mering away at his flint and steel. We expected to be instantly blown
into fragments. The front door, however, flew open before us : and the
next moment we found ourselves in the garden. The night was pitchy
dark. We rushed blindly through brambles and prickly shrubs, ran our
heads against trees, and then forced our way through a thick hedge. At
last, with scratched faces, torn hands, and tattered clothes, we tumbled
over a bank into the high road.
Section 250.
A STORY WORTH READING.
III.
" Our horses we soon found, and we galloped to Ryder's residence.
Lights were produced, and we sat down. We were black, ragged, and
dirty. We looked at each other, and, in spite of our miserable adven-
ture, roared with laughter."
"'We may laugh,' exclaimed Tom, 'but if this adventure becomes
known, and we are found out, Cornwall will be too hot for us the next
seven years. We have made a pretty night of it. We have lost our'
money, been obliged to pretend to pray for two long hours, before a,
great heap of gunpowder, while that grim-faced, ugly, red-capped brute
threatened us with an immediate passage into eternity. And our money
504 GERMAN COMPOSITION, SECTION 250.
forsooth must go to build a meeting-house ! Bah ! It is truly horrible.
The old fellow has played the old soldier on us with a vengeance, and we
shall be the laughing-stock of the whole country.'"
" The affair was not yet ended. Reports were spread that three men
disguised as black demons, with horns and tails, had entered the cottage
of * The Old Gardener,' who had not only terrified them, but had
frightened them out of a good sum of money, which he intended to de-
vote to the building of a new Methodist meeting-house. It was given
out that on the following Sunday * The Old * Gardener ' intended to
preach a sermon, and afterwards solicit subscriptions for the meeting-
house, when he would relate the remarkable manner in which he had
been providentially assisted with funds for the building. Our mortifica-
tion was complete. Tom, whose hatred of Methodism was intense, de-
clared he would blow up the meeting-house as soon as it was buih.
Our curiosity, however, was excited, and we all three determined to hear
our adventure of the night related by ' The Old Gardener,' if we could
contrive to be present without being suspected."
" Sunday evening arrived. The meeting-house was crammed to suffo-
cation ; and with the dull lights then burning in the chapel, we had no
difficulty in concealing ourselves. The sermon was short, but the state-
ment of our adventure was related most minutely and circumstantially in
the old man's quaint, homely, and humorous phraseology. This evening
he seemed to excel himself, and was exultingly humorous."
" * I never,' said he, ' saw black faces pray with greater devotion.
I have some doubt, however,' he slily observed, ' if their prayers were
quite heavenward. They sometimes turned their faces towards the door,
but a lifting of the flint and steel kept them quiet.' "
** He then added, with a shake of the head and an exulting laugh :
* But they had not smelt powder like the old soldier they came to rob.
No, no; it was a large heap— ay, large enough to frighten old General
Clive himself. The candle was lighted, the flint and steel were ready.
You may ask, my friends, if I myself was not afraid. No, no, my dear
friends,' shouted he, * this large stock of apparent gunpowder was — it
was my whole year's stock of leek (onion) seed 1 ' "
" The whole congregation somewhat irreverently laughed ; even the
saints almost shouted ; many clapped their hands. I was for a moment
stupefied by the announcement, but at last could hardly suppress my
own laughter."
" We subscribed to the fund to avoid suspicion, and left the meeting.
After the sermon we joined each other, but could not speak. We could
hardly chuckle ' leek- seed,' and then roared with laughter."
" It was a good joke, though not exactly to our taste. It has, how-
ever, more than once served for subsequent amusement."
"The chapel was built with the money collected by the gardener.
Time and circumstances now induce me to think that there has been no
detriment to morality or religion by the erection of the meeting-house,
which was afterwards known as * The Leek-seed Chapel.' "— St. James's
Magazine.
APPENDIX.
A. ESSENTIALS OF CONSTRUCTION.
I. PBIK-CIPAIi ANT> CO-ORDIK-ATE CLAUSES.
(See § 24.)
§ 1. Infinitives, Participles, and that form of the Infinitive pre-
ceded by Jtt which is called Supine, stand at the end of the clause ;
as —
(Bx tvar amtttc^, oBet boc^ fauBcr gc^ He was poorly, but yet neatly
! t c i b e t. dressed,
©ein gurnenber Df)dm l^atte i^n ju ftc^ His angry uncle had bid him come
gerufen. to him.
(Seine S^ante iinvb ntovgen j^u unS f ommcn. His aunt will come to us to-morrow.
(Sie fjetter. cousin.
JDie 9iatur t)attc fte nid)t mit ie er eg hjerbc vermeiben He considered how he might be able
fonnen. (fonnen is the governing to avoid it.
verb.)
(Sr fagte, bap er e5 ntc^t l^aljc tl^un He said that he did not like to
nt g e n. (ntcgen is the governing do it.
verb.)
§ 21. Sometimes the conjunction, which generally connects the sub-
ordinate clause with the principal clause, is omitted and understood. In this
case the construction is like that oi 2i principal clause; as —
©r furd)tcte, ic^ fonne mic^ erfatten. He was afraid I might catch
((Sr fiircl)tetc, bap id} mic^ c r f d 1 1 c n cold.
f n n e.)
§ 22. Sometimes the auxiliary verb is omitted and understood-, as—
SDap er mir genemmen (unube), ijl That he was taken from me is my
niein gvcpteg 8cib. greatest sorrow.
§ 23. In subordinate clauses the prefixes of separable compound
verbs are not separated from the verb; as —
©r trar fo Befc^dftigt, bap cr in vic^it;n He was so busy that he did not go
Hagen nid)t a u g g i n g. out for a fortnight.
APPENDIX. CONSTRUCTION. 2C9
§ 24. J. The co-ordinative conjunctions — aBev, a He in, fccnn, ndtntid),
ober, fonbern, fotoo^l — at 6, and unb — serve to connect two or more
independent statements with each other, which have either one common
subject or predicate, or have each a subject and predicate of their own
(co-ordinate clauses). Co-ordinative conjunctions do not affect the
regular order of construction explained in §§ 1-12, and generally stand
at the beginning of the co-ordinate clauses which they introduce ; but abet
and n d nt H d) are often placed after the verb, and sometimes even stand in
the middle of the clause ; as — •
JDie %xan wax bent 9}?annc fvii'^ gej^cvBen; biefer (iep bem Ijintertaffenen ^inbe
aber jebc m6g(id)e ©ovgfalt angebeiljen.
A subordinate clause, i. e. a clause dependent on another clause, without
which it would not be understood, is joined to a principal clause by means of
a relative pronoun, or a conjunction, which latter may be either a relative, a
subordinative, or an adverbial conjunction. (See § 124 of Lange's German
Grammar.) The effect produced upon the construction by relative pronouns,
relative conjunctions, and subordinative conjunctions has been explained in
§§ 16-23.
B. Adverbial conjunctions, like all other adverbial expressions
commencing a clause, require the verb to stand before the subject,
as has been pointed out in § 124 of Lange's German Grammar,
B. THE INDICATIVE MOOD.
§ 25. The Indicative Mood is the Mood of Actuality, whilst the Sub-
junctive Mood is the Mood of Possibility. The nature of the Indicative may
be said to be objecti've, because it is used to express positive facts. The nature
of the Subjunctive may be said to be subjecti've, because it represents the state-
ment made as a mere subjective supposition, or as resting on the mere hearsay
evidence of other persons.
The Indicative Mood denotes Positiveness and Certainty.
Conjunctions never determine the mood in ■which a verb is to be
used. The mood is always determined by the nature of the statement we
wish to make. So one and the same verb may be followed, in the dependent
clause, either by the Indicative or the Subjunctive Mood.
Examples.
2)er ©efaiigene t|l tot; er ijl ^eute Ihe prisoner is dead; he died this
sKovgeit geftorben. (Positive state- morning,
ment.)
3c^ Bin uBerjeugt, baf er e3 gefagt 'i:iQii, I am convinced that he has said it.
(Certainty.)
JDev SWcnfc^ ift jlevBtid). (A fact.) Man is mortal.
3^ ^abe gcf)6rt, bap cr jum SD^inijlec I have heard that he has been ap-
ernannt ift. pointed a minister, (and I do not
doubt it).
(Here the Indicative Mood is used, because I wish to imply that I have no
doubt about the accuracy of the statement.)
3(^ I)aBe Qc^ott, baf er jum aJJinifter I have heard that he has been ap-
cruannt fei (see § 30). pointed a minister, (but I rather
doubt it).
(Here the Subjunctive Mood is used because I wish to express a doubt about
the accuracy of the statement, which is expressed in English by the words
*but I rather doubt it.')
VOL. IV. P
210 APPENDIX, THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
C. THE SUBJUNCTIVE (OR CONJUNCTIVE) MOOD.
(See § 25.)
§ 26. Since, in the best modern works of English Literature, we frequently
find the Indicative employed instead of the Subjunctive in clauses of un-
certainty and supposition, and since, with the exception of the verb to be, it is
evidently the tendency of the English language to reject the distinction of the
Subjunctive Mood, the student will encounter no small difficulty in learning
the right use of the German Subjunctive, which is most extensively used, and
gives often great power, conciseness, and elegance to the mode of speaking.
The Subjunctive Mood is used both in principal and subordinate clauses,
and denotes Uncertainty and Supposition.
Examples.
WIm. fagt cr fei gejlorBen (see § 29). People say (i.e. it is rumoured) he is
(Uncertainty.) dead.
$Iato gtaubte, bap nur cin ®ott fei. Plato thought that there was only o«/?
(Supposition.) God, (but that it was a matter of
doubt).
§ 27. The Subjunctive expresses Command, Wish, and Concession.
Examples.
(Sr n clonic fetnc SQBeitc, tvte'g 93rau^ Let him take his distance as it is
tfl! (Schiller.) (Command.) customary!
®ott fei ntit bir! (Wish.) God be with you !
(Ir 9 e ^ c, h)ol^in er 2ujl l^at. (Con- He may go wherever he pleases.
cession.)
§ 28. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Speech (oratio obliqua),
i. e. when words which have been actually spoken are quoted not as they were
spoken, but m substance only ; it stands especially after the verbs fac^en, to say;
erjd^len, to relate; ntclben, to report; beric^ten, to relate, to report; l^orcn,
to hear ; as —
@r fagte it|m, er fei cin SSevfd^njcnber. He told him he was a spendthrift.
©ie be^auptete, fie 1^ a b c ben 93rief ni(i^t She asserted that she had not got the
crl)alten. letter,
^ein ijtcunb ntetbete, baf er nid^t fommen His friend reported that he could not
foune, mid) ju befud;en. come to see me.
§ 29. The Subjunctive is used "w^hen the statement made in the
subordinate clause is intended to be represented not as a fact, but
as a mere idea, as a mere conception of the person speaking. We
find it, therefore, especially after verbs denoting a request^ a ivishj a hope, an
apprehension, a permission, an advice, and a command; as —
nteincii, to mean. h?e((en, to be willing.
^lauben, to believe. bitten, to ask.
«eimuten, to presume. befe()lcn, to command.
i^u^cifilii, to doubt. vcvlancjen, to demand.
fdicincn, to seem. crma()ucii, to admonish.
I)offcn, to hope. taten, to advise.
fuvd)tcn, to fear. bejletjen, to insist upon,
And others of a like meaning.
APPENDIX, THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
211
Examples.
Sajfen OV, and nad)^etn.
The following table will make this clear: —
Direct Speech.
erfagtc: „3(^lefe." (Present.) (Bx
dr fagtc : „3^ ^aBe getefen/' (Perfect.) (Sr
©c fagte: „3c^ iuerbe lefen." (First dx
Future.)
(5r fagtc: „3(^ itcrbc getefen l^aBen @r
(Second Future), toenn mein
^rcunb mi^ abt^oten Wix'o." (First
Future.)
But—
dx fagte: „3d^ laS, aU fein ?Jrcunb dr
fc^vieB." (Imperfect.)
dx fagtc: „3^ l^attc getefen (Plu- dx
perfect), at^ mein gveunb fd^rieB."
(Imperfect.)
It will be seen, therefore, that the verb
either in the Present, in the Perfect, or
p 2
Indirect Speech.
fagtc, cr tefe. (Present Subj.)
fagte, cr l^aBc getefen. (Perfect Subj.)
fagte, er irerbe tefen. (First Future
Subjunctive.)
fagte, er iuerbe getefen l^aBcn (Second
Future Subj.), ioenn fein g^rcunb
i^n aB^oten itjerbc (First Future
Subjunctive).
fagte, er l^aBc gclefeit, atg fein
i^reunb gcfc^ricbeit i^a})t* (Per-
fect Subjunctive.)
fagte, cr \^abt f^elcfcit (Perfect
Subjunctive), el)C fein S^reunb
0Cfc|)ricbcit l)abe. (Perfect Sub-
junctive.)
in the subordinate clause stands
in the Future.
212 APPENDIX, THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD,
Examples.
JDer SDiener antiwortete, cr fei ntci^t im# The servant answered that he was
flanbe tie 5lrbeit gu tijun, benn cc unable to do the work, for he
fci gu fc^ttjac^. (Present Subj.) was too weak.
(Sr erja^ltc tnir, cr 1^ a b e cin Unglucf He told me he had met with a mis-
^t\)Oi\ii. (Perfect Subj.) fortune.
@ie befiau^tete, baf fie nic in i^rem ScBen She affirmed that she had never been
franf gewefen fei. (Perfect Subj.) ill in all her life.
dx fagte, bap cr jid^ iim cine ©telle be^ He said that he was going to apply
toerbcn icerbc. (First Future.) for a situation.
§ 31. The Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, however, must
be used instead of the Present and Perfect Subjunctive, and the
Conditional instead of the Future Subjunctive, when any ambiguity
might arise as to the mood employed, that is to say in cases where the form of
the Present, of the Perfect, or of the Future is identical both in the Indicative
and the Subjunctive Mood. For example, in the sentence —
„©ic fagte ntir, ifjre Xo^ter gin gen * She said to me that her daughters
niemal^ auf 33a((e;" never went to balls ; '
the verb gin gen stands in the Imperfect Subjunctive and not in the Present,
because the third person plural of the Present Indicative and the corre-
sponding person of the Present Subjunctive are identical in the conjugation
of this verb. Both are „fic get) en/' the verb, therefore, must be put in the
Imperfect Subjuncti've to show clearly the mood employed.
§ 32. The Subjunctive is employed in adverbial clauses of pur-
pose and of manner, when the subordinate clause generally begins with the
conjunctions baf, auf baf, bamit, and aU ob; as —
!Du foHfl beinen SSatet nnb beinc SWutter Thou shalt honour thy father and thy
ctjren, auf baf bir'3 tt)ot)lgeI|e unb mother, that thou mayest prosper
bu lange lebeft auf (irben. and thy days be long on earth.
3)1 eg nid)t, al3 ob bieg SSol! mic^ jum Does it not seem as if the people
@ott ntad^e? (Schiller.) meant to make a God of me?
§ 33. The Imperfect Subjunctive and the Pluperfect Subjunctive
are used to express sometnmg possible, or something capable of being done,
also to denote a mere supposition on the part of the speaker, or for the pur-
pose of stating an opinion with caution or modesty; as^ —
(5s f onnte fein, bap cr ni(i^t ju ^aufc Literally: It might be possible that
tD d r c. he were not at home, i. e. He may
possibly not be at home.
3^ T) a 1 1 c \x>z\)\ Sujl, tl^m cincn SScfud^ I should like indeed to pay him a
ju mad}en. visit.
3(i^ U) ii § t c irto'^T, h)a« gu tT)un to 5 r c. I fancy I know what ought to be done.
©« to arc victlcid^t beffer, baS Uutcrnetj* Perhaps it would be better to give up
men aufjugeben. the undertaking.
§ 34. To express a wish we use the Present Subjuncti've, when we believe
in the fulfilment of the wish, but the Imperfect Subjuncti've, when we want to
indicate that the fulfilment of the wish is unlikely, and even impossible ; as —
®ott fei ntit bir ! God be with you!
SW 6 gc cr balb gcfunb toerben I May he soon recover his health I
Svtng Icbc bcr Jtonig! Long live the king!
®ott I; c I f c mir I (^utt;er.) May God help me !
APPENDIX, THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 513
But with the Imperfect Subjunctive :
SSflo6^it cr Batb . gcfunb ioerben ! Would he might soon recover his health !
S33eun er bcd> no(^ leBte ! I would he were still alive !
SW ^ t e cr Balb fcmmen ! Would he might soon come !
§ 35. It must always be remembered that both moods (the Indicative and
the Subjunctive) may stand in Principal Clauses as well as in Subordinate
Glauses, since their use depends alone on the nature of the statement q.ve /. bie Jluie'e.
ttt 1, (instead of du) in : beud)ten (to appear, to seem) ; mir beuc^t {it seems to me,
methinks) ; i^m beuc^te (he thought) ; (bur(J^)j6teuen (to give [one] a hearty
drubbing, to beat [one] black and blue) ; [but : (burd))*blducn (to make or
dye blue)] ; ber @reuel (horror) ; teugneil (to deny) ; ijerteutttben (to slander),
etc.
2. in the termination ctir (sounded as in French), in : ber (Somntaubeur (com-
mander) ; ber Oiebacteur (editor), etc.
i (instead of Xf) in : ber ®\p^ (plaster of Paris) ; bie (gilbe (syllable) ; ber
(syrup) ; ber SSampir (vampire), etc. [Comp. a^.]
*l. Oiegetn unb 9Bortert)erjei^nig fur bie beutfc^e OJec^tfd^reifcung gum ©ebrauc^ in
ben ^reu^ifci^en ©(i^ulen. S3erlin, aBeibmanfc^e a3uci^()anbtuug. 2. ytegeln unb SBorters
»crjei(^mg fur bic beutfci^e Oiec^tf^reibung i^um ©ebrauc!^ in ben bat)erif(^en ©d^ulen.
aJiiin^en, ©rpebition beg ftgt. 3entral;@$ulbii^er;33erlagg.
21 6 SVNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING,
Ytte:
it (instead of i) in the verbal termination ic'rcit, as in : fiubie'rcn {to study) ; fpoj
gie'rcn {to go for a lualk) ; mavfd)ic'rcn {to march) ; V^obic'ren {to try, to test) ;
I)antie'ren {to handle, to manage), etc. — and in their derivatives, as in : bie
^antie'ntng {management y business, profession), etc.; also in: gicb {give), and
derivatives.
Oil {pronounced as in French, instead of u) in words coming from the French, as
bie O^ouragc {forage) ; ber Courier {quarter master) ; ber gouvnicr {veneer), etc.
Only one Vo"w^el (instead of two) —
in : lax {bare, destitute of; [of money] : in cash) ; bte 93arfd^aft {ready money,
cash in hand) ; baS SWap {measure) ; bag . 2 (a).]
(^) before I, \\\, tl, and t/ as in : anmdT)tic^ {gradually) ; befel)(cn {to
command) ; iiet)men {to take) ; ttofinen {to live, to reside) ; lel^rcn {to
teach), etc. Bxceptions: bie 5eme {an old secret criminal court in
Westphalia) and derivatives, as : ber ^yemric^ter {a judge of that court),
and derivatives.
{c) in : bie %ii)\iz {feud, quarrel) ; bie 2Wat)b {mowing), from ui&'^en {to mow) ;
ber !Dra^t {ivire) from bvet)cn (/o /«r«) ; bie Staijt {seam), from iia^cn (/o
j<"iy), and other words derived from verbs containing an aspirated f).
{d) in a few proper names, as in: ©ert^a, ®untt|er, SWart^a, 9}?atl}ilbe,
X()cot)a(b, 3!()cobor, etc.
(e) in many nouns originally Greek, as: bie Jtat^cbra(e (cathedral);
bag %i)ma {theme) ; bie XijtoU^k' ; bie 3:t)eorie' ; bog 3;()ermo»te'ter ; ber
^Pa'nt^er, etc.
2. t) is not retained after t: —
{a) in syllables beginning with a t-sound and containing a diph-
thong or a double vowel, as in : ber Xau {dew) ; bag Xan {rope) ; ber
SFNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 31 7
Seer (tar) ; teeren (to tar) ; bcx or baS %t[l [part, or share) ; teuer [dear) ;
ba^ J^iev {animal) ; »erteibigen (/irtgf)aiig {inn), etc.
Mark well : ^uvra ! {hurra !).
1. (instead of c) in many words originally Greek, as in : btc Slfabctnic',
{academy) ; Ipva'ftifc^ {practical) ; bie 5lrit^ttteti'f (arithmetic) ; bic $6i)fi'f
{natural philosophy), etc.— But: ber ($f)ara'fter ; bic SWelancfjoHc'.
2. (instead of c and qu) in many words originally Latin or French,
but which have become quite germanised, and are now looked upon as
altogether German words, as : ber Slbttofa't {laivyer) ; bag ^ogfc'tt {thicket)
from the French : le bosquet ; bag Sofa't {locality) ; bag ^ii'blifum {public) ;
ijafa'nt {vacant) ; ber SSulfa'n {volcano), etc. — More especially in words
terminating in . . . fel, as in : ber Slrti'fet ; bic ^^avti'fcl ; bie ^^to'gfct
{flourish), pi. bic S^to'gfcttl (^fne fwords, frequently made use of 'with a dc"
ceptive purpose),
3. (instead of c) in words with the prefixes ^o = , ^oI = , ltom = , ^Ott = ,
^or=, and also in syllables containing a f -sound followed by t (. . . ft),
as in : bic Jlo^^ic' {copy) ; bic .^ototttc' {colony) ; ber ^ommanba^it {commander) ;
ber ^o'uj!ab(er {constable) ; bag t^ouje'rt {concert) ; bic Jtorrefponbc'nj {correspond-
ence), etc.; bic 2)ibafti'f {didactics)-, bag (Sbi'ft (edict), etc.— But: bag
©i'ctitttt, because not germanised, etc. —
!Mark well : ber «^affec' {coffee), but : bag ©af^ {a fine restaurant where mostly
coffee is served).
NOTE. In foreign words which have preserved a foreign pronunciation,
or certain foreign forms of spelling or inflection, do not use f , but c, as in :
bie (Sanipagttc {campaign) ; ber (Sommi'g (clerk) ; bag Staco'u (smiel ling- bottle) ; ber
9iebai:teii'r (editor) ; bic Slbjecti'Da (adjectives), etc.
Doubtful Orthography. We find: ^ongc'rt and donce'rt, n.; ^a'r^et:
(prison in schools and universities) and (Sa'rccr, m. ; ^omitce' and (Somite', n. ;
^om^^anic' and (Somvaguic', f. ; couje'utrif^ (concentric) and conce'utrifc^ ; ^oujejfio'n
a 1 8 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING.
Write :
and (Sonccfiio'n, f. ; .^onji'l {council) and ©onci% n. ; {[affifijic'ren {to classify) and
claffificie'ren ; ^u'rfuS {course of study) and 6u'rfu5, m. ; forre'ft and corre'ct;
Jtonjunftio'n and (Sonjunctio'n, etc., etc.
From these examples it will be seen that the mode of spelling is fluctuating
between f and c, and c and j, in many words which originally contained the
letter c. The first way is to be preferred, and strongly recommended.
In all the words given above, and many others in common use that
contain a f or a j-sonnd and are quite germanised in spelling and
inflection. (Comp. G. 3.)
Use also f instead of c in words of Greek origin which have preserved the
f-sound, as : — 9lneft)c'te, fat^o'lif(^, ^^omo'bic, 3)iale'ft, etc. — [Comp. B,
letter f, 1.] — And write c and c(|, as before, in: 5l'ccc'nt, 9l'ccufati'»; 91'cquis
fitio'n, etc. —
stti^ (instead of ni§) as a suffix of nouns, as in: ba3 (EreiflniS {event) ; ba3 ©egrabni^
{burial) ; bag SSev^dltniS {relation) ; ba3 33ertttd'(!^tnig {bequest), etc. —
The prefix mif . . ., however, remains unchanged, as in : bag 2Ki'ptterjidubni«
{misunderstanding), pi. btc SWi'^»crfidnbniffc.
^ (instead of f ) in beg^alb {therefore) ; begttjegen {therefore, for this reason) ; tnbel
{meanwhile, whilst ; however) ; itnterbeg {meanwhile^ whilst) ; toegt|alb {why^ ;
iuegwegen {why), etc. —
$f (instead of jf ) in : bagfelbe {the same) ; begfetben {of the same) ; biegfeitS {on this
side), etc.
^t (instead of fi) in : JDiengtag {Tuesday) ; ©cburtgtag {birthday) ; ^ru^Unggtag
{spring-day), and other compound nouns in which g occurs as a sign of the
Genitive and is followed by a t.
ff between two vowels, the first one of which is short, as in taffcn {to let, to leave) ;
btc Xaffe {cup)', trotj beffcn {in spite of that); iweffen {whose), etc. —
^ I. between two vowels, the first one of which is long, as in: bu'pen {to atone
for) ; fc^icpcn {to shoot), etc.
2. before t, and at the end of words, as in : cr Td^t {he leaves) ; i:^r lafit {jou
leave) ; gebiipt {atoned for) ; (a^ {let) ; ber ^w'^ {kiss), etc. —
t (instead of bt) in : ber Xotc {a dead man or person) ; tot {dea(t) ; totcn {to kill) ;
ber S^otfi^Iag {manslaughter) ; ber Xotengrdber {gravedigger)^ etc. — Comp. letter
b (instead of bt.)
t (instead of b) in : bag 93rot {bread).
t (and never j^) in the accented and original Latin combinations: — tia', tie', tio',
as in martia'lifci^, ^atie'nt, m., S^iatic'n, f., Xrabitic'n, f., SWotio'n, etc.
But write : ©ra'jie, Sngvebie'njien, etc., e being unaccented.
g 1. (instead of tj) after a long vowel, as in : bie Q3rc'jfl {biscuit in the shape of a
twisted ring, cracknel) ; bu'jcn {fo call a person thou), etc.
2. (instead of ©g and (Sc) in : ber 3ar {c%ar) ; bag BeVter {sceptre), etc.
3. (instead of cc) regularly at the end of foreign words with German
pronunciation and terminating in French in ce, and in Latin in tia, tius,
tium, cius, cium, as in: bag ^enefi'j, bie Sufti'j, bag <&ogpi'j, bie SWili'j, bie
^oix'l ; bie 2)ifferc'nj, bie ©ente'nj, bie aJafa'nj ; bie gina'njen, bie Stowi'je/ tie SKlia'nj,
SVNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 2l()
bie 3)ifla'nj, etc.— (But with foreign pronunciation : SUliancc, S)ij!ance, etc.)
4. also in words quite germanised, as : ber ^cji'rf (district, circuit) ; bic liia'nje
(lance) ; bie ^oltjef (police) ; ber 5|5oligi'ft (policeman) ; bag Xeqerol (pocket-pistol) ;
bag !i;erje'tt (trio), etc. — But write : (Ed'far, bie (Sdfu'r (cesure, cesura) ; bie ©e'ber,
bic ©etebiitd't, bie (SenjVr (censorship), cenfie'ren (to censure, to re-vieiv), ber (Se'nti;
me'ter, bie ©erea'lien (cereals), bag ©oliba't, ber (Si'rfuttt|!e'r, bag Si)ce'um, etc.
5. (instead of c) in verbs terminating in . . . ic'rctt, as : faBrijie'ren (to manufac-
ture) ; tttuft jie'reii (to make music) ; ^.niblijie'ren (to publish), etc.
Note. In many words which originally contained the letter c, the mode of
spelling is unsettled and fluctuating between c and j, as in: SD^ebiji'n and
9)?ebici'n, f . ; bag Oieje^^t and Oiecept, n. (prescription, recipe)', ^rinji'p and
^rinci'ip, n. (principle) ; ^roje'nt and ^roce'ttt, n. (per cent.); ^roje'p and ^Jiroce'p,
m., etc. — [Read carefully B, Note to letter % also letter t of B, and General
Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words, where additional examples
are given.]
C. fcn^emeine f&tmtxfxm^tn ti^et tie (S($rei(tutd tee
g^rcmbtoortcr*
(General Observations on the Spelling of Foreign Words.)
1. "With, foreign "words containing sounds and combinations of sounds
not originally German, THE GENERAL PRINCIPLE regarding their
orthography is that, their foreign pronunciation being preserved, also
the foreign garb of their orthography is retained.
So, for example, w^e use : —
oi (sounded as in French) in : bie SWemoi'ren (memoirs) ; bie %o\k'iit
(toilet).
and I (sounded as in French) in: bie ^aga'gc (luggage); bag Sogi'g
(lodgings) ; ber ©enba'rm (a police-officer on horseback) ; bag ©eitie'
(genius ; a man of great talent) ; ber Sugenieu'r (engineer) ; bag Sourtia'I
(journal, magazine) ; raiigie'reu (to arrange), etc. — But with Germ.an
pronunciation: ber ©enera'C (general); genia'i (highly gifted); bie
©enialitd't (geniality, originality), etc. —
gtt (sounded as in French) in : ber (S()ant^a'gner (champaign) ; bie
£ovgne'tte (lorgnette, eye-glass), etc.
U (sounded like English 1 followed by y) in : bag S3ataif(o'n (battalion) ;
bag ^i'navb (billiards) ; bag S3iUe't (ticket ; note) ; ber ^ojliKo'ii
(postillion), etc.
ti (sounded as in French, but not quite so nasal) in : bie 9lua'nce (grada-
tion of colours') ; bag ^affi'n (reservoir) ; ber Oiefiai'n (refrain) ; ber
9ta^o'n (ray of light ; [of a fortification] : radius) ; bag 93iotcnce'((
('violoncello), etc.
2. Many foreign words, on the other hand, composed of German
220 SVNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING.
sounds, which might be indicated by German letters, have as yet
preserved their original orthography. So we find : —
at (for the sound of d) in : bic (5()ai'fc {chaise), from the French ;
ax\ and can (for the sound of o) in: bie (Sau'cc {sauce) ; bag S3ureau {qffice)^
from the French ;
^ (for the sound of fd^) in: bic S^ujfcc' {turnpike-road) y from the
French ;
d) (for the Greek f-sound) in : ber or bag Sl^or {choir or chorus), from the
Greek ;
p\^ (for the sound of f ) in : bcr -P^ilofo'p^ {philosopher), from the Greek ;
t^ (for the sound of t) in : ber %^xq\\ {throne), from the Greek ; and
^ (for the German h)-sound) in: ijiotc'tt {violet- blue, adj.), from the
French.
3. Again we find foreign words which, being in common use
and composed of German sounds, have become entirely germanised,
and wear a German garb; as: bic Xru'ppc {troop, company), French: la
troupe ; bic ©lu'v^je {group), French : la groupe ; ber 2)igfu'rg {discourse)^ French:
le discours ; ber ©efretd'r {secretary), French : le secretaire.
It follows from the three preceding paragraphs : — that it is impos-
sible to reduce the spelling of foreign words to any fixed principles,
and that there exists at present much uncertainty and inconsistency
respecting the spelling of such words. [Comp. B, Consonants, Note to
letter f, also B, letter j, where additional examples are given.]
(Small Initials [instead of Capitals\ and Contractions.)
USE SMALL INITIALS:—
1. With Nouns used as Prepositions, Conjunctions, Indefinite
Numerals, and Adverbs, as in : angerid)!^ (/« the face of) ; infolge {in conse-
quence of) ; kt)lifg {on behalf of) ;— fadg {in case of) ;— ciu bipd)en {a bit, a
little) ; cin '^^ei(eii {at times) ; eiiimal {once) ; j^weimal {twice) ; bergauf {uphill) ;
fc^^fiikr {head over heels), etc.
2. With Nouns used in Verbal-Combinations, in which, by the by,
they are strongly accented, and treated as separable particles, i.e. are separated
from the verb and placed at the end of the clause when used in a principal
sentence and in a simple tense. Such Verbal-Combinations are : — xt'^t (;aben
SFNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING. 221
{to be right) ; u'nred)t TjaBen {to be wrong) ; \v!\> i%\\\ {to be sorry) ; \m'i) f^im {to
hurt) ;— fd)u'lb Ijaben or fein (/o be in fault) ; — fei'nb fein (/o ^ Bin itti'((en6 (I ha^ve
a mind, I intend) ; — jia'ttfinben, |!a'ttl)abett {to take place) ; iv»a'f>i-:ie'^men {to per-
ceive) ; tei'lnefjmen {to take part in, to sympathise ivith) ; u'berl;anbuet>meu (to
increase) ; f)au'g()a{ten {to keep house, to manage) ; a'd;tgeben (/o pay attention) ;
Vvei'ggeben (^o abandon, to expose) ; bra'c^licgcn {to lie fallow) ; jufta'tten fommen {to
be of me, to come in usefully) ; infia'nb fetjeu {to repair, to restore) ; jujia'ube
fommen {to accomplish) ; imfti'c^ (aiTeu {to lea've in the lurch), etc.— (Sr l^dlt i)^\X^',
c6 tfi mil* juftattctt gef omnten ; eg ^at ubertjanbgeuommen ; eg ijl mir guteit gelrcrben.
But : (Sr tjat feiiieu %ix[ an mir, etc.
3. With Pronouns and Ifumerals, as:— jemanb, nientanb, jebcr, feiner,
einer, ber eiiie, bcr awl^tu, man; — ctli^e {some), eiiiige, eiiigetue, ntanci^e, m\t, ifiU eg 3^uen juliebe t^m {I will do
it to please you), etc.
E. 3etIc9«W9 t>tt 35Botter in 3U6etf* .
(Division of Words into Syllables.)
1, When part of a German word has to be separated from the rest in order
to be carried on to the next line, the division into Syllables is made as we
would naturally deliver them whilst pronouncing the word very slowly and
222 SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES IN THE GERMAN SPELLING.
distinctly. The compound letters : ^, d, tt, Ipf, p^, fc^/ f^, ft/ #/ ti^,
and tj, should, as a rule, not be separated. [For exceptions see § 2 of this
chapter.] Examples : — ru^eu, bic^fer, (Sonsne, SWutitcr, SWit^tag, bcn^nod^, Stuf^fe,
2Bet4er;gtag, funf4c, Sln^ter, Sffiec^^fet, ^offmuug, ^offmun^gcn, Sin-gcr, Sangjfamifcit,
— 93rus(J^e, l^a^cfen, @td;bte, flo^^jfen, Dr4^0igrajV^ie, tojf*^^"/ ou^4P^«'<^fn^ J^^jlig,
fc^ic^f en, fio^t^ar, ha^tjcn, ^tiXt.
2. The syllables forming the constituent parts of Compound Words should
not be broken up, and the principal rule, as expressed above, cannot always
be applied to them. Examples : t|in;cin, (>ier;auf, ^cr;cin, barium, ivarsum, »or;au«,
yoKseiubcn, 3n;ter;ef;fe, WuUoi\h)p, 9lt;mojfv:^a;rc, (S(|iff;faf|rt* (Sc^mimm^mciijlet*,
(^Z'.muiAx^, JDi^^ijen^, bi^jpu^ie^rcn, 2)i«;))Osfi*ti*ou, bejob*oc^4ett, oufjer^jlc^en,
@e;burt«4ag, 8:ru!^4ing34ag.
* But write ' ©d^iffal^rt ' and ' ©(^wimtttcij^er ' when no separation takes place.
F. ©et 2X^)oftro;|)^» (The Apostrophe.)
1. The Apostrophe is more especially used for indicating the suppression of
certain letters in poetry and in the language of every-day life, as in English.
Examples: 3(^ lieb' bid^ ; ®te^' auf ! 2Diege^t'^? @o ifl 'g cec^t; ®elb l^ab' ^
tiic^t.
2. Contractions of prepositions and articles are used without the Apo-
strophe, as: am, beim, untcrm, an6, ing, jum.
3. The Apostrophe is abolished before the inflections indicating the
Genitive relation of proper names, as : ^icero^ ©rtefe ; ©ci^iUerg ©ebid^te ;
^omerg Slia^; gritjcng ©eburtstag ; J^amburgg ^anbcl; <^ii)?):iu\\i SWutter; bie
@iin»obner S3re6(aii6.
4. Family names, however, terminating in $ or j, the genitive of
which cannot be formed by adding §, require an Apostrophe to be placed
after them for indicating the Genitive relation, as : a)emoj^^ene6' Oiebeii ; aSo^'
Cuife,
INDEX
TO THE GRAMMATICAL RULES AND IDIOMATIC RENDERINGS.
A.
a or an preceded by * not ', how to
render, S. 126, N. 12. The nu-
meral ' a ' not translated before
hundred or thousand, S. 132, N. 10.
a great deal, how to render, S. 65,
N. 3 and S. 77> N. 3. an hour,
how to render, S. 235, N. 10. a
month, how to render, S. 167, N.
24.
about, to be, rendered by im SSegriff
fein or ivoHen, S. 6, N. 4.
Abstract nouns, their formation
from Infinitives of verbs, S. 11,
N.7.
Adjectives. Used as nouns, S. 34,
N. I. National adjectives require a
small initial, S. loi, N. i. Adjec-
tives and all parts qualifying nouns
must be placed before them, S. 128,
N. II. The formation of their su-
perlative used predicatively, S. 120,
N. 14.
Adverbs. Their position in Impera-
tive clauses, S. 68, N. 2. Must not
precede the verb or copula when
the subject stands before them, S.
102, N. 30. Formation of the rela-
tive superlative of Adverbs, S. 183,
N. 24.
all in connection with a possess, adj.
pron. and a noun in the sing, num-
ber, how to render, S. 157, N. 20.
All of us [them, you), S. 74, N. 3,
how to render.
Apposition, the, its agreement, S.
53, N. 9.
Articles, the, and other determinative
words repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Their
position in connection with adject-
ives and adverbs, S. 28, N. 9. The
Definite Article. Before nouns
representing a whole class, and
before abstract nouns, S. 3, N. 2.
Before nouns of persons preceded
by an adjective or a common name,
S, 10, N. 2. Used to mark ths-Gen.,
pat., and Ace. of proper names, S.
25, N. 5. Used in stating the price
of goods, S. 33, N. 7. Used before
objects individualised or singled out,
S. 40, N. 9. Used instead of Possess.
Adj. Pronouns, S. 43, N. 9, A and
B. The Lndefinite Article.
Not expressed before nouns de-
noting professions, etc., S. 14, N. 2.
How to render when preceded by
*not', S. 126, N. 12.
as, con].j = since, how to render, S.
41, N. 6. = according to, how to
render, S. 74, N. 6.
ask (to), how to render, S. 132, N. 23.
at == at the house of, how to render, S.
i53j N. 15. at home, how to render,
S. 63, N. 8. at the rate of, how to
render, S. 235, N. 9.
Attributive construction, S. 7, N.
3; S. 48, N.6.
ailf, prep., = in, before names of
Islands, S. 46, N. 6.
Auxiliary verbs of tense, often
omitted in subordinate clauses, S.
52, N. 8.
B.
be, to, rendered by tnuffen, S. 62,
N. 4.
beginning with, rendered by »on . . .
an, S. 102, N. 4.
bletben, conjugated with fein, S. 98,
N. 5.
but, rendered by fonbeni after a nega-
tive, S. 6, N. 10.
by, prep., = /^ro«^^, bur(!&, S. 59, N.
13. In connection with the Passive
Voice, rendered by ijon, S. 106, N.
23.
both . . . and, folvol^t . . . at^ m^,
S. 59, N. II,
324
INDEX,
c.
Capital Initial, when required for
pronouns, S. 69, N. 2.
care, to take care of, S. 91, N. 7.
cause (to) how to render, S. 73, N. i.
Collective nouns in the Singular re-
quire the verb to agree with them
in the Singular, S. 107, N. 13.
Colon, the, its use, S. 36, N. 3.
Comma, the, not used to enclose
adverbial clauses, etc., S. 15, N. 3.
command, to, how to render, S. 73,
N.I.
Compound expressions, their im-
portance, S. 33, N. 4.
Compound forms with auxiliary and
Present Participle or *to do' and
Infinitive, how to render into Ger-
man, S. 32, N. II.
Compound Noiins. Their impor-
tance, S. 33, N. 4 ; their formation,
S. 36, N. 7, A and B, and S. 76, N.
22, A, B, C and X); their Gender,
S. 36, N. 7, C; compound nouns
which have the last component in
common are connected with hy-
phens, S. 71, N. 2.
Conditional Mood, the, its use, App.
§§ 36 and 37.
Conjunctive Mood, the, its use, App.
§§ 26-35.
Construction. Principal and Co-
ordinate Glauses, App. §§ 1-12.
Inverted Construction, App. §§ 13-
15. Subordinate Clauses, App. §§
16-24.
Construction. Inverted after quota-
tions, S. 32, N. 5. Attributive con-
struction, S. 7, N. 3, ^ ; S. 48, N. 6.
Position of adverbs in Imperative
Clauses, S. 68, N. 2.
Copula, the, not to be omitted, S.
27, N. 7. The Copula must follow
the Subject when the latter begins
the principal clause, S. 5, N. 2.
copy, noun, how to render, S. 132,
N. 17.
t>rt, adv. in combination with a prep,
governing the Dat. or Ace, S. 4,
N. 5, B. Xi(l, conj., denotes lo-
gical cause, used for rendering ' as '
and * since ', S. 30, N. 4. ^a, adv.,
in connection with a prep,, required
in the principal clause when verbs
and adjectives governing a prep,
are followed by a subordinate clause,
S. 87, N. 6.
Definite Article, the. When to be
repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Its position
in connection with adjectives and
adverbs, S. 28, N. 9. Before nouns
representing a whole class, and
before abstract nouns, S. 3, N. 2.
Before names of persons preceded
by an adj. or a common name, S.
10, N. 2. Used to mark the Gen.,
Dat., and Ace. of proper names, S.
25, N. 5. Used in stating the price
of goods, S. 33, N. 7. Used before
objects individualised or singled out,
S. 40, N. 9. Used instead of Posses.
Adj. Pronouns, S. 43, N. 9, v^and B.
Demonstrative Pronoun, followed
by a relat. pron., how to render, S.
8, N. I.
het and bic must be used as relat.
pronouns in reference to a personal
pron. of the ist and 2nd pers. sing,
and pi., and also in reference to
the pers. pron. of the 3rd person pi.
(@ie), S.78, N.7.
do, used in sentences of entreaty,
rendered by bc^, S. 92, N. 9.
t)Od^, adv., = * do ' in sentences of en-
treaty, S. 92, N. 9.
E.
er> suffix, used to form names of male
persons from names of countries
and places, S. 157, N. 4.
criteitlicit, requires the prep, ju, S.
27, N. 4.
ertva^leit, requires the prep, gu, S.
27, N. 4.
C§. Used as grammatical Object in
principal clauses, S. 51, N. 13.
Used as grammatical Subject, S.
104, N. 19.
F.
fact, the, how to render, S. 1 15, N. 2.
fond (to be — of), how to render, S.
20, N. 2.
for, rendered by feit in sentences ex-
pressing the duration of an action
up to the time of speaking, S. 145,
N. 17.
for years, S. 166, N. 10,
INDEX,
2125
from, referring to time and place,
how to render, S. 102, N. 4.
full of, how to render, S. 74, N. 14.
G.
gpi^flt, always construed with fehi, S.
29, N. 3.
©rma^Iilt, wife, consort, S. 10 1,
N. 5.
Genitive, the, of a proper noun
stands generally before the govern-
ing noun, S. 14, N. 3.
gentleman, how to render, S. 88,
N. 2.
0cnt(c), adv., denotes liking, S. 20,
N. 2.
Gei'und, the. How to render, S. i,
N. 3 ; S. 34, N. 10. Preceded by
a possess, adj. and a prep., how to
render, S. 161, N. 21.
Qtebt (e^)=the matter is, S. 63, N.
9; = there is, there are, S. 82,
N.7.
go, to, how to render when = to travel,
etc., S. 233, N. 4.
going (to be — to), how to render,
S. 67, N. 2.
H.
4^afer, not used in the pL, S. 22,
N. I.
have, to, rendered by ntitiTen, S. 62,
N.4.
head^^au^t in elevated diction, S.
127, N. 8.
home and at homey how to render,
S. 63, N. 8.
Hyphens required to show the con-
nection between compound nouns
that have the last part in common,
S. 71, N. 2.
I.
I, should, if possible, not begin the
sentence, S. 115, N. i.
If, rendered by trenn, S. 64, N, 12.
£|bt, formerly used in addressing per-
sons of the lower ranks of society,
S.i37,N.2.
in, prep., how to render before names
of islands, S. 46, N. 6.
Indefinite Article, the. When to
be repeated, S. 10, N. 9. Its posi-
tion in connection with adjectives
and adverbs, S. 28, N. 9. Not ex-
VOL. IV.
pressed before nouns denoting pro-
fessions, etc., S. 14, N. 2. How to
render when preceded by * not *,
S. 126, N. 12.
iltbem , conj., used for rendering the
Participle in -ing in adverbial clauses
of manner, S. iii, N. 6.
Indicative Mood, the, its use, App.
§§ 25 and 35.
Infinitive, the. With an Accusative,
howtorender, S. 57, N. 14. When
used without the preposition ju, S.
78, N. 14. Forms abstract nouns,
S.ii,N.7.
Inverted Construction. When to
be used, App. §§ 13-15. Used after
quotations, S. 32, N, 5.
Imperfect, the, its use, S. loi, N. 22.
it, dependent on a prep., how to
render, S. 4, N. 5, 5.
J.
3efn§ (5:^riftll§, its declension, S.
141, N. 9.
K.
*feitt, the general translation for *not
a', S. 126, N. 12.
lafKtt, to order, to command, to
cause, S. 73, N. i.
le^tett, to teach, requires two accu-
satives, S. 42, N. 4, and S. 43, N. 10.
like, to, how to render, S. 20, N. 2.
live, to, how to render, S. 116, N. 17.
M.
mac^ett, requires the prep, gii, S. 27,
N. 4, and S. 102, N. 13.
man = human being, how to render,
S.i34,N.9.
Ill ait, pron. With the Active Voice
instead of Eng. Passive Voice, S. 4,
N. 4. SWciU, indef. pron., used to
render the Eng. 'you' used in a
general sense, S. 92, N. 5, also S.
134, N. 4.
9Jtarf, bie, its inflection, S. 58, N. 3.
matter, the — is, e3 giebt, S. 63, N. 9.
mogett, auxil. v. of mood, S. 20,
N. 2.
tuiiffett = to be and to ha've, ioWowed
by the infinitive of another verb,
S. 62, N. 4.
226
INDEX,
N.
nac^, prep. = to, S. 72, N. 4.
Names of male persons and inha-
bitants of countries and places made
bythesuffixer, S. i57,N. 4. Proper
Names, their declension, S.65, N. i.
National adjectives, require a small
initial, S. loi, N. i.
not a=no, S. 126, N. 12.
Nouns. Compound Nouns, their im-
portance, S. 33, N. 5. Formation
of Compound Nouns, S. 36, N. 7,
and S. 76, N. 22. Nouns must be
preceded by the parts qualifying
them, S. 128, N. 11. Abstract
Nouns made from the Infinitives of
verbs, S. 11, N. 7. Collective
Nouns in the Sing, require the verb
to agree with them in the Sing.,
S. 107, N. 13.
Number. Use the Sing, number in
connection with a Collective Noun
in the Sing., S. 107, N. 13.
O.
Object, the grammatical, in a principal
clause, followed by a subordinate
clause, or a supine, S. 51, N. 13.
on. On the contrary^ how to render,
S. 66, N. 16. To be on the point of^
rendered by iDoHcn, S. 67, N. 2.
one, not translated after an adj. or
a pron., S. 67, N. 3.
one, numeral, not translated before
hundred and thousand, S. 132, N. 10.
one day, how to render, S. 19, N. 2.
only, adv., how to render, S. 109,
N. 5.
order, to, how to render, S. 73, N. i.
ought, how to render, S. 64, N. 5.
Participles, the. Participles used
attributively must be inflected, S.
7, N. 3, B. The Past (or Per-
fect) Participle. As a rule pre-
cedes the qualified noun, S. 7, N.
3, A. Rendered by a relat. clause,
S. 7, N. 3, B. Rendered by the
attributive construction, S. 7, N. 3,
and S. 48, N. 6. Used elliptically
to denote state or condition, S. 102,
N. 3. The Present Participle.
The English — qualifying a preced-
ing noun, turned into a relat. clause.
S. 16, N. 4. How to render when
it denotes a logical cause, S. 30,
N. 4. Rendered by the attribu-
tive construction, S. 48, N. 6. Used
adverbially to denote manner or
state, S. 53, N. 12. Howto render
when used in adverbial clauses of
time, S. 55, N. i. The — in -ing in
adverbial clauses of manner, ren-
dered by the conj. iubem and a finite
verb, S. in, N. 6.
Passive Voice, the. Its formation
in German, S. 2, N. i. How to
recognise, S. 2, N. i. Rendered
into German by a reflective verb, or
the pron. wiau with the active voice,
S.4, N.4.
people, how to render, S. 134, N. 4.
Perfect, the. Its use, S. 48, N. 2.
The Eng. Perfect rendered by the
Present in German, S. 145, N. 17.
Person, the, for whose benefit an
action is done, must, as a rule, be
indicated in German, S. 130, N. 12.
Personal Pronoun, the. In the
Dat. case, used to indicate the Pos-
sessor, S. 43, N. 9, B. Used to
indicate the person for whose benefit
an action is performed, S. 58, N.
8. Personal and possessive pro-
nouns require a capital initial in
letters, S. 69, N. 2.
?»flllt&, ba^, one £, Engl., never takes
the mark of the plural, S. 58, N. 3.
Possessive Adjective Pronoun,
the. When repeated in German,
S. 10, N. 9. How to render into
German, S. 43, N. 9, A and B.
pound, how to render, S. 58, N. 3.
Predicate, the. Copula or Verb, must
follow the Subject when it begins
the clause, S. 5, N. 2. The forma-,
tion of the Superlatives of adjec-
tives used predicatively, S. 120,
N. 14.
Present Tense, the German, used to
express duration up to the time of
speaking, where the Engl, use the
Perfect, S. 145, N. 17.
Principal Clauses. Their con-
struction, App. §§ 1-12.
progress, noun, how to render, S.
132, N. I.
Proper names, when not inflected,
S. 65, N. I.
INDEX.
22y
R.
rate, y^t the rate of, how to render,
S. 235, N. 9.
Relative Clauses, rendered by the
attributive construction, S. 48, N. 6.
Relative Pronoun, the. Follows,
as a rule, its antecedent, S. 13, N.
5. Must not be omitted in German,
S. 16, N. 10. ^ix and bte must be
used in reference to a preceding
personal pronoun, S. 78, N. 7.
Scholar, how to render, S. 128, N. i.
fcitl, auxiliary, its use, S. 29, N. 3.
fi*it, as a transl. of the Eng. prep.
for in sentences which express a
duration of an action up to the
time of speaking, S. 145, N. 17.
fO, conj. When required in the begin-
ning of principal clauses, S. 27, N. 8.
so, in connection with a transitive
verb, rendered by eg, bag, bicg, S.
132, N. 13.
foUcu, expresses assertion, S. 54, N.
13; = ought, S. 64, N. 5.
®t., abbreviation of Sanct., its deri-
vation, S. 103, N, 33.
Subject, the. Must be followed by the
Copula or the Verb when it begins
the principal clause, S. 5, N. 2, Its
position in subordinate clauses, S.
66, N. 15. Not to be omitted, S.
27, N. 7. The grammatical subject
in the form of the pron. eg, S. 104,
N. 19.
Subjunctive Mood, the. Its use,
App. §§ 26-35.
Subordinate Clauses. Their con-
struction, App. §§ 16-24.
Superlative, the, of an adjective
used predicatively is generally pre-
ceded by ant, S. 120, N. 14. How
to form the relat. Superlative of
adverbs, S. 183, N. 24.
Supine, the. Explanation and use,
S. I, N. 2. Formation of the Su-
pine Present, S. i, N. 2. Used for
rendering the Eng. Gerund pre-
ceded by a preposition, S. i, N. 3,
Expresses purpose, S. 19, N. 7.
Used for rendering the Eng. Ge-
rund governed by a noun or a verb,
S. 34, N. 10. Used in connection
with the verb tef)ren,-S. 43, N. 10.
Suppose, I, in interrogativesentences,
rendered by u^otil, S. 92, N. 3.
T.
Take, to. How to render, S. 3, N.
8. To take care of, how to render,
S. 91, N.7.
teach, to, how to render, S. 42, N. 4,
and S. 43, N. 10.
that, them, those, dependent on a
prep., how to render, S. 4, N. 5, 5.
that and those, followed by a relat.
pron., cannot be rendered by the
adv. ba in connection with a pre-
ceding preposition, S. 8, N. i.
that = in order that, how to render,
S. 183, N. 6.
there is and There are, rendered
by eg gteH S. 82, N. 7.
they, used in an indefinite sense, ren-
dered by man, S. 134, N. 4.
think, to, how to render, S. 64,
N. II.
to = in order to, how to render, S. 19,
N. 7.
to, prep., how to render, S. 72, N. 4.
trust, to, anything to a person, S. 91,
N. 6.
U.
Use, to, V. tr. and intr., how to render,
S. 129, N. 6.
Verb, tlie. Agreement of verbs with
collective nouns, S. 69, N. 17. Aux-
iliary of tense often omitted in
subordinate clauses, S. 52, N. 8.
The verb or copula must follow
the subject, when the latter begins
the Principal Clause, S. 5, N. 2.
Verbal, the, in -ing, how to render,
S. I, N. 3 ; S. 34, N. ro.
very, rendered by the Superl. of the
auv. fjoc^, S. 161, N. 2.
W.
want, to, rendered by icoHen, S. 63,
N. 10.
tt>a§. When required as a relat.
pron., S. 3, N. 7. Used in refer-
ence to a preceding whole clause,
as a transl. of ' which ', S. 33, N. 8.
we, in an indefinite sense, rendered by
man, S. 134, N. 4.
tt)Crt>CU, conjugated with fein,S.98,N.5.
Q 2
2^8
INDEX,
what sort of, how to render, S. 63,
N. 2.
■when. Rendered by aU, S. 4, N. 2.
Rendered by mnn, S. 18, N. 6.
Rendered by \v\.\ S. 131, N. 4.
where, rendered by wo, S. 131, N. 4.
which, rendered by \-oa6, S. 33, N. 8.
wife, how to render, S. loi, N. 5.
wish, to, rendered by iwcHeit, S. 63,
N. 10.
tt)0, relat. conj., its use, S. 131, N. 4.
tP 0^1 = I suppose, S. 92, N. 3.
iPoUeit. Expresses ivisb and luant,
S. 63, N. 10. — = to be going, to be
on the point, S. 67, N. 2. — = to be
about, S. 6, N. 4.
wonder, to, how to render, S. 90,
N. ir.
afftort, bag, double pi., S. 7, N. 2.
worth remembering, how to render,
S. 157, N. 22.
Y.
you. Used in a general sense, ren-
dered by man, S. 92, N, 5. When
rendered by 3(;r, S. 137, N. 2.
JU, prep. Required with verbs de-
noting choosing, appointing, etc.,
S. 27, N. 4, and S. 102, N. 13.
The End.
ClaMniititt ^«ss $am
LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE
CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING WORKS : —
THIRD EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of
the German Government Regulations of 1880.
THE GERMANS AT HOME; A Practical Introduction to German
Conversation, with an Appendix^ containing the Essentials of German
Grammar^ and a Synopsis of the changes the German spelling has
undergone through the Government Regulations of 1880.
=^3*c= [Price 2S. 6d,
SECOND EDITION, carefully revised.
THE GERMAN MANUAL ; A German Grammar, A Reading-book,
and A Handbook of Conversation in German. [Price "js. 6d,
* The German Manual ' is intended to follow ' The Germans At Home/ It con-
tains, besides a complete Grammar, a series of interesting anecdotes, stories, fables,
letters, and conversations arranged in progressive order, and finishes with a German
Play, and Franz Hoffman's well written and highly interesting story of ' Beethoven,'
especially adapted for this work. It offers great advantages for self-instruction, and
will be very useful to persons who, having a certain knowledge of German, desire to
obtain fluency in speaking and writing the language.
A GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE, in two Parts.
Part I, Accidence; Part H, Syntax. With an Appendix, compre-
hending : —
I. The Declension of German Nouns. IV. The Use and Signification of the
II. Essentials of Construction. Auxiliary Verbs of Mood.
III. Essentials of Word-building. V. On Punctuation. [Price 3^. 6d.
The * Grammar ' forms the first part of the ' German Manual ' and, in this separate
form, is intended for the use of students who wish to make themselves acquainted with
German Grammar chiefly for the purpose of being able to read German books. It is
divided into paragraphs, and will commend itself as a text-book to the notice of
teachers who, in pursuing the study of German Literature with their pupils, require a
Grammar in a concise form for reference and study.
SECOND EDITION, with the German spelling revised to meet the requirements of the
German Government Regulations of 1880.
GERMAN COMPOSITION; A Theoretical and Practical Guide to
the art of Translating English Prose into German; with an Appendix
containing, among other matters, a Synopsis of the changes the
German spelling has undergone through the Government Regula-
tions of 1880. [Price 4^-. dd.
\A Key in Preparation?^
The book has been arranged so that it may be used with advantage by students
who do not possess the author's other works.
SYNOPSIS OF THE CHANGES THE GERMAN SPELLING HAS UNDER-
GONE THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS OF 1880; a
concise and easy Guide for English students of German desirous of adopting the
new official German spelling. Reprinted from * German Composition.'
[Price 6^.
[Any one of the preceding books, being complete in itself, may be used
independently of any other book in the Series, according to the require-
ments of the student.]
[p. T. O.
EXTRACTS FROM OPINIONS
ON H. LANGE'S GERMAN COURSE.
'The works bear evidence of remarkable painstaking, great
teaching power, and a thorough understanding of the art of teach-
ing. — Dr. Karl Dammann, Lecturer on the German Language and Litera-
ture at the Mason Science College^ Queen^s College^ and the Midland Institute^
Birmingham.
•The Germans at Home.*
*The author is a practical teacher, and we are glad to recommend his
work as likely to reduce, as far as possible, the inevitable difficulties to be
encountered in the first study of a foreign language. Happy boys and girls
of the present day, if they only knew their own blessings ! '
Journal of Education,
* " The Germans at Home " consists of forty conversations, intended to
illustrate one day out of the life of a German family at home, as its name
implies. The result is a decided improvement upon the run of books of
this class. The interest of the student is sustained throughout, and every-
thing is done in fact, which can be done to create a royal road to a know-
ledge of German.* Manchester Courier.
'"The Germans at Home " is an excellent book, and is likely to be ex-
tensively used.' Schoolmaster.
* The traits called " new " in this Course are thus defined by the author.
" First the Facts, and then the Theory, the Laws and the Inferences."
" The Germans at Home " (printed in Roman characters) contains forty
conversations, all connected, so as " to illustrate one day out of the life of a
German family at home." The themes are German, the idioms are modern,
and the "variations" that follow the conversations seem likely to be
useful.' Athenstum.
*A Grammar of the German Language.'
* The author has obviously studied to make as clear as possible the arrange-
ment of his materials, and the printer has aided that endeavour.'
Athenoeum.
*The Grammar is a good one.' Schoolmaster.
LANGE S GERMAN COURSE. 3
*The Germans at Home' and 'The German
Manual.'
* Instead of wearying the unhappy student with learning a lot of dry and
elaborate technicalities of accidence and syntax at the outset, Mr. Lange
starts him with conversations — forty in number, each illustrative of one day
out of the life of a German family at home — and very soon lands him " in
medias res " by the aid of interlinear translation, by the means of which he
can gain a knowledge of the idioms and peculiarities of structure of the
language, While he is at the same time acquiring a knowledge of the theory
of the language, i.e. of its accidence and syntax. Thus we get in Mr.
Lange's system the facts first, and then proceed to the theory, laws, and
inferences — first the life and spirit, then the form and body in which they
are clothed. Only those who have themselves learnt and taught (or tried
to learn and teach) German, can thoroughly appreciate the advantages of
this plan, which avails itself of the two leading principles which underlie all
learning, and ought to form the basis of all teaching, viz. the principles of
imitation and of variation. When we remember the long and weary hours
spent by ourselves in learning German, we envy Mr. Lange's pupils, and
those who have the chance of using his books.' Manchester Critic.
' Mr. Lange's " German Course " is thoroughly trustworthy and useful.*
Glasgonu Neivs.
* Herr Lange has worked out his principle most successfully.'
Edinburgh Daily Re'view.
*Tlie German Manual.'
'This is a very elaborate work. It contains an amount of matter
unusually great, and of unquestionable excellence. If not multum in
parn^o, it is at least multum in una. The bigness of the book is -largely due
to the fact that the author has amalgamated with this volume the entire
grammar, which is also published in a separate form. The grammar is
a good one ; but the special feature of the " German Manual " consists
in its comprehensiveness, which will be apparent from the following sum-
mary of its contents: — Part I. Accidence. Part II. Syntax. Part III.
Interlinear Translation. Part IV. German for Translation into English.
Part V. Notes and Helpful Hints. Part VI. English Version of Part IV.
for Re-translation. By an ingenious system of adaptation, the six parts
are to be proceeded with simultaneously. Thus every part throwing
light upon the rest, and the student having to deal with the same passages
over and over again, the process of mental assimilation is likely to be
rendered more real and rapid. When we add that the book contains a
humorous comedy and an excellent" life of Beethoven, our readers will
4 LANGES GERMAN COURSE.
acknowledge that Herr Lange has provided that variety which is proverbi-
ally charming. From the conspicuous absence of the namby-pamby
element — unfortunately too common in translation exercises — as well as
from the general excellence of the work, it may be confidently recom-
mended, especially for the use of adult students.' Schoolmaster.
*Herr Lange's method is excellent for simplicity and clearness.'
Saturday Revieiv,
* German Composition.'
* Having used H. Lange's Composition for about a couple of years with
my advanced pupils, I am in a position to state that it has more than
answered the very favourable expectations I had formed on a first perusal
of the work. To my mind its chief recommendations are : —
I St. It may safely be put into the hands of learners at an earlier stage
than most works of this class.
2nd. The judicious manner in which the exercises have been graduated,
and the careful elucidation of all grammatical difhculties.
3rd. The admirable rendering of English idioms into their German
equivalents.' — John j. T. Jackson, Lecturer on Modern Languages and
Philology at the Lancashire Independent College^ and the Wesleyan College^
Didsbury.
* After a very careful perusal of " Hermann Lange's German Compo-
sition," I have no hesiation to say that it seems to me to be the best book
of that kind, — not only with regard to the choice of good extracts from
modern English authors, but also in respect to the thoroughness and correct-
ness of the Notes. I shall find it exceedingly useful w-ith my pupils for the
Army and Civil Service Examinations.'— Theodore H. Dittel, London^
Tutor to Students preparing for the Army and Ci-vil Service Examinations.
* I prefer the book to all others on German Composition.' — Ernest
R. Morgan, London.
* We begin with simple stories of two or three sentences each, and so
fully annotated that they may be read off into German by a pupil who
knows his first accidence, and ascend by easy gradients to Sir Walter Scott
and IVIacnulay.
It is throughout a careful, accurate, and scholarly piece of work.'
Journal of Education.
(Orfori:
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS.
LONDON: HENRY FROWDE,
Oxford University Pres s Wa rehouse, Amex Corner, E.G.
k
7
1
'\
sM
JO